Manual Técnico UHRN

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.
10
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
9600USY&MDR9000S REL.2.0 UHRN TECH.HDBK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
QUICK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
1 DOCUMENT GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 Handbook structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 List of symbols and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
21
21
22
23
25
25
27
28
DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
2 INTRODUCTION TO THE 9600USY RADIO SYSTEM FAMILY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 9600USY basic configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
43
43
45
3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 UHRN general description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Network applications of the 9600USY/UHRN equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 UHRN System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4 UHRN Hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.5 UHRNIDU/REG shelf composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.6 UHRNIDU/EPS shelf composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
47
48
48
49
50
52
56
58
01
020708
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
G.CONSONNI ITACO
E.CORRADINI ITACO
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
9600USY&MDR9000s REL.2.0
UHRN VERSION
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
1 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
59
60
60
60
63
64
69
72
72
73
75
78
78
80
84
84
84
85
85
85
86
86
86
87
88
89
93
93
95
95
95
96
97
97
97
98
99
100
101
4 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Part lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1 IDU/REG Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2 ODU, Antenna and Outdoor Hybrids part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3 Additional items for EPS option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 IDU/REG shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 IDU/REG shelf composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 IDU/REG shelf units operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 IDU/EPS shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 IDU/EPS shelf composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 IDU/EPS shelf operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 ODU assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.1 Types of ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
103
103
105
105
109
110
111
111
118
132
132
136
140
140
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
2 / 458

3.2.7 UHRNODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3 UHRN Radio Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2 ODU and antenna configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3 1+1/2+0 ODU constraints in UHRN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4 Configurations of Filters and Antennas for UHRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.5 Expandibility by means of outdoor hybrids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 9600USY Radio Transmission features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Frequency Agility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Transmitted power control: ATPC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4 Transmitted power control: Static Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.5 Frequency Reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.6 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.7 Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 UHRN Protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 Signal Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3 WST protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.4 Services protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 UHRN Signal transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2 STM1 transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.3 SDH mapping adopted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.4 SDH interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.5 SOH bytes and service channel access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.6 UHRN Engineering Order Wire Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.7 9600USY Data Channel Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 UHRN Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.3 Last mile and spur applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 UHRN Equipment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.3 The NE general architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.4 UHRN behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.5 The F and Qecc/QB3 interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.6 ECT and RECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

4.5.2 ODU 1+0 compact equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5.3 ODU 1+1/2+0 equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.4 ODU physical views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.5 ODU service replaceable parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 External interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.1 SDH line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.2 Input / Output WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.3 Management Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.4 Service channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.5 IF Input / Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.6 Analogic Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.7 Power Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.8 LED meaning summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.9 Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.10 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
143
145
153
156
156
158
159
160
162
162
162
163
164
164
5 STATION LAYOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Constraints for UHRN multiple equipping in a rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Configurations without EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2 Equipment provisioning with ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.3 Equipment provisioning with ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.4 Heterofrequency CoPolar (CP) and AlternatePolar (AP) configurations . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.5 XPOL Frequency Reuse configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.6 Procedures for station layout change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Configurations with EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2 IDU/REG and IDU/EPS shelf interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.3 Equipment provisioning with ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets, with EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.4 Equipment provisioning with ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets, with EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.5 Heterofrequency CoPolar (CP) and AlternatePolar (AP) configurations, with EPS
5.4.6 XPOL Frequency Reuse configurations, with EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
171
172
173
173
174
176
177
197
210
211
211
212
215
216
217
226
6 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Equipment Control Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1 Control Subsystem Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2 Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.3 Control Subsystem Software Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.4 Signal Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.5 Remote Inventory subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.6 SAM 3+1 unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.7 Flash Card description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.8 LOGIC unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Baseband subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.1 General and interconnection block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.2 RMD unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.3 STM1 Electrical module description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.4 STM1 Optical module description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.5 XPIC board description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.6 EPS board description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Power supply subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
233
233
234
234
265
272
275
303
304
307
308
311
311
316
322
323
324
325
329
329
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
3 / 458
329
330
332
333
334
335
335
337
340
341
7 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Transceiver Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Characteristics of IF and RF connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 IDUODU interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.2 Integrated antenna characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.3 ODU to external antenna connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Modem characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6 Regenerator characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7 Protection characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8 Power supply characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9 Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10 Environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.1 General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.2 Mechanically active substances for IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.3 ETS 300019 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.4 ETS 300019 Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.5 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.6 Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11 Optical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11.1 Related Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11.2 Hazard Level classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11.3 Incorporated laser sources characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11.4 Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11.5 Aperture and fiber connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11.6 Engineering design features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11.7 Safety instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
343
343
344
349
349
349
349
349
350
352
353
354
354
355
355
355
356
358
360
362
363
363
363
363
364
364
364
364
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
8 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1 EMC norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.3 Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 Instruments and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.1 Software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.2 Maintenance Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.3 Portable Service Kit (ODU maintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4 Alarm Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.1 Centralized Equipment Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
369
369
370
370
370
371
371
371
372
376
379
379
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
4 / 458

6.4.2 Power Supply Unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4.3 Power supply distribution in IDU/REG shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.4 Power supply distribution in ODU assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.5 Power supply distribution in IDU/EPS shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 FANS Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 ODU Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.2 Transceiver unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.3 Local Oscillator description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.4 RF Branching description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.4.2 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SAM 3+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8.4.3 Alarm visual indications on units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.4 Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.5 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.1 Types of Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.2 Number of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.3 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5.4 Spare Flash Card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6 Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6.1 Routine Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6.2 Routine Maintenance for Fans Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7 Corrective Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.1 General flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.2 Alarm acknowledgment and attending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.3 TroubleShooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.4 Unit replacement in IDU/REG shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.5 Unit replacement in IDU/EPS shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.6 General replacement procedure for units in IDU/REG & IDU/EPS shelves . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.7 ODU Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8.2 Repair Form filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
381
381
381
381
382
382
384
385
385
386
386
387
388
388
389
390
393
398
400
402
405
405
405
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
9 DOCUMENTATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2 Productreleaseversion handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3 General on Alcatel Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.1 CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.2 Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.3 Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operators Handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.4 Documentation on paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.5 Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3.6 Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
409
409
410
416
416
417
419
421
423
425
10 SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2 Compliance with European Norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.1 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.4 Harmful Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.5 Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.6 Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.7 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.8 Microwave radiations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3.9 Specific safety rules in this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.1 EMC General Norms Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.2 EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.4.3 EMC General Norms Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
427
427
427
428
428
429
430
431
433
433
434
435
435
436
436
437
437
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
5 / 458
438
438
439
439
443
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
11 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2 Hardware setting documents explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3 List of enclosed documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.1 Documentation for hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
453
453
453
456
456
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
6 / 458

10.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10.6 Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7 Labels affixed to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.1 Labels specific for 9600USY Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.7.2 General use labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

FIGURES
Fig. 1. UHR/UHRC system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 2. WMSN system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 3. UHRN system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 4. UHD/UHDC system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 5. Radio ring STM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 6. Ring closure and radio spurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 7. UHRN max configuration N+1 with/without occasional traffic, with RPS and without EPS .
Fig. 8. UHRN max configuration N+1 with/without occasional traffic, with RPS and with EPS . . . .
Fig. 9. UHRN main hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 10. UHRN layout (max equipment, with ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets, and without EPS) . . . . . . . .
Fig. 11. UHRN layout (max equipment, with ODU 1+0 Compact cabinets, and without EPS) . . .
Fig. 12. UHRN layout (max equipment, with ODU 1+0 Compact cabinets, and with EPS) . . . . . .
Fig. 13. UHRNIDU/REG shelf boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 14. UHRNIDU/EPS shelf boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 15. Allowed radio configurations for double ODU in UHRN system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 16. 2/1 hybrid application for two copolar channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 17. 4/1 hybrid application for four copolar channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 18. 2/1 hybrids application for four dual polarity channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 19. 4/1 hybrids application for eight 1+0 ODU with two polarizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 20. Hybrid 4/1 for four 1+1/2+0 ODU dual polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 21. Frequency agility restriction (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 22. ATPC Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 23. Typical ATPC threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 24. XPIC kit in Frequency Reuse configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 25. Loopback A: RRA (RMD) line loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 26. Loopback B: RRA (RMD) internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 27. Loopback C: RFCOH (RMD) Internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 28. Loopback D: RF (RT) Internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 29. EC position with respect to loopback points and consequent unavailability by RECT
(CH0 / 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 30. Allowed and not allowed loopbacks by RECT (CH0 / 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 31. 1:N HET protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 32. General Multiplexing Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 33. General European Multiplexing Structure with addition of 45 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 34. G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 35. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 36. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 37. Pointtopoint connection between two SDH subnetwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 38. Pointtopoint connection between two Ethernet routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 39. Spur/Last mile application between SDH network and User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 40. DCC management: Regenerator case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 41. UHRN IDU/REG shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering)
Fig. 42. UHRN IDU/REG shelf board equipment physical view (max equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 43. SAM 3+1 AUX. SERVICE & MANAGEMENT Unit assembly view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 44. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 45. Auxiliary service unit (SAM 3+1) front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 46. SAM boards LEDs position, colour and meaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 47. SAM boards I/O WEST 2 Mbit/s 75 Ohm unbalanced connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 48. LOGIC unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 49. RRA/MODEM assembly view (with optical module extracted and without XPIC option) . .
ED
45
45
45
46
49
49
51
51
52
53
54
55
56
58
63
69
70
70
71
71
74
75
76
79
80
80
80
81
82
83
85
87
87
93
94
94
96
96
96
99
111
111
118
118
119
120
120
123
125
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
7 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
125
126
126
128
128
129
130
130
131
132
132
137
137
138
139
141
143
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
154
155
155
156
174
175
176
178
178
179
180
180
181
182
182
183
184
184
185
186
186
187
188
188
189
189
190
191
191
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
8 / 458

Fig. 50. RRA/MODEM unit front view (without XPIC option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 51. RRA/MODEM with XPIC option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 52. RRA/MODEM unit front view (with XPIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 53. View of STM1 electrical module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 54. View of STM1 optical module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 55. Power Supply Unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 56. FANS Unit assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 57. Fans Unit + Front plate view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 58. CONNECTION TO EPS SUBRACK Unit assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 59. UHRN IDU/EPS shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering)
Fig. 60. UHRN IDU/EPS shelf board equipment physical view (max equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 61. EPS module assembly (without Optical module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 62. EPS module assembly (with Optical module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 63. EPS module front view (without Optical module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 64. CONNECTION TO 3+1 SUBRACK assembly and front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 65. ODU 1+0 compact shelves and RTRMD association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 66. ODU 1+1/2+0 shelves and RTRMD association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 67. External Interfaces and channel external identification on ODU 1+0 COMPACT . . . . . . . .
Fig. 68. ODU 1+0 compact physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 69. External Interfaces on ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1 and 2+0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 70. Channel external identification on ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1 and 2+0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 71. 1+1/2+0 ODU Copolar frequency diversity physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 72. 1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 73. 1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar XPOL (with XPIC) physical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 74. Example of Transceiver (1825 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 75. Example of Local Oscillator (1338 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 76. Example of TransceiverLocal OscillatorAdapter kit ASSEMBLY (1825 GHz) . . . . . . . .
Fig. 77. Representation of optical line system interface (as Figure 1/G.957) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 78. UHRN board provisioning (system growth) with ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets and without EPS
Fig. 79. UHRN E/O modules provisioning (system growth), without EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 80. UHRN board provisioning (system growth) with ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets,
without EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 81. UHRN 1+0 CP/AP : station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 82. UHRN 1+0 CP : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 83. UHRN 1+0 AP : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 84. UHRN 1+1 CP/AP without EPS: station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 85. UHRN 1+1 CP without EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 86. UHRN 1+1 AP without EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 87. UHRN 2+0 or 1+1 with occasional traffic CP/AP : station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 90. UHRN 1+1 with occasional traffic CP without EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 91. UHRN 1+1 with occasional traffic AP without EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 92. UHRN 2+1 CP/AP without EPS : station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 93. UHRN 2+1 CP without EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 94. UHRN 2+1 AP without EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 95. UHRN 3+0 or 2+1 with occasional traffic CP/AP : station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 98. UHRN 2+1 with occasional traffic CP without EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 99. UHRN 2+1 with occasional traffic AP without EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 100. UHRN 3+1 CP/AP without EPS : station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 101. UHRN 3+1 CP without EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 102. UHRN 3+1 AP without EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 103. UHRN 4+0 or 3+1 with occasional traffic CP/AP : station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 104. UHRN 4+0 CP : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 105. UHRN 4+0 AP : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 106. UHRN 3+1 with occasional traffic CP without EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 107. UHRN 3+1 with occasional traffic AP without EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 108. UHRN 3+1 DOUBLE CABINET without EPS : station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 109. UHRN 3+1 DOUBLE CABINET without EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 110. UHRN 1+0 expandable XPOL FR : station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 111. UHRN 1+0 expandable XPOL FR : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 112. UHRN 1+1 XPOL FR without EPS : station layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 113. UHRN 1+1 XPOL FR without EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 114. UHRN 2+0 or 1+1 with occasional traffic without EPS XPOL FR : station layout . . . . .
Fig. 115. UHRN 2+0 XPOL FR : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 116. UHRN 1+1 with occasional traffic XPOL FR without EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 121. UHRN 2+1 with occasional traffic without EPS XPOL FR : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 126. UHRN 3+1 with occasional traffic without EPS XPOL FR : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 127. IDU/REG and IDU/EPS logic signal interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 128. Cable Kit Extension 1 Channel and suggested labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 129. IDU/REG and IDU/EPS electrical STM1 interconnection (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 130. UHRN board provisioning (system growth) with ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets and with EPS . .
Fig. 131. UHRN board provisioning (system growth) with ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets and
with EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 132. UHRN 1+1 with/without occasional traffic CP/AP, with EPS : station layout . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 133. UHRN 1+1 with/without occasional traffic CP with EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 134. UHRN 1+1 with/without occasional traffic AP with EPS : block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 141. UHRN 3+1 with/without occasional traffic DOUBLE CABINET with EPS : station layout
Fig. 142. UHRN 3+1 with/without occasional traffic DOUBLE CABINET with EPS : block diagram
Fig. 143. UHRN 1+1 XPOL FR with/without occasional traffic, with EPS : station layout . . . . . . . .
Fig. 144. UHRN 1+1 XPOL FR with/without occasional traffic, with EPS : block diagram . . . . . . .
Fig. 149. Functional decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 150. Supervision process decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 151. Supervision process within atomic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 152. RSPI functional decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 153. Regenerator section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 154. Radio sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 155. PM inside atomic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
192
193
193
194
194
195
196
198
198
199
199
200
200
201
202
203
204
205
205
206
207
208
209
209
212
213
214
215
216
218
219
219
220
221
221
222
223
223
224
225
227
227
228
229
230
231
235
236
237
238
240
240
241
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
9 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
245
246
247
248
250
252
255
256
257
262
266
267
269
270
271
274
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
286
289
290
296
297
297
299
300
310
312
313
314
315
317
320
321
322
323
324
327
328
329
331
332
333
334
336
338
339
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
10 / 458

Fig. 156. Equipment management function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 157. Fault management inside management function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 158. Performance events generation process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 159. PM inside management functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 160. DCC routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 161. M+N Protection Switch Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 162. DSI channel implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 163. EPS 3+1, Tx section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 164. EPS 3+1, Rx section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 165. Frozen state management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 166. UHRx control subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 167. UHRN communication interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 168. Physical implementation of UHRN communication interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 169. Detail of Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 170. Logical signal interconnection between IDU/REG and IDU/EPS shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 171. VMM module decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 172. STM1 frame structure and WST mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 173. WST channel structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 174. RFCOH channels structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 175. Multiplexing of Administrative Unit Groups (AUGs) into STMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 176. Multiplexing of an AU4 via AUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 177. Multiplexing of AU3s via AUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 178. Multiplexing of Tributary Unit Group3s (TUG3s) into a VC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 179. Multiplexing of a TU3 via TUG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 180. SOH management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 181. Service channels functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 182. DCCR management (ADM towards RADIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 183. DCCR management (RADIO towards ADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 184. TIM algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 185. The 16_BYTE machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 186. The 1_BYTE machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 187. ATPC management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 188. MC management on RX terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 189. LOGIC unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 190. UHRN Block diagram Up to 3+1 terminal configuration, without EPS, Tx side . . . . . . . .
Fig. 191. UHRN Block diagram Up to 3+1 terminal configuration, without EPS, Rx side . . . . . . .
Fig. 192. UHRN block diagram Up to 3+1 terminal configuration, with EPS, Tx side . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 193. UHRN block diagram Up to 3+1 terminal configuration, with EPS, Rx side . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 194. RMD block diagram (RRA section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 195. RMD block diagram (MODEM section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 196. IDU/ODU Cable interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 197. STM1 electrical module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 198. STM1 optical module block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 199. XPIC board block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 200. Block diagram of EPS unit used as EPS0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 201. Block diagram of EPS unit used as EPS1,2,3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 202. Power supply unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 203. UHRN IDU/REG shelf Power distribution Block diagram for PSU 0 and 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 204. UHRN IDU/REG shelf Power distribution Block diagram for PSU 2 and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 205. UHRN IDU/EPS shelf Power distribution Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 206. Fans unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 207. ODU Radio block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 208. Service Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 209. ODU Power distribution (single RT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 210. L.O. block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 211. 1+0 not ext. branching assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 212. 1+1/2+0 Homopolar frequency diversity branching assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 213. 1+1/2+0 Crosspolar Freq. Diversity / Freq. Reuse 1 cabinet branching assembly . . . .
Fig. 214. ETSI Reference points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 215. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 216. Climatogram for Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 217. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 218. 128QAM BER curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 219. 16QAM BER curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 220. Special extractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 221. Plug (on Transceiver 0 only) for TR0/TR1 address distinction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 222. Lever for ODU opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 223. Special cables for maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 224. Portable Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 225. Leds and pushbuttons on SAM unit for maintenance purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 226. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 227. TroubleShooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 228. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 229. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 230. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 231. Antistatic protection device kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 232. Label affixed on 9600USY IDU assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 233. Label affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 1+0 compact configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 234. Item Identification label affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 2+0 or 1+1 configuration
Fig. 235. Polarization Type label affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 2+0 or 1+1 configuration .
Fig. 236. Largesubrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 237. Smallsubrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 238. Labels on units with standard cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 239. Modules label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 240. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 241. Back panels internal label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 242. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 243. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
340
341
342
342
343
357
358
361
365
366
373
373
374
375
377
379
388
390
406
417
418
438
439
440
441
442
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
450
TABLES
Tab. 1. Quick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 2. Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 3. List of symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 4. List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 5. Urban SDH 9600USY radio family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 6. UHRN System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 7. Types of RRA/MODEM units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 8. Need for XPIC option (in frequency reuse configurations) according to modulation . . . . . .
Tab. 9. Configurations of Filters and Antennas summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 10. 128 QAM STM1; 6 to 11 GHz Radio configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 11. 128 QAM STM1; 13 to 38 GHz Radio configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 12. 32 QAM STM1, 13 to 38 GHz Radio configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 13. 16 QAM STM1; 18 to 38 GHz Radio configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 14. Frequency Agility availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 15. OH bytes suitable for handling on MST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 16. OH bytes suitable for handling on RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 17. RFCOH byte structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 18. Reg. AUX/EOW user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
25
28
28
44
50
56
57
64
65
66
67
68
73
89
89
90
91
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
11 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
105
109
110
112
112
113
114
115
116
117
117
122
122
127
127
133
133
134
134
135
140
142
144
157
159
159
161
162
162
164
165
166
170
239
243
253
263
305
306
330
363
372
380
382
382
383
383
383
390
393
398
411
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
12 / 458

Tab. 19. 9600USY/UHRN IDU/REG Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tab. 20. Notes to Tab. 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 21. Additional items for EPS option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 22. SAM 3+1 unit and Flash Card equipping rules and composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 23. LOGIC unit equipping rules and composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 24. RMD slot occupation according to system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 25. RMD board equipping rules and composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 26. Electrical/Optical Modules on RMD boards equipping rules and composition . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 27. PSU units equipping rules and composition in REG shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 28. FANS units equipping rules and composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 29. CONNECTION TO EPS SUBRACK equipping rules and composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 30. SAM 3+1 Dipswitch I2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 31. SAM 3+1 Dipswitch I3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 32. RT fail led operation when led onair management hardware setting is disabled . . . . . .
Tab. 33. RT fail led operation when led onair management hardware setting is enabled . . . . . . .
Tab. 34. EPS MODULE slot occupation according to system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 35. EPS MODULE board equipping rules and composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 36. Optical Modules on EPS MODULE boards equipping rules and composition . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 37. PSU units equipping rules and composition in EPS shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 38. CONNECTION TO 3+1 SUBRACK units equipping rules and composition in EPS shelf .
Tab. 39. Types of ODU employable in UHRN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 40. ODU 1+0 compact RT usage according to system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 41. ODU 1+1/2+0 RT slot occupation according to system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 42. Parameters specified for STM1 Optical Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 43. RJ45 Connector for 10baseT interface on SAM 3+1 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 44. RS232 for F interface connection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 45. SAM 3+1 boards Service channels on SCSI 26 pins connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 46. PRx 23 analog measures (on LOGIC unit) connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 47. Power Supply Unit connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 48. Station Alarms connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 49. SAM 3+1 boards Alarms, Rx field analog voltage and housekeeping, SCSI 40 pins
connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 50. Relationship between remote alarms and alarm primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 51. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 52. Fault management process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 53. Entities monitored by the performance monitoring primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 54. Switching Initiation Criteria Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 55. EPS control command priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 56. RSOH switching criteria alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 57. RFCOH switching criteria alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 58. Power Supply Unit specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 59. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 60. Maintenance Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 61. Relationship between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm
severity terminology used for the System Controller unit remote alarm connector pins. . . . . . . . .
Tab. 62. Spare parts list for all UHRN configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 63. Additional spare parts list for N+1 configurations or N+0 with N > 2 configurations . . .
Tab. 64. Additional spare parts list for configurations without XPIC option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 65. Additional spare parts list for configurations with XPIC option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 66. Additional spare parts list for configurations with EPS shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 67. Normal condition (no alarms) of LEDs on equipments units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 68. IDU/REG shelfs assembly / unit replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 69. IDU/EPS shelfs assembly / unit replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 70. Handbooks usage according to system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tab. 71. Technical Handbooks related to the specific configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tab. 72. Operators Handbooks related to the specific Software Package SWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 73. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 75. Installation and LineUp Handbooks related to the specific configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 76. Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 77. IEC 950 Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 78. Label references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 79. Example of correspondence between CS and suffix + ICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 80. Hardware setting documentation cross references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 81. List of enclosed documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
412
413
414
415
415
434
443
453
456
457
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
13 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
14 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
HANDBOOK GUIDE
SECTION CONTENT
ED
955.203.363 W
PAGE
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
16
QUICK GUIDE
17
SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

20
Chapter 1 Document Guide

21
01
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
15 / 458

a)
Warranty
Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contact of sale of the equipment this
handbook refers to.
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or
special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
b)
Information
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
c)
Copyright Notification
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
d)
Safety recommendations
The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or
damage to the equipment:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
e)
ED
1)
Service Personnel
Installation and service must be carried out by authorized people having appropriate technical
training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and
service and of measures to avoid any danger to them, to any other people and to the equipment.
2)
Access to the Equipment

Access to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only.
3)
Safety norms
Recommended safety norms are indicated in this manual as described in para.10.3 on pages
428 on.
Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in this handbook should
be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In the case of conflict between safety
instructions stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local
norms will prevail. Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety norms in this manual
will prevail.
Service Personnel skill

Service Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on telecommunications and in
particular on the equipment this handbook refers to.
Without an adequate training, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in
para.9.2 on page 410 is usually not enough to properly install, operate and maintain equipment.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
16 / 458

PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
QUICK GUIDE
N.B.
In the documentation on CDROM, this table represent hyperlinks to the referenced parts.
Tab. 1. Quick guide

If you need immediate operative information on how to:
GENERAL TOPICS
get information on system
documentation
read chapter 9 on page 409 of this handbook
have a very short description of the

system
read para.3.2 on pages 48 thru 59 of this handbook
logically configure a station (or

change its configuration), logically
provision equipment boards and
logically setup connections
for:
IDU/REG (without EPS option), read para.4.2.1 on page

105 in this handbook
IDUs additional items for EPS option, read para.4.2.3 on

page 110 in this handbook
ODU and ANTENNAS and OUTDOOR HYBRIDS, get

ODU TECHNICAL HANDBOOK (REF.[A] on page 412)
and read its QUICK GUIDE (same topics)
getting item P/Ns
TOPICS FOR ODU ASSEMBLY

get basic operative information
regarding the ODU assembly
read para.4.5 on page 140 of this handbook
get detailed information regarding

the ODU assembly (frequency plans
and P/Ns)
get ODU TECHNICAL HANDBOOK (REF.[A] on page

412) and read its QUICK GUIDE (same topics)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 1. continues ..
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
17 / 458
GENERAL TOPICS FOR INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE

get information on safety, EMC,
ESD norms and equipment labelling

in this handbook, for:
get operative information regarding

the units in IDU shelf (connectors,
leds, buttons)
SAM: read para.4.3.2.1 on page 118
LOGIC: read para.4.3.2.2 on page 123
RRA/MODEM and XPIC: read para.4.3.2.3 on page 124
STM1 electrical and optical modules: read para.4.3.2.4

on page 128
Power Supply Unit: read para.4.3.2.5 on page 129
Fans Unit: read para.4.3.2.6 on page 130
and, for units relative to the EPS option:
carry out unit hardware setting
EPS unit (in EPS shelf): read para.4.4.2.1 on page 137
CONNECTION TO 3+1 SUBRACK unit (in EPS shelf):

read para.4.4.2.2 on page 139
CONNECTION TO EPS SUBRACK unit (in REG shelf):

read para.4.3.2.7 on page 131
read para.11.3.1 on page 456 of this handbook
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING

physically install and cable the
equipment hardware
get UHRN Installation Handbook (Ref.[S] on page 415)

and proceed as specified by it
install or update Craft Terminals

and/or equipments software
get UHRN CT Operators Handbook (Ref.[H] on page

413) and read its QUICK GUIDE (same topics)
commission equipment
get UHRN Lineup Guide (Ref.[T] on page 415) and

proceed as specified by it
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 1. continues ..
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
18 / 458

.. continues Tab. 1.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

.. continues Tab. 1.
MAINTENANCE
provision and manage spare parts
carry out routine maintenance
carry out corrective maintenance
end of Tab. 1.
To find any other kind of information not listed in the above table, please start reading para.1.4 on page
23, and then search the information according to the handbook structure described.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
19 / 458
SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

Please refer to Chapter 10 on page 427 to obtain details regarding following information:
Compliance with European norms
Safety rules:
TOPIC

a)
WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
General rules
Dangerous Electrical Voltages
Harmful optical signals
Risk of explosion
Moving mechanical parts
Heatradiating mechanical parts

Microwave radiations
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges:

TOPIC
WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
b)
ED
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)
Other Labels affixed to the Equipment
Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, WorkStation etc., other than ALCATELs,
loaded with software applications described in this or other Handbooks, is supplied in the
Constructors technical documentation.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
20 / 458

1 DOCUMENT GUIDE
1.1 Introduction
This chapter contains all information regarding this handbook and is organized as follows:
Handbook applicability
herebelow
Purpose of the handbook
on page 22
Handbook structure
on page 23
Handbook history
on page 25
List of symbols and abbreviations
on page 28
1.2 Handbook applicability

This handbook applies to the following product-releases:
PRODUCT
RELEASE
ANV P/N
FACTORY P/N
9662USY
2.00.00
3DB 03706 AAAA
522.172.020
9667USY
2.00.00
3DB 03707 AAAA
522.172.120
9674USY
2.00.00
3DB 03708 AAAA
522.172.220
9681USY
2.00.00
3DB 03709 AAAA
522.172.320
9611USY
2.00.00
3DB 03710 AAAA
522.172.420
9613USY
2.00.00
3DB 03711 AAAA
522.170.020
9615USY
2.00.00
3DB 03712 AAAA
522.170.120
9618USY
2.00.00
3DB 03713 AAAA
522.170.220
9623USY
2.00.00
3DB 03714 AAAA
522.170.320
9625USY
2.00.00
3DB 03715 AAAA
522.170.420
9628USY
2.00.00
3DB 03716 AAAA
522.170.720
9632USY
2.00.00
3DB 03717 AAAA
522.172.720
9638USY
2.00.00
3DB 03718 AAAA
522.170.820
in the following Regenerator UHRN configurations:

(1 N 4)
unprotected N+0
protected N+1 with / without occasional traffic
with or without EPS protection.
(1 N 3)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Please refer to para.9.2 on page 410 for further information.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
21 / 458
This handbook belongs to the Customer Documentation set envisaged for the equipment specified in para.
1.2 on page 21.
Please refer to chapter 9 on page 409 to have the list and description of such Customer Documentation
set.
With reference to equipment configuration stated in para.1.2 on page 21, this handbook provides the
following pieces of information:
system description on two levels: first level and detailed level, both from system, hardware and
software points of view
system Technical Specifications
system hardware structure: item Part Numbers and equipping rules (provisioning)
unit operative hardware description: access point description (usage of led, pushbuttons, switches
and connectors for Customer use), connection rules, hardware setting options
typical examples of station layouts, with operative instructions for unit layout and physical
interconnections by cables
spare parts provisioning
preventive maintenance procedures
corrective maintenance and unit replacement procedures (N.B.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
In any case, the C.T. Operators Handbook must be always available to the Operator in
charge of the equipment troubleshooting and repair, as it contains the information
necessary to carry out troubleshooting through the Craft Terminal.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
22 / 458

1.3 Purpose of the handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1.4 Handbook structure

This handbook is composed by a main handbook and enclosed documents. Information is divided into
the following main sections and levels as detailed in the table of contents:
MAIN HANDBOOK
N.B.
A summary description of the contents is given at the beginning of each chapter.

INFORMATIVE LEVEL
OPERATIVE LEVEL
SECTION HANDBOOK GUIDE
Chapter 1 Document Guide

It contains all information regarding this
handbook.
Quick Guide
It allows to access immediately the most
frequently needed operative pieces of
information contained in this handbook, in its
enclosed documents and in other related
handbooks.
SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
It describes all the equipment general and detailed system features including its application in the
telecommunication network. Furthermore, it supplies the equipment description and specifications. The
description is organized in the following levels:
Chapter 2 Introduction to the 9600USY

Radio System Family
It explains briefly the characteristics of
9600USY equipment family and introduces
the various basic configurations (UHRC,
UHR, UHRN, UHD and WMSN).
Chapter 3 System Description

It gives the firstlevel description of 9600USY
equipment in the UHRN configuration. The
information given is enough to understand the
equipment composition and operation and to
read the operative level chapters.
Chapter 4 Physical Configuration

It gives detailed operative information
regarding UHRN configuration:
the equipments items (P/Ns, equipping

rules, labels for remote inventory)
their physical and logical position in the

system
the unit assembly/subassembly and

front panel drawings, with the usage
description of the access points
(connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
hardware setting description
description of the interconnection

between IDU/REG and IDU/EPS
shelves, and between IDU/REG and
ODU
pinout description of connectors for

Customer usage
summary and operative information on

characteristics of external interfaces
table continues
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
23 / 458
MAIN HANDBOOK
OPERATIVE LEVEL
.. continues SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
Chapter 6 Functional Description

It gives the secondlevel description of
9600USY equipment in the UHRN
configuration. Reading this chapter is not
necessary to carry out standard installation
commissioning and maintenance activities.
Chapter 7 Technical Specifications
It supplies in detail the technical
characteristics of the 9600USY in
configurations: UHRC, UHR, UHRN and
WMSN.
Chapter 5 Station Layouts

It lists and describes the most common of all
the
available
system
configurations
envisaged for the 9600USY family in UHRN
configuration. For each configuration a
station layout and a simple system block
diagram are present.
SECTION MAINTENANCE
Chapter 8 Maintenance
It describes the routine and corrective
maintenance of 9600USY equipment in the
UHRN configuration.
SECTION APPENDICES
Chapter 9 Documentation Guide

It contains all information regarding the
Customer Documentation.
Chapter 10 SafetyEMCESD norms and

equipment labelling
It describes the equipment labelling and the
norms mandatory or suggested that must be
considered to avoid injuries on persons
and/or damage to the equipment.
SECTION HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES
Chapter
11
Hardware
Setting
Documentation
It lists the enclosed documents having P/N
different from that of this handbook (they can
be used also as annexes to other handbooks)
and describes how to use the Hardware
Setting Documents enclosed.
ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
INFORMATIVE LEVEL
OPERATIVE LEVEL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
a)
ED
documents related to hardware setting

options of the units for which they are
envisaged
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
24 / 458

INFORMATIVE LEVEL
1.5 Handbook history

1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts

The following Tab. 2. indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.
Legend
n
= new part
m = modified part
blank
= part unchanged
Tab. 2. Handbook history
HANDBOOK EDITION
HANDBOOK GUIDE
1.
4.
5.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
6.
ED
02
03
04
05
DOCUMENT GUIDE
DESCRIPTIONS
2. INTRODUCTION TO THE 9600USY RADIO SYSTEM FAMILY
3.
01
n
n
2.1. Foreword
2.2. General
2.3. 9600USY basic configurations
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.1. Introduction
3.2. UHRN general description
3.3. UHRN Radio Configurations
3.4. 9600USY Radio Transmission features
3.5. UHRN Protections
3.6. UHRN Signal transmission
3.7. UHRN Synchronization
3.8. UHRN Equipment control
PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION
4.1. Introduction
4.2. Part list
4.3. IDU/REG shelf
4.4. IDU/EPS shelf
4.5. ODU assembly
4.6. External interfaces
STATION LAYOUTS
5.1. Introduction
5.2. Constraints for UHRN multiple equipping in a rack
5.3. Configurations without EPS
5.4. Configurations with EPS
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
6.1. Introduction
6.2. Equipment Control Subsystem
6.3. Baseband subsystem
6.4. Power supply subsystem
6.5. FANS subsystem
6.6. ODU subsystem
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
25 / 458
Tab. 2. Handbook history

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
7.1. Introduction
7.2. General Characteristics
7.3. Transceiver Characteristics
7.4. Characteristics of IF and RF connections
7.5. Modem characteristics
7.6. Regenerator characteristics
7.7. Protection characteristics
7.8. Power supply characteristics
7.9. Mechanical characteristics
7.10. Environmental characteristics
7.11. Optical Safety
MAINTENANCE
8. MAINTENANCE
8.2. Warnings
8.3. Instruments and accessories
8.4. Alarm Description
8.5. Set of spare parts
8.6. Routine Maintenance
8.7. Corrective Maintenance
8.8. Faulty unit repair and Repair Form
04
05
n
n
9.1. Introduction
9.2. Productreleaseversion handbooks
9.3. General on Alcatel Customer Documentation
10. SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
10.1. Introduction
10.2. Compliance with European Norms
10.3. Safety Rules
10.4. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)
10.5. Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
10.6. Suggestions, notes and cautions
10.7. Labels affixed to the Equipment
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION

11. HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION
ED
03
8.1. Introduction
11.1. Introduction
11.2. Hardware setting documents explanation
11.3. List of enclosed documents
Note:
02
APPENDICES
9. DOCUMENTATION GUIDE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
01
n

HANDBOOK EDITION
7.
the edition of the documents enclosed in section HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION

is not stated in this table.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
26 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01

Ed.01 created on July 8, 2002 is the first validated and officially released issue.
Chapter Technical Specifications does not include specific characteristics for 9632USY product and
32QAM modulation, that will be included in handbook future edition.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
27 / 458
1.6 List of symbols and abbreviations
N.B.

Tab. 3. List of symbols

This table lists some symbols whose interpretation could be doubtful.
SYMBOL
MEANING AND COMMENTS

In this handbook it is not the division symbol. It means from .. to ...
E.g.:
<value1> <value2>
means:
from <value1> (included) to <value2> (included)
A polarization symbol like this:
POLARIZATION can be assumed as either horizontal

SYMBOLS
Once you have decided a polarization (e.g.
or vertical
H
)
)
the opposite direction symbol will be opposite polarization (e.g.

V
Tab. 4. List of abbreviations
MEANING
ABBREVIATION
STARTING WITH NUMBERS

1D
1 STM1 drop insert
2D
2 STM1 drop insert
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A
ABIL
Enabling
ABN
Abnormal
AC
Alternate Current
ACSE
Association Control Service Element
ADC A/D
Analog to Digital Converter
AE
Access Enable
AF
Atomic Function
ADM
Add and Drop Multiplexer
AGC
Automatic Gain Control
AIS
Alarm indication Signal
ALS
Automatic Laser Shutdown
AMI
Alternate Mark Inversion
AND
Alarm on both station batteries
ANSI
American National Standard Institute
AOW
Additional Order Wire
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
28 / 458

ABBREVIATION
MEANING
AP
Alternate polar
APD
Avalanche Photodiode
API
Access Point Identifier
APS
Automatic Protection Switching
ASE
Application Service Element
ASIC
Application Specific Integrated Circuit
AT
Attended Alarm
ATL
Far Terminal Alarm
ATM
Asynchronous transfer Mode
ATPC
Automatic Transmit Power Control
ATTD
ATTendeD (alarm storing)
AUn
Administrative Unit n (Order)
AUG
Administrative Unit Group
AUOH
AU Pointer
AUX
AUXiliary
B
BATT
Battery
BB
Base Band
BBE
Background Block Error
BCA
Common Battery Dial Pulsing (Telephone Set)
BER
Bit Error Rate
BIPx
Bit Interleaved Parity x
BNC
Bayonet Not Coupling
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
C
CAND
All power supply units are faulty
CCDP
CoChannel Dual Polarized (Frequency reuse)
CCITT
International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee
CE
European Conformity
CFRD
Component Failure Rate Data
C/I
Carrier to Interference ratio
CK
Clock
CMI
Code Mark Inversion
CMISE
Common Management Information Service Element
CMISS
Card Missing
CO
Central Office
COAX
Coaxial
CP
Copolar
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
29 / 458
MEANING
CPE
Customer premises equipment
CPI
Incoming parallel contacts
CPO
Outgoing parallel contacts
CPU
Central Processor Unit
CRCn
Cyclic Redundancy Check n
CRU
Clock Reference Unit
CS
(Item) Change Status
CSW
Common SoftWare
CT
Craft Terminal
CTP
Connection Termination Point
C12/C3/C4
1st, 3rd and 4th level container

ABBREVIATION
D
DA
Distant Alarm
D/A
Digital to Analog (converter/conversion)
DC
Direct Current
DCC
Data Communication Channel (D1D12)
DCCM
Multiplex Section DCC (D4D12)
DCCR
Regenerator Section DCC (D1D3)
DCE
Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
DCN
Data Communication Network
DDF
Digital Distribution Frame
DEFEC
FEC Decoder
DEM
Demodulator
DF
Dialog Failure
DIV
Diversity
DM
Degraded Minute
DPLL
Digital Phase Locked Loop
DRRS
Digital Radio Relay System
DS
Degraded Second
DSI
Digital Switching Information channel for RPS
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTI
Department of Trade and Industry
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
E
EB
Errored Block
EBC
Errored Block Count
EBU
European Broadcasting Union
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
30 / 458

ABBREVIATION
MEANING
EC
Equipment Controller
ECC
Embedded Communication Channel
ECS
External Communication Service
ECT
Equipment Craft Terminal
EE
Equipment Engineering
EF
Equipment Failure
EIA
Electronic Industries Association
EMC
ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
EMF
Equipment Management Function
EMI
Electromagnetic interference
EOW
Engineering Order Wire
EPS
Equipment Protection Switching
ES
Errored Second
ESD
Electrostatic discharges
ETR
European Telecommunication Report
ETS
European Telecommunication Standard
ETSI
European Telecommunication Standard Institute
EW
Early Warning
EWH
Early Warning High
EWL
Early Warning Low
EXCBER
Excessive BER
E2PROM
Electrically erasable programmable read only memory
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
F
F
Interface F (for Craft Terminal) or Fuse
FE
Front End
FEBE
Far End Block Error
FEC
Forward Error Correction (Code)
FEPROM
Flesh Electrically erasable programmable read only memory
FERF
Far End Receive Failure
FIT
Failure Unit
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate Array
FR
Failure Rate or Frequency Reuse
FSRC
Failed Switch Request Count
FSRD
Failed Switch Request Duration

G
GA
Gate Array
GB
Ground Benign
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
31 / 458
MEANING
GF
Ground Fixed
GM
Ground Mobile
GND
Ground

ABBREVIATION
H
H
Horizontal (polarization)
HBER
High Bit Error Rate
HDBK
Handbook
HDB3
High Density Binary 3
HDLC
High level Data Link Control
HET
HETerofrequency or Frequency Diversity
HEW
High Early Warning
HK
HouseKeeping
HOA
High Order Adaptation
HOI
High Order Interface
HPT
High order Path Termination
HPC
High order Path Connection
HPOM
High order Path Overhead Monitoring
HS
High Speed
HST
Hot Standby
HSUT
High order Supervisory Unequipped Termination
HW
Hardware
HWP
Hardware Protection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
I
ICS
Item Change Status
ID
IDentifier
IDU
InDoor Unit
IEC
International Electro technical Commission
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering
IF
Intermediate Frequency
IN
Input
IND
Indicative alarm
INT
Internal Local Alarms
I/O
Input/Output
IP
Internet Protocol
IRC
International Radiotechnical Commission
ISO
International Standards Organization
ISPB
Intra Shelf Parallel Bus
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
32 / 458

ABBREVIATION
MEANING
ISSB
Intra Shelf Serial Bus
ITUR (*)
International Telecommunication Union Radiocommunication
ITUT (*)
International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication

J
JE1
Joint Engineering
L
LAN
Local Area Network
LAPD
Link access Procedure on D channel
LC
Loss of Configuration
LED
Light Emission Diode
LEW
Low Early Warning
LBER
Low Bit Error Rate
LHRC
Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Compact
LO
Local Oscillator
LOF
Loss Of Frame
LOI
Low Order Interface
LOM
Loss Of Multiframe
LOP
Loss Of Pointers
LOS
Loss Of Signal
LPA
Lower order Path Adaptation
LPM
Loopback line side (remote)
LPOM
Lower Order Path Monitoring
LPT
Lower order Path Termination
LS
Low Speed
LSUT
Lower order Supervisory Unequipped Termination
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
M
MC
Monitoring Channel
MCF
Message Communication Function
MDT
Mean Down Time
MEM
Memorization
MIR
Loss of incoming pulses
MLC
MultiLevel Code
MLM
Multi Longitudinal mode
MMIC
Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit
MOD
Modulator
MS
Multiplex Section
MSA
Multiplex Section Adaptation
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
33 / 458
MEANING
MSAIS
Multiplex Section Alarm Indication Signal
MSOH
Multiplex Section OverHead
MSRDI
Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication
MSREI
Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication
MST
Multiplex Section Termination
MSP
Multiplex Section Protection
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR
Mean Time To Repair
MTU
Master Timing Unit

ABBREVIATION
N
NBF
Narrow Band Filter
NDS
Nearend Defect Second
NA
Not Applicable
NE
Network Element
NEBC
Nearend Errored Block Count
NEFA
Network Element Function Application
NF
Noise Figure
NFD
Net Filter Discrimination
NG
Not Urgent
NRZ
Non Return to Zero
NURG
Not urgent alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
O
OCT
Office Craft Terminal
ODF
Optical Distribution Frame
ODU
OutDoor Unit
OFA
Optical Fiber Amplifier
OFS
Out of Frame Second
OH
OverHead
OHBUS
Dedicated housekeeping stream
O&M
Operation and Maintenance
OIRT
Russian Regulatory Body
OMSN
Optinex Multi Service Node
OOF
Out Of Frame
OOS
Out Of Service
OR
Logic sum/Loss of only one station battery
ORALIM
ORing of station power supply alarm
OS
Operation System or One Side terminal
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
34 / 458

ABBREVIATION
MEANING
OUT
Output
OVF
Overflow
OW
Order Wire
P
PC
Personal Computer
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PFAIL
Power supply failure
PI
Physical Interface
PJE
Pointer Justification Event
PLL
Phase Locked Loop
PM
Performance Monitoring
PMMF
Physical Machine Management Function
POH
Path OverHead
PPI
Plesiochronous Physical interface
ppm
parts per million
PPS
Path Protection Switching
PRx
Received power
PRBS
Pseudo Random Binary Signal
P/S
Parallel/Serial converter
PSA
Protection Switch Actual
PSA C
Protection Switch Count
PSA D
Protection Switch Actual Duration
PSK
Portable Service Kit
PSR
Protection Switch Request
PSU
Power Supply Unit
PTx
Transmitted power
Q
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QOS
Quality Of Service
Q2/QB2
TMN Interface with B2 protocol. Interface towards plesiochronous

equipment
Q3/QB3
TMN Interface with B3 protocol. Interface towards TMN
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
R
RAI
Remote Alarm Indication
RAM
Random Access Memory
RAPS
Radio Automatic Protection Switch
RC
Radio Controller
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
35 / 458
ABBREVIATION
MEANING
Received clock
RCIM
Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch
RDI
Remote Defect Indication
RECC
Recommendation
RECT
Remote Equipment Craft Terminal
REI
Remote Error Indication
REF
Reference
REL
Release
RES
Radio Equipment and Systems
RF
Radio Frequency
RFCOH
Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
RL
Received Level
RLTS
Received Level Threshold Second
RMS
Root Mean Square
RNURG
Not urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack red LED
RURG
Urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack red LED
ROSE
Remote Operation Service Element
RPI
Radio Physical Interface
RPS
Radio Protection Switching
RRA
Radio Regenerator Adaptation
RRR
Radio Relay Repeaters
RRT
Radio Relay Terminal
RS
Regenerator Section
RSOH
Regenerator Section OverHead
RSPI
Radio Synchronous Physical Interface
RST
Regenerator Section Termination
RT
Transceiver
RTF
Remote Terminal Failure
Rx
Receiver/Received

RCK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
S
SA
Service Alarm
SBL
Security Block
SC
Shelf/System Controller
SD
Space Diversity
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SERS
Synchronous E1 Regeneration Section
SES
Severly Errored Second
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
36 / 458

ABBREVIATION
MEANING
SEMF
Synchronous Equipment Management Function
SETG
Synchronous Equipment Timing Generation function
SETS
Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
SF
Signal Fail
SLM
Single Longitudinal Mode
SM
Single Mode/Synchronous Mux
SNCP
Subnetwork Connection Protection
SNCP/I (** )
Subnetwork Connection Protection Inherent
SOH
Section OverHead
SOHF
SOH Failure
SQ
Squelch
S/P
Serial to Parallel
SPI
SDH Physical Interface
SPS
Synchronous Path Sink
SR
Synchronous Radio
SRMR
Synchronous Radio Modem (Assembly) for Repeater
SRMT
Synchronous Radio Modem (Assembly) for Terminal
SRST
Synchronous Radio baseband (Assembly) for Terminal
SRSR
Synchronous Radio baseband (Assembly) for Repeater
SSF
Server Signal Fail
SSM
Synchronisation Status Message
STBY
Standby
STMN
Synchronous Transport Module N (Hierarchic level)
STM0
51 Mbit transmission bit rate
SU
Supervisory Unit
SW
Switch or Software
SWP
Software Package
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
T
TA
TeleAlarms
TANC
Remote alarm due to failure of all power supply units
TAT
Turn Around Time
TC
Tandem Connection or Terminal Connector
TD
Layout drawing
TEM
Transversal Electric Mode
TIM
Trace Identifier Mismatch
TL
Transmitted Level
TLTS
Transmitted Level Threshold Second
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
37 / 458
MEANING
TM
Transmission and Multiplexing
TMN
Telecommunication Management Network
TOR
Remote alarm indicating loss of one of the station batteries
TORC
Remote alarm due to a faulty/missing power supply unit
TPH
Telephone
TTP
Trail Termination Point
TP
Termination Point
TR
TRansceiver
TRIB
Tributary
TRU
Top Rack Unit
TS
Time Slot or Two Side terminal station
TSD
Trail Signal Degrade
TSF
Trail Signal Fail
TTF
Transport Terminal Function
TUn
Tributary Unit n (Order)
TUGn
Tributary Unit Group n (Order)
TUOH
Tributary Unit Overhead
TUP/UP
Equipment Controller remote alarm
Tx
Transmitter/Transmitted

ABBREVIATION
U
U
Unavailability
UDR
Unpressurized Rectangular Waveguide Type
UG
Urgent Alarm
UHM
Urban Hight capacity Multiplexer
UHR
Urban Hight capacity Regenerator
URG
Urgent
USK
Stackable Unit
USY
Urban Haul Synchronous split mount Radio System
UT
Unavailability Time
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
V
V
Vertical (polarization)
VCn
Virtual Container n
VCO
Voltage Controller Oscillator
VF
Voice Frequency
VHM
Virtual Hardware Machine
VSWR
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
38 / 458
ABBREVIATION
MEANING

W
WAN
Wide Access Network
WBF
Wide Band Filter
VMMF
Virtual Machine Management Function
WMSN
Wireless Multi Service Node
WMSN OS
Wireless Multi Service Node One Side
WMSN TS
Wireless Multi Service Node Two Sides
WLT
Wireless Line Terminal
WS
Work Station
WST
Way Side Traffic

X
XPD
Cross Polar Discrimination
XPIC
Cross Polar Interference Canceller
XPI
Cross Polar Interference
XPIF
Cross Polar Improvement Factor
XPOL
Cross Polar/Polarization
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTES
(*)
Owing to change of name, all documents issued by the two ITU committees (CCIR ND
CCITT) in 1992 (and in some cases even before then) are classified as ITUR and ITUT,
respectively.
(**)
Substitutes PPS
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
39 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
40 / 458

DESCRIPTIONS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SECTION CONTENT
ED
PAGE
Chapter 2 Introduction to the 9600USY Radio System Family
43
Chapter 3 System Description
47
Chapter 4 Physical Configuration
103
Chapter 5 Station Layouts
171
Chapter 6 Functional Description
233
Chapter 7 Technical Specifications
343
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
41 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
42 / 458

2 INTRODUCTION TO THE 9600USY RADIO SYSTEM FAMILY

2.1 Foreword
This chapter explains briefly the characteristics of 9600USY equipment family and introduces the various
basic configurations; it comprehends the following main subparagraphs:
para.2.2 on page 43
General
para.2.3 on page 45
Introduction to the 9600USY Radio System Family
2.2 General
The Alcatel 9600USY (Urban Haul Synchronous split mount Radio System) is a new generation of SDH
microwave radio equipment implemented to satisfy the demand of wideband services, exploiting wireless
SDH and Ethernet data transmission to provide flexible, reliable and costeffective solution, fast and easy
to implement.
Typical applications include:
SDH (STM1 or STM0) radio infrastructure;

Radio transmission of Ethernet/FastEthernet 10/100baseT channels with possible additional E1/T1
plesiochronous channels;
Closure of STM1 and STM4 fibre optic rings;
Wideband wireless access, wireless local loop and last mile application;
Wideband wireless fibre optic extension, suitable for installation with Alcatel Optinex equipment;
Backup to fibre optic trunk links;
Radio spurs of fibre/radio STMn backbones or rings;
Regional links in synchronous networks.
The 9600USY radio systems have been developed in accordance with the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
(SDH) standards requirements, as defined by the outstanding International Organizations, including
CCITT, CCIR, ETSI, and with reference to the TMN (Telecommunications Management Network)
standards.
The 9600USY Radio family has the capability to exploit the maximum channel density foreseen by the
standard, thanks to the possibility to operate in copolar or in crosspolar mode. When operating in
copolar mode the Radio System is equipped with narrow band RF filters, while operating in crosspolar
mode, it is equipped with wide band RF filters. In the last case the use of wide band RF filters allows the
additional functionalities of frequency agility and frequency reuse.
The 9600USY system architecture is based on a split mount radio structure: it comprises an INDOOR unit
(IDU) and an OUTDOOR unit (ODU). This is the configuration that is mainly used for urban and access link
applications.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The IDU basic configuration includes a regenerator BaseBand processing circuitry with STM1 electric
or optical interface and a modulatordemodulator. An optional dedicated ADM can be added to this
configuration in order to have a WMSNOS (Wireless Multi Service NodeOne Side) or WMSNTS
(Wireless Multi Service NodeTwo Side). The latter MUX unit can be equipped to allow STM1 or 1x140
Mbit/s or 3x34/3x45 Mbit/s or 21x2Mbit/s interfacing. A standard OMSN 1650 SMC (Optinex Multi Service
Node) can be used instead of the MUX unit to provide 63x2Mbit/s interfacing.
ODU houses the outdoor transceiver in a very light cabinet with the possibility of mounting a 300 mm or 600
mm integrated antenna; an up to 350 m length cable can be supported between the indoor and outdoor
unit.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
43 / 458
One 2Mbit/s WST (Way Side Traffic), transmitted as Radio Frame Complementary Over Head (RFCOH),
can be provided in addition to the STM1 main traffic.
An EOW (Engineer Order Wire), 3 x 64 kbit/s channels and 1 x 9.6 kbit/s (RS232) access are available as
service channels.
Interfaces F and QB3, that may be connected to a Craft Terminal (CT) and to an external supervision
Operating System (OS) respectively, are available on the indoor unit front panel.
Therefore, the following operations can be carried out on the system:
Monitoring of status and alarms;

Measurement of system parameters;
Maintenance operations;
Troubleshooting.
Indicator lamps can be located on the racktop to display the presence of a Major/Minor/Warning general
alarm (with storing capability), or manual operations in progress and EOW calls.
A service assembly equipped with a mini distribution frame, and a Top Rack Unit assembly, complete with
the following devices: relay drycontact loops (driven by remote alarms and remote controls), a
loudspeaker, a wirewrap distributor and a power distributor, can be optionally equipped.
Due to its compact and low power consumption characteristics, the IDU can be desk, wall and rack
mounted.
The Urban SDH 9600USY radio family systems are listed in the following table:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 5. Urban SDH 9600USY radio family

SYSTEM
FREQUENCY RANGE (GHz)
9662 USY
5.675 6.425
9667 USY
6.425 7.11
9674 USY
7.11 7.897
9681 USY
7.725 8.5
9611 USY
10.7 11.7
9613 USY
12.75 13.25
9615 USY
14.4 15.35
9618 USY
17.7 19.7
9623 USY
21.2 23.6
9625 USY
24.5 26.5
9628 USY
27.5 29.5
9632 USY
3133
9638 USY
37.0 40
More detailed information on recommendations, channel separation, etc. is given in the ODU
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK (REF.[A] on page 412).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
44 / 458

The same 9600USY systems can, after having changed the RF filters and having HW/SW preset
accordingly, transmit/receive a STM0 signal while still STM 1 interfacing the user.
2.3 9600USY basic configurations

The 9600USY Rel.2.0 Urban link system is based on the following configurations:
a)
1+0/1+1/2+0 Regenerator (UHR/UHRC)

This radio system can operate with up to two STM1/STM0 Electrical or Optical signals and the
corresponding Radio parts; the STM1 SDH signal baseband processing operates as standard
regenerator type, see Fig. 1. herebelow.
It has a standard version (Network Element UHR, with up to 2 STM1/STM0 capacity) and a compact
one (Network Element UHRC, with one STM1/STM0 capacity).
IDU/REG
STM 1
ODU
RRA/MOD
TR
(STM 0)
up to 2
up to 2
UHR/UHRC
Fig. 1. UHR/UHRC system

b)
Wireless Multi Service Node (WMSN)

This radio system consists of a Regenerator and operates together with a particular new MUX of
ALCATEL ADM family, named Network Element UHM/UHMC. The assembly is called WMSN
(Wireless Multi Service Node), see Fig. 2. herebelow. It can be equipped with UHR or UHRC
regenerator Network Element.
IDU/MUX
STM 1
(STM 0)
UHM/UHMC
3x34; 3x45;
21x2; 140 Mb/s
ODU
IDU/REG
TR
RRA/MOD
up to 2
up to 2
Fig. 2. WMSN system

c)
3+1/4+0 Regenerator (UHRN)

This radio system (Network Element UHRN) can operate with up to four STM1 Electrical or Optical
signals and the corresponding Radio parts; the STM1 SDH signal baseband processing operates
as standard regenerator type, see Fig. 3. herebelow.
STM 1
IDU/REG.3+1
ODU
RRA/MOD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
up to 4
TR
up to 4
UHRN
Fig. 3. UHRN system
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
45 / 458
1+0/1+1/2+0 Regenerator/Enhanced (UHD/UHDC)

This radio system (Network Element UHD/UHDC) is meant to operate with up to six Ethernet
(10baseT) / FastEthernet (100baseT) channels (and with up to six possible additional E1/T1
plesiochronous channels) and the corresponding Radio parts; the signal baseband processing
operates as standard regenerator type with/without GFPprotocol bitcompression technique, see
Fig. 4. herebelow.
It has a standard version (UHD, with up to six Ethernet/FastEthernet channels capacity) and a
compact one (UHDC, with up to three Ethernet/FastEthernet channels capacity).
In the unprotected UHD version, it is possible to interface one STM1/STM0 Electrical or Optical signal
instead of three Ethernet/FastEthernet channels.
10/100baseT
E1/T1
IDU/REG
ODU
TFEMOD
STM 1
(STM 0)
up to 2
TR
up to 2
UHD/UHDC
Fig. 4. UHD/UHDC system
This handbook deals with the UHRN configurations only.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For the other configurations, please make reference to the specific handbooks (that have different P/Ns,
see Tab. 71. on page 412).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
46 / 458

d)

3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3.1 Introduction
This chapter gives the firstlevel description of 9600USY equipment in the UHRN configuration, and
comprehends the following main paragraphs:
para.3.2 on page 48
UHRN general description

This paragraph introduces briefly the 9600USY/UHRN network
applications and describes the 9600USY/UHRN at the level necessary to
understand the remaining paragraphs of this chapter.
para.3.3 on page 60
UHRN Radio Configurations

This paragraph describes the available radio configuration for the
9600USY family in the UHRN configuration.
para.3.4 on page 72
9600USY Radio Transmission features

This paragraph describes the Radio Transmission features for the
9600USY family in all configurations.
para.3.5 on page 84
UHRN Protections
This paragraph describes the Protection features for the 9600USY family
in UHRN configuration.
para.3.6 on page 86
UHRN Signal transmission

This paragraph describes the Signal transmission features for the
9600USY family in UHRN configurations.
para.3.7 on page 95
UHRN Synchronization
This paragraph describes the Synchronization strategy to be adopted for
the 9600USY family in UHRN configurations.
para.3.8 on page 97
UHRN Equipment control

This paragraph describes the Equipment control features of the 9600USY
family in UHRN configurations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
Text in Italic (like this) denotes parts of the description that refer to functions not yet implemented
in the 9600USY/UHRN equipment release (HW and SW) this handbook refers to.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
47 / 458
3.2.1 Foreword
This paragraph introduces briefly the 9600USY/UHRN network applications and describes the
9600USY/UHRN at the level necessary to understand the remaining paragraphs of this chapter; it
comprehends the following main subparagraphs:
para.3.2.2 on page 49
Network applications of the 9600USY/UHRN equipment
UHRN System Configurations
UHRN Hardware components
UHRNIDU/REG shelf composition
UHRNIDU/EPS shelf composition
UHRNODU composition
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this paragraph are:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
chapter 2 on page 43
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
48 / 458

3.2 UHRN general description
3.2.2 Network applications of the 9600USY/UHRN equipment

In the following figures some typical network applications are depicted.

RADIO
REG.
RADIO
REG
.
MUX
MUX
RADIO
REG.
RADIO
REG.
RADIO
REG.
RADIO
REG.
MUX
Fig. 5. Radio ring STM1
RADIO
REG.
RADIO
REG.
MUX
MUX
Radio spurs 1+0/1+1

MUX
RADIO
REG.
RADIO
REG.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 6. Ring closure and radio spurs
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
49 / 458
The UHRN system can interface up to four channels (STM1 Electrical or Optical signals and the
corresponding Radio parts) and up to two WST channels.
The system configurations allowed are with (N+1) or without (N+0) Radio Protection Switching /
Equipment Protection Switching, according to the following table:
Tab. 6. UHRN System Configurations
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
NR. of
channels
N+0
N+1 &
Occasional
N+1
CH
max WST
CH
max WST
CH
max WST
1 (N.B.)
1+0
1 unprot.
2 (N.B.)
2+0
2 unprot.
or 1 prot.
1+1
2 unprot.
or 1 prot.
1+1
& Occ.
2 unprot.
or 1 prot.
3+0
2 unprot.
or 1 prot.
2+1
2 unprot.
or 1 prot.
2+1
& Occ.
2 unprot.
or 1 prot.
4+0
2 unprot.
or 1 prot.
3+1
2 unprot.
or 1 prot.
3+1
& Occ.
2 unprot.
or 1 prot.
In N+0 configurations, channels are without protection.

In N+1 configurations, channel 0 is always the standby channel; when unused for protection, it is wet by
channel 1 signal.
In N+1 & Occasional configurations, channel 0 carries the occasional traffic, that is cut off whenever it
becomes the recovery channel for any (faulty) of the protected channels.
Two protection schemes are envisaged:
Radio Protection Switching (RPS) only, depicted in Fig. 7. on page 51; this scheme needs the
equipment of the REG shelf only (see para.3.2.5 on page 56)
RPS + Equipment Protection Switching (EPS) depicted in Fig. 8. on page 51; this scheme needs
the additional equipment of the EPS shelf (see para.3.2.6 on page 58)
As indicated in Tab. 6. above, the WST configuration is independent from N+1 / N + 0 system
configuration; it is possible to have (with at least 2 channels equipped):
1 WST protected: it is contemporarily transported on CH0 and CH1
2 WST unprotected: one is transported on CH0, the other on CH1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For further details on N+1 protection architecture, make reference to para.3.5 on page 84.
N.B.
ED
The configurations with 1 or 2 channels should be meant for future expansions to 3 or 4 channels
(otherwise the UHR/UHRC configurations depicted in point a ) on page 45 would be cheaper).
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
50 / 458

3.2.3 UHRN System Configurations
RPS PROTECTION

PROTECTING SECTION
STM1
0
E/O
MOD
RST
STM1
1
E/O
MOD
RST
STM1
2
E/O
MOD
RST
STM1
3
E/O
MOD
RST
RFCOH
RSPI
RSPI
RFCOH
RST
E/O
MOD
STM1
0
RSPI
RFCOH
RST
E/O
MOD
STM1
1
RSPI
RFCOH
RST
E/O
MOD
STM1
2
RSPI
RFCOH
RST
E/O
MOD
STM1
3
CH 0
RFCOH
RSPI
CH 1
RFCOH
RSPI
CH 2
RFCOH
RSPI
CH 3
STATION A
STATION B
PROTECTED SECTIONS
Only present if occasional traffic is supported
Fig. 7. UHRN max configuration N+1 with/without occasional traffic, with RPS and without EPS
EPS PROTECTION
RPS PROTECTION
PROTECTING SECTION
STM1
0
E/O
MOD
RST
STM1
1
E/O
MOD
RST
STM1
2
E/O
MOD
RST
STM1
3
E/O
MOD
RST
RFCOH
RSPI
RSPI
RFCOH
RST
E/O
MOD
STM1
0
RSPI
RFCOH
RST
E/O
MOD
STM1
1
RSPI
RFCOH
RST
E/O
MOD
STM1
2
RSPI
RFCOH
RST
E/O
MOD
STM1
3
CH 0
RFCOH
RSPI
CH 1
RFCOH
RSPI
CH 2
RFCOH
RSPI
CH 3
STATION A
STATION B
PROTECTED SECTIONS
Only present if occasional traffic is supported
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 8. UHRN max configuration N+1 with/without occasional traffic, with RPS and with EPS
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
51 / 458
As depicted in Fig. 9. herebelow, the 9600USY/UHRN hardware architecture is based on a split mount
radio structure: it comprises an INDOOR assembly IDU and a set of OUTDOOR cabinets ODU (they are
shown with embedded antennas, but the use of external antennas is possible):
two types of ODU cabinets are envisaged:
1+0 Compact cabinet, each containing one transceiver
1+1/2+0 cabinet, each containing two transceivers; a suitable version (1+0 Exp.), to be used
in 3channel systems, contains one transceiver only, but contains also the branching parts that
easily allow the future addition of the second transceiver in field.
As pointed out in the figure, a single UHRN system cannot accept different types of ODU
cabinets (e.g. a mixed configuration with one 1+1/2+0 cabinet and one 1+0 Compact cabinet
is not possible).
the IDU part includes:
REG shelf (always equipped)
EPS shelf (equipped only when EPS protection is required)
the lightning dischargers represent the IDUODU interfaces, together with the suitable IF cables (not
shown in figure) carrying both I/O signals and DC power supply from IDU to ODU; they are shown
mounted on the IDU shelf, but they can be positioned, according to Customer needs, anywhere in
the IDUODU connection path.
IN ALTERNATIVE (MIXED
CONFIGURATIONS NOT ALLOWED !)
ODU
ODU 1+1/2+0
(max 2)
ODU
1+0 COMPACT
(max 4)
LIGHTNING DISCHARGERS
REG SHELF
IDU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
EPS SHELF
Fig. 9. UHRN main hardware components
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
52 / 458

3.2.4 UHRN Hardware components

Fig. 10. herebelow shows the UHRN layout:
without EPS shelf
with 4 channels equipped
with 2 ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets.

There are one IDU assembly (containing four STM1 interfaces) and two ODU assemblies (each ODU
contains two Radio transceivers).
The shown correspondence between STM1 interfaces and Radio channels is fixed.
Only connections relevant to STM1 line side and radio channels (IDUODU) are shown.
Lower configurations are obtained subequipping that depicted in the figure.
ODU 1
ODU 0
RT0
(= RT2)
CH2
RT0
CH0
RT1
CH1
RT1
(= RT3)
CH3
A
IDU
A
STM1 (CH3) Electrical or Optical
STM1 (CH0 in N+0, or OCCASIONAL in N+1) Electrical or Optical
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
EXTERNAL LIGHTNING DISCHARGER
Fig. 10. UHRN layout (max equipment, with ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets, and without EPS)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
53 / 458
ODU 0
RT0
CH0
ODU 1
ODU 2
RT1
CH1
ODU 3
RT2
CH2
RT3
CH3
IDU
A
STM1 (CH0 in N+0, or OCCASIONAL in N+1) Electrical or Optical
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
EXTERNAL LIGHTNING DISCHARGER
Fig. 11. UHRN layout (max equipment, with ODU 1+0 Compact cabinets, and without EPS)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
54 / 458

without EPS shelf
with 4 ODU 1+0 Compact cabinets

There are one IDU assembly (containing four STM1 interfaces) and four ODU assemblies (each ODU
contains one Radio transceiver).

with EPS shelf

at line side, as example, two STM1 with electrical interface lines and two STM1 with optical
interface lines are shown; also with EPS shelf equipped, STM1 line interfaces can be
electrical/optical in any combination
with 4 ODU 1+0 Compact cabinets; also with EPS shelf equipped, it is possible to use instead ODU
1+1/2+0 cabinet types, as depicted in Fig. 10. on page 53.
ODU 3
RT3
CH3
ODU 2
RT2
CH2
ODU 1
ODU 0
RT1
CH1
RT0
CH0
STM1 (CH3) Optical (example)

STM1 (CH2) Electrical (example)
STM1 (CH1) Optical (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM1 (only OCCASIONAL CH0) Electrical (example)

Fig. 12. UHRN layout (max equipment, with ODU 1+0 Compact cabinets, and with EPS)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
55 / 458
3.2.5 UHRNIDU/REG shelf composition
SAM 3+1
LOGIC
connection to EPS subrack
RRA/MODEM
PSU
FANS
Fig. 13. UHRNIDU/REG shelf boards

The functions performed are:
RRA/MODEM unit (min 1 without EPS, min 2 with EPS, max 4):
when EPS shelf is not equipped, it represents the interface between the user side and the radio
side. It is able to accept electrical or optical STM1 signals (equipping different front modules);
when EPS shelf is equipped, it represents the interface between the EPS shelf (where the
electrical/optical STM1 user interfaces are located) and the radio side; in this case the front
module equipped is always electrical STM1;
This unit performs RSOH termination and MSOH transparency and RFCOH insertion/extraction (2
Mbit/s WST and service channels). Besides the standard Radio Regeneration Adaptation function,
the unit houses also the Modulator and the Demodulator circuits.
In 9600USY/UHRN Rel.2.0, the RRA/MODEM unit can be chosen between the following types (with
different P/Ns):
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 7. Types of RRA/MODEM units

MODULATION
TRANSMISSION
128 QAM
STM1
32 QAM
STM1
16 QAM
STM1
NOTE
new in 9600USY Rel.2.0
The standard modulation adopted for the 9600USY systems is the 128 QAM that allows to achieve
the best exploitation of the bands also at very high frequencies; optionally the 16 or 32 QAM
modulation is available (for the frequencies bands that foresee this possibility) in case of higher
system gain needs.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
56 / 458

The types of units housed inside UHRNIDU/REG shelf are shown in following Fig. 13. :
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The frequency reuse technique can be applied to the 9600USY systems increasing the transmission
capacity without additional band occupation.
The frequency reuse technique must or does not need the usage of the XPIC option (an additional
baby board to be inserted on the RRA/MODEM units, and a synchronization device to be housed in
the ODU subsystem), according to the modulation type, as depicted in following Tab. 8. :
Tab. 8. Need for XPIC option (in frequency reuse configurations) according to modulation
MODULATION
XPIC OPTION NEEDED
128 QAM
yes
32 QAM
no (to be confirmed)
16 QAM
no
SAM 3+1 (Auxiliary & Service Management unit) (always 1):

this unit is the System Controller of the system performing the following main functions:
Data collection and exchange with radio system units (SEMF)
DCC management (MCF)
Provision of local operator F interface by means of a Personal Computer (ECT/RECT)
Provision of TMN interface based on QB3
Discrete alarms and controls management
Remote Inventory management

The unit is also devoted to manage auxiliary service channels (2 Mbit/s WST and 64 Kbit/s channels),
Automatic Transmitted Power Control (ATPC) and switching function; all the user side accesses for
service channels, discrete alarms (dry loops) and controls, TMN or local Personal Computer are
placed on the front of the unit.
Logic unit (max 1):

this unit performs the functions relevant to traffic protection:
Tx and Rx distribution
RPS switch logic in N+1 configurations (with or without occasional traffic)

When EPS shelf is equipped, the unit performs also the EPS switch logic in N+1 configurations (with
or without occasional traffic).
In addition to the main functionalities, the unit performs also:
channel 2 and 3 routing and communications with SC
insertion/extraction of data streams from/to IDUODU cables 2 and 3
analog input/output phone channel party line
two Output PRx analog measure for RX2 and RX3
Power Supply unit (max 4):

two or four power supply units must be housed inside the assembly with the possibility to choose the
unit between 48 to 60 Vdc or 24 Vdc primary voltages (this latter as future availability).
Fans unit (max 2):

one or two fans units must be housed inside the assembly to provide necessary equipment
ventilation. One of them is also used to provide interface for station alarms and optional service
battery power supply for SAM 3+1 unit.
Connection to EPS subrack (none if EPS unequipped, always 1 with EPS equipped):
present only when EPS subrack is equipped (otherwise the slot is simply covered by a dummy plate);
it is a passive board providing the connector to interface, with a suitable cable, the EPS shelf.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
57 / 458
3.2.6 UHRNIDU/EPS shelf composition
connection to REG subrack
EPS MODULE
PSU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 14. UHRNIDU/EPS shelf boards
EPS MODULE unit (min 2, max 4):

it represents:
the STM1 electrical interface between the EPS shelf and the corresponding RRA/MODEM unit
in the REG shelf;
the line side STM1 user interface; for this purpose the STM1 electrical interface is embedded
in the unit; a suitable slot is envisaged to house, when necessary, an optional STM1 optical
module;
Power Supply unit (always 2):

two power supply units (equal to those present in REG shelf) must be housed inside the assembly
with the possibility to choose the unit between 48 to 60 Vdc or 24 Vdc primary voltages (this latter
as future availability).
Connection to REG subrack (always 1):

it is a passive board providing the connector to interface, with a suitable cable, the REG shelf.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
58 / 458

The types of units housed inside UHRNIDU/EPS shelf are shown in following Fig. 14. :
3.2.7 UHRNODU composition
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Please refer to para.4.5 on page 140 for ODU assembly drawings.

Four main parts compose the Outdoor unit:
Cabinet:
it houses all the RF parts of the system and it is available in two different mechanical practices
depending on the configuration:
1+0 Compact
or 1+0 Exp./1+1/2+0.
Branching and Filters:

according to the radio configurations (refer to para.3.3 on page 60), different types of branching are
available including the solutions with channel filters or with wide band filters; these last ones are
suitable for frequency agility feature and allow to the customer to select the RF transmission channel
over a quarter of the band.
Transceiver:
the transceiver unit is composed by the Transmitter, the Receiver, the local DC/DC converter and the
Radio Interface unit. This last one manages the connection between the IDU and the ODU that takes
place through one only IF cable for each Transceiver; the same cable is able to transport the remote
power supply and some service/alarms signals. Different types of cables can be used depending on
the distance between the two devices.
According to the selected type of modulation (128 QAM / 32 QAM / 16 QAM) different kinds of
transceiver units are envisaged.
Local Oscillator:
for each Transceiver one Local Oscillator unit has to be supplied; each unit is able to supply RF
frequency for TX and for RX and it is characterized by a defined TX/RX frequency distance according
to the relative channel arrangements (i.e. 1010 MHz for 18 GHz, 1008 MHz for 25 GHz, etc.). Different
frequency arrangements respect to the ETSI ones, described in the ODU TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
(REF.[A] on page 412), requires the study and the development of new Local Oscillator.
Each Local Oscillator unit is able to cover a range of about 250 to 300 MHz according to the channel
arrangements involved.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
59 / 458
3.3.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes the available radio configuration for the 9600USY family in the UHRN
configuration; it comprehends the following main subparagraphs:
ODU and antenna configurations
1+1/2+0 ODU constraints in UHRN configuration
Configurations of Filters and Antennas for UHRN
Expandibility by means of outdoor hybrids
para.3.2 on page 48
3.3.2 ODU and antenna configurations

The main feasible radio configurations are:
1+0 Compact
1+0 Expandable CoPolar (CP)
1+0 Expandable Alternate Polar (AP)
1+1 HET CoPolar (CP)
1+1 HET Alternate Polar (AP)
2+0 HET CoPolar (CP)
2+0 HET Alternate Polar (AP)
1+1/2+0 XPOL with frequency reuse
Before introducing the tables with the configurations and the relative notes as far as filters and antennas
availability are concerned, a few remarks are necessary to clarify some concepts and to precise different
possible choices.
3.3.2.1 Antennas
The equipment belonging to the 9600USY family has been developed with the purpose to utilize
embedded antennas. For this reason special antennas have been designed with single or with
double polarization 30 or 60 cm diameters; of course according to the frequency arrangements both
diameters can be available or only the 60 cm can be used for the lower frequency of the 9600USY
family.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Moreover the equipment can be connected to a standard, not integrated antennas with different
diameters; in this case, besides the necessary twist or flex twist guides, proper single polar or dual
polar adapters have to be supplied to guarantee the connection between the Transceiver output and
the guide towards antenna.
For the above mentioned situations, two different types of pole mounting kits are foreseen
considering the needs to guarantee a correct antenna alignment in the first case or to supply only
a simple support for the outdoor cabinet in the second case.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
60 / 458

3.3 UHRN Radio Configurations
3.3.2.2 Branching filters

Depending on the type of configuration to realize and the frequency arrangement, two different types
of RF filters can be used with the relative branching kit.
Wide band filters

They have been studied with the purpose to allow frequency agility feature considering that they
are able to cover, depending of the equipment involved, about a quarter of band (or more). In
their frequency range they do not require any frequency channel tuning; they are normally used
for configuration with only one TX channel or for configuration with two TX channels connected
to different antennas or different polarization of the same antenna.
No wide band filters are foreseen for frequency lower than 13 GHz due to the fact they can not
assure the respect of the existing RF ETSI mask drawn for typical long indoor systems with
channel filters.
Channel filters
They are able to cover the whole subband (low or high) of a channel arrangement; considering
that they are narrow filters, they have to be tuned in factory on a fixed frequency channel. For
this reason they do not allow frequency agility and are normally used for all the configurations
in frequency lower than 13 GHz or for configuration with two TX channel connected on the same
antenna polarization for frequency from 13 GHz to 38 GHz.
3.3.2.3 Alternate polar (AP) or Copolar (CP)
With the abbreviation AP are defined all the configurations which foreseen the connection of two RF
channels on two different polarization of the same antenna or on two different antennas. Usually
these configurations are realized using wide band filters and allow the usage of two RF signals with
a channel separation equal to the half respect to a Copolar arrangements.
For the AP configuration a dedicate branching kit has been foreseen and a choice of the proper XPOL
kit flange has to be done according to the customer request for channel 1 on V pol. and channel 0
on H pol. or vice versa.
In case of embedded antenna no additional device are requested respect to the above mentioned;
in case of not integrated antenna a special XPOL adapter has to be supplied to allow the equipment
output connection towards antenna.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
With the abbreviation CP are defined all the configurations which foreseen the connection of two RF
channels on one single polarization of an antenna. Normally these configurations utilize narrow band
filters and allow the transmission of two RF signals with a channel separation double respect to the
Alternate polar arrangement.
For the CP configuration a dedicate branching kit has been foreseen and a choice of the proper
Output flange kit has to be done according to the customer request to transmit on polarization V or
polarization H of the antenna.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
61 / 458
Two types of cabinets are available. The first is a compact one, houses one Transceiver only and can
be used for 1+0 Compact version. The second one is bigger than the first one, houses up to two
Transceivers and can be used for 1+1/2+0 or 1+0 expandable configurations.
3.3.2.5 Expandable configuration
Speaking of 1+0 N+0 / N+1 expandable configuration, different situations may be present
according to the customer needs and possibility:
AP and CP configurations
Typically an extension at RF level of a 1+0 expandable configuration to a 1+1/2+0 HET (AP or
CP), requires a starting configuration that foresees a 1+1/2+0 cabinet subequipped from the
Transceiver and the Local Oscillator point of view. As far as concern the branching with the
relevant filters, due to mechanical problems related to the ODU structure, it is necessary to
supply all the necessary items for a 1+1/2+0 configuration. This condition can be applied for AP
or CP configuration (with or without embedded antenna) and in both cases it is necessary
(mandatory for CP) to know the second RF extension channel frequency. This solution, that
foresees to equip the ODU with the second Transceiver in a second time, can assure a quite
simple extension without traffic interruption and, if there are no particular problems, can be
performed in field.
If the extension channel is unknown or the needs of an extension is planned later, then is not
possible to add the missing part of the branching in field without traffic interruption; the operation
requires to remove the 1+0 expandable cabinet and to mount the complete branching in a
maintenance center.
In this condition a solution to provide at the beginning one (or more) 1+0 Compact system (from
radio point of view) and to add in a second time other 1+0 Compact cabinets (up to four as a
whole) can be more convenient. Such a case presents many advantages like easy installation,
no traffic interruption and possibility to choose the extension channel when really necessary.
From the antenna point of view the two 1+0 Compact systems can have independent embedded
antennas or in case of not integrated antenna the second Transceiver can be connected to the
second polarization of the existing device.
Considering the real advantages of this solution in terms of installation and maintenance, it can
be suggested instead of a traditional 1+1/2+0 AP configuration when no problems of room (two
cabinets to install), antennas or future extension are foreseen.
Speaking of extension from one 1+1/2+0 configuration to two 1+1/2+0 configuration, it can
be useful to underline two cases:
in case of AP system the extension (new 1+1/2+0 cabinet) requires for sure a new antenna
in case of CP system without embedded antenna the extension can be performed on the
second polarization of the existing device.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
XPOL FR configurations
In this case the extension channel is known because it must be exactly equal to that already
equipped. Also in this case, the 1+0 XPOL expandable configuration is supplied with all the
necessary items for a 1+1/2+0 XPOL configuration, that foresees to equip the ODU with the
second Transceiver in a second time, can assure a quite simple extension without traffic
interruption and, if there are no particular problems, can be performed in field.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
62 / 458

3.3.2.4 Cabinet
3.3.3 1+1/2+0 ODU constraints in UHRN configuration

3.3.3.1 Polarization constraint

With two ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets, it is possible to use the UHRN system only in the following polarization
arrangements:
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
Fig. 15. Allowed radio configurations for double ODU in UHRN system
a)
Alternate channel dual polarized with 2 singlepolar integrated antennas or 1 not integrated dual and
polar antenna.
b)
Alternate channel dual polarized with 2 dual polar antennas
c)
Co channel with 2 dual polar antennas
3.3.3.2 Transceiver constraint
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Inside an ODU cabinet 1+1/2+0 the transceivers must be of the same modulation type (i.e. both 128QAM,
or both 32QAM, or both 16QAM). There are no restrictions relative to the ODU pair (e.g. one can contain
two 128QAM transceivers, the other two 16QAM transceivers).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
63 / 458
The following tables sumup the configurations and the relative notes as far as filters and antennas
availability are concerned:
Tab. 9. Configurations of Filters and Antennas summary
Modulation
STM
128 QAM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Table
Page
6 to 11 GHz
Tab. 10.
65
13 to 38 GHz
Tab. 11.
66
32 QAM
18 to 38 GHz
Tab. 12.
67
16 QAM
18 to 38 GHz
Tab. 13.
68
N.B.
ED
Frequencies
Unless differently specified, the configurations described in these tables are for:
a single ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinet. When two ODUs have to be equipped, the rules explained
in above para.3.3.3 must be additionally taken into consideration;
for a pair of ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
64 / 458

3.3.4 Configurations of Filters and Antennas for UHRN

Tab. 10. 128 QAM STM1; 6 to 11 GHz Radio configuration

CONFIGURATION
N.cabinets
RF channelling
1
(compact)
1+0
Wide/Narrow
Frequency
RF filters
Agility
Narrow
No
1 Embedded 1P
or
1 External 1P
Narrow
No
1 Embedded 1P
or
1 External 1P
Narrow
No
1 Embedded 1P
or
1 External 1P
Narrow
No
Antenna
5659.3 MHz
2+0
1+1 HET
1+0 Exp.
40 MHz
2+0
1+1 HET
1+0 Exp.
1
(1+1/2+0)
2840 MHz
2+0
1+1 HET
1+0 Exp.
Not Embedded
1 External 2P
2840 MHz
2+0
1+1
frequency reuse
Not Embedded
Narrow
No
1 External 2P
2840 MHz
Not Embedded
2+0
1+1 HET
Narrow
No
1 External 2P
2
(compact)
2840 MHz
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2+0
1+1 HET
ED
Narrow
No
2 Embedded 1P
or
1 External 2P
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
65 / 458
CONFIGURATION
N.cabinets
RF channelling
1
(compact)
1+0
Wide/Narrow
Frequency
RF filters
Agility
Wide
Yes
1 Embedded 1P
or
1 External 1P
Narrow
No
1 Embedded 1P
or
1 External 1P
Wide
Yes
1 Embedded 2P
or
1 External 2P
Wide
Yes
1 Embedded 2P
or
1 External 2P
Wide
Yes
2 Embedded 1P
or
1 External 2P
Wide
Yes
2 Embedded 1P
or
2 External 1P
Antenna
5556 MHz
2+0
1+1 HET
1+0 Exp.
27.528 MHz
2+0
1+1 HET
1+0 Exp.
1
(1+1/2+0)
27.528 MHz
2+0
1+1
frequency reuse
27.528 MHz
2+0
1+1 HET
2
(compact)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2+0
1+1 HET
ED
27.528 MHz
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
66 / 458


Tab. 12. 32 QAM STM1, 13 to 38 GHz Radio configuration

CONFIGURATION
N.cabinet
RF channelling
1
(compact)
1+0
Wide/Narrow
Frequency
RF filters
Agility
Wide
Yes
1 Embedded 1P
or
1 External 1P
Wide
Yes
1 Embedded 2P
or
1 External 2P
Wide
Yes
1 Embedded 2P
or
1 External 2P
Wide
Yes
2 Embedded 2P
or
2 External 2P
Wide
Yes
2 Embedded 1P
or
1 External 2P
Wide
Yes
2 Embedded 1P
or
2 External 1P
Antenna
50 MHz
2+0
1+1 HET
1+0 Exp.
1
(1+1/2+0)
2+0
1+1 HET
frequency reuse
N.B.
2 x 2+0
1+1 HET
frequency reuse
N.B.
50 MHz
2
(1+1/2+0)
50 MHz
2+0
1+1 HET
2
(compact)
2+0
1+1 HET
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
50 MHz
to be confirmed
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
67 / 458
CONFIGURATION
N.cabinet
RF channelling
1
(compact)
1+0
Wide/Narrow
Frequency
RF filters
Agility
Wide
Yes
1 Embedded 1P
or
1 External 1P
Narrow
No
1 Embedded 1P
or
1 External 1P
Wide
Yes
1 Embedded 2P
or
1 External 2P
Wide
Yes
1 Embedded 2P
or
1 External 2P
Wide
Yes
2 Embedded 2P
or
2 External 2P
Wide
Yes
2 Embedded 1P
or
1 External 2P
Wide
Yes
2 Embedded 1P
or
2 External 1P
Antenna
110112 MHz
2+0
1+1 HET
1+0 Exp.
5556 MHz
2+0
1+1 HET
1+0 Exp.
1
(1+1/2+0)
2+0
1+1 HET
frequency reuse
5556 MHz
2 x 2+0
1+1 HET
frequency reuse
2
(1+1/2+0)
5556 MHz
2+0
1+1 HET
2
(compact)
5556 MHz
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2+0
1+1 HET
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
68 / 458


3.3.5 Expandibility by means of outdoor hybrids

With the purpose to give the possibility to transmit more than one STM1 signal by using just one external
antenna, when the used configuration does not provide this feature by means of 1+1/2+0 branching,
outdoor hybrids are available for each frequency band : these hybrids are applicable as to the transceiver
1+0 as to the transceiver 1+1/2+0 as indicated by the following Fig. 16. thru Fig. 20.
Two types of hybrids are provided:
2 inputs / 1 output bidirectional hybrid
4 inputs / one output bidirectional hybrid made up of two cascaded 2/1 hybrids
In phase of Hop calculation you have to consider that the hybrid 2/1 introduces an additional power loss
of 3.5 dB for each terminal (7 dB on the hop) while the hybrid 4/1 introduces a power loss of 7 dB for each
terminal (14 dB on the hop).
Hybrid
2/1
Hybrid
2/1
Radio Network
ODU
ODU
ODU
RT 1+0
RT 1+0
ODU
RT 1+0
RT 1+0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 16. 2/1 hybrid application for two copolar channels
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
69 / 458
RT 1+0

Hybrid
4/1
ODU
RT 1+0
ODU
+
ODU
RT 1+0
+
ODU
RT 1+0
Fig. 17. 4/1 hybrid application for four copolar channels
Hybrid
2/1
RT
1+1/2+0
ODU
+
H
V
RT
1+1/2+0
ODU
+
Hybrid
2/1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 18. 2/1 hybrids application for four dual polarity channels
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
70 / 458
Hybrid
4/1
RT 1+0
ODU
RT 1+0
ODU
RT 1+0
ODU
RT 1+0
ODU
+
+
Hybrid
4/1
RT 1+0
ODU
RT 1+0
RT 1+0
ODU
+
+
ODU
+
RT 1+0
ODU
Fig. 19. 4/1 hybrids application for eight 1+0 ODU with two polarizations
Hybrid
4/1
1+1/ 2+0
ODU
+
1+1/2+0
ODU
+
Hybrid
4/1
1+1/2+0
ODU
+
+
1+1/2+0
ODU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 20. Hybrid 4/1 for four 1+1/2+0 ODU dual polarization
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
71 / 458
3.4.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes the Radio Transmission features for the 9600USY family in all configurations;
it comprehends the following main subparagraphs:
Frequency Agility
Transmitted power control: ATPC function
Transmitted power control: Static Adjustment
Frequency Reuse
Loopbacks
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
para.2 on page 43
para.3.2 on page 48
para.3.3 on page 60
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
72 / 458

3.4 9600USY Radio Transmission features

3.4.2 Frequency Agility

The frequency agility feature has been implemented allowing within a chosen subband to select the RF
working channel. The selection can be performed directly in field with benefits for spare parts, order
processing and frequency coordination.
There are two types:
1)
2)
Local frequency agility. It is the possibility to set via ECT the frequency of a single Transceiver.
Localremote frequency agility. It is the possibility to change contemporaneously the frequency
of the transceivers of one hop already installed and working by means of a proper procedure.
In the standard this feature is named RFC (Remote Frequency Control).
This feature is not available in the current release.
The feature basically consists in:
Availability of Wide Band RF filters covering unless 1/4 or 1/8 of the applicable channelling (go and
return).
Synthesized local oscillator covering 1/4 or 1/8 of the applicable channelling perceptible (go and
return).
Presetting of above local oscillator performed by local ECT.
The frequency agility availability is according to following Tab. 14.

Tab. 14. Frequency Agility availability
FREQUENCY BANDS
w13 GHz
t 13 GHz
BRANCHING RF FILTERS
CONFIGURATION
WIDE
1+0 Compact
1+0 EXP AP
1+1/2+0 HET AP
1+1/2+0 HET AP/FR
1+0 EXP CP
1+1/2+0 HET CP
NARROW
N = not available
Y = available
The main restriction of the frequency agility feature in 1+1/2+0 Alternate Polar configurations above
mentioned, is related to the fact that the two RF channels has to belong to the same RF Wide Band Filter
range (otherwise Narrow Band Filters are necessary and as a consequence the frequency agility is lost).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 21. on page 74, referred to the 18 GHz channel arrangement with the relevant WideBand
filters/Local Oscillators ranges, illustrates with a simple example the restriction.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
73 / 458
O.L.1
O.L.2
OK
CH2
W.B.FILTER
O.L.3
O.L.4
OK
OK
CH1
W.B.FILTER
O.L.1
CH2
W.B.FILTER
O.L.2
O.L.3

CH1
W.B.FILTER
O.L.4
NO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 21. Frequency agility restriction (example)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
74 / 458

3.4.3 Transmitted power control: ATPC function

The automatic control of the transmitted power (ATPC) function allows to regulate the transmitted power
in order to supply a reduced power in situation of normal propagation and the maximum power in
conditions of fading.
Working principle
The ATPC system is based on a control loop of the power transmitted between a TX transmitter and an
RX receiver connected in a radio link.
With reference to Fig. 22. herebelow the receiver furnishes through the AGC voltage the information of
the received power to the ATPC controller; it compares the voltage with threshold values (presettable) and
according to the obtained result, sends the orders of increase/ decrease of transmitted power toward the
ATPC controller on the remote station of the link. These orders are processed and therefore transferred
to the associated transmitter.
STATION A
STATION B
PRX
IF
MOD
RX
IF
DEM
VATPC
COMATPC
ATPC
CONTROL
AGC
RFCOH
EXTRACT
RFCOH
INSERT
RX FAILURE
PRX ATPC
ATPC DATA
DEM
N.B.
ATPC DATA
IF
RX
PRX
PTX
TX
IF
MOD
ATPC Regulation is shown in one transmission direction only and is valid for each channel
Fig. 22. ATPC Functionality
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The information of control of the transmitted power is exchanged between the two stations of a link utilizing
service channel at 64 Kbit/s inserted in RFCOH bytes (avoiding to touch standard SOH bytes).
In the protected configurations these information are transmitted N+1 protected.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
75 / 458
received power (absolute digital value to be transmitted towards the remote station in order to move
the Tx output power).
Rx failure (for remote Tx inhibition with reused system configuration)
ID_channel + ID_direction (for identification of ATPC channel in order to avoid problems in case of
crosstalk/interference or in case of 1+0 eastwest configuration.
This feature is not available in the current release.
This information is organized in registers of SPRI (Serial Peripheral Register Interface) where the PRx and
ID_ch information are transmitted with higher priority than Rx fail.
The information for each channel received in remote station is sent to the relevant transmitter where the
PRx information received is compared to the thresholds set and it is decided to send up or down or hold
commands to the RF transmitter.
The Rx failure received in the Tx remote station is used to switch off the relevant transmitter in case of
frequency reuse or to set the Tx at low Pout in case of standard configuration (no frequency reuse
application). The failure of Rx0 and Rx1 received in the Tx remote station is used to switch off the two
transmitters in case of 1+1HST frequency reuse configuration or to set them at low Pout in case of
1+1HST standard configuration (no frequency reuse application). It will be switched on after Rx failure
removal. Of course the Rx failure alarm is not comprehensive of propagation alarms.
The service channel above mentioned is a point to point type and in the SDH systems is terminated in each
RRA/Modemodulator.
An example is shown in the following Fig. 23.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 23. Typical ATPC threshold
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
76 / 458

The information regarding the ATPC functionality can be resumed in the following (for each channel):

Organization of the control system

The ATPC control system is replied for each channel without any centralized function.
The system control is organized in two parts for each channel and for each direction:
the Rx system control implementing PRx detection, eventual Rx failure detection and insertion of the
above data in RFCOH bytes
the Tx system control implementing extraction of data from RFCOH bytes and PTx drive.
ATPC Threshold management

The transmitter is able to change the output power in the range LM (max level) and Lm (min level). The
transceiver has an its own default value for LM, Lm and LN (nominal level).
It is possible to set the following values:
LMA
(max level ATPC)
where
LMA <= LM
LmA
(min level ATPC)
where
LmA >= Lm
with the constrain:
Lm<=LmA<=LN
Lm<=LMA<=LM
It means that:
the ATPC range is not fixed but variable according to the values set for LMA and LmA
the max ATPC output power can be different from the max output power of the transmitter and the
ATPC functionality can be maintained with reduced range
The receiver has an its own default value (not changeable) for a receive power threshold called EXTRA
POWER threshold depending from the signal (STM1 or STM0) and from the modulation used (128QAM
or 16QAM):
+5dB from threshold 10E3.
On the receiver it is possible to set a received power Low threshold for loop activation, within the following
limits:
LOW threshold: in the range from ( 40 dBm ) to ( EXTRA POWER threshold dBm )
When the received signal decreases and overcomes the LOW threshold, the transmitter increases the
output power up to the nominal value. Only if the received signal overcomes the EXTRA POWER
threshold, the transmitter increases the output power reducing its backoff (if LMA>LN only). The
hysteresis for both thresholds is 3dB.
The PRx value sent to the transmitter is the minimum level in 10ms time interval.
In case of loss of Tx_Rx ATPC signal, exchanged between Tx and Rx, the output power is frozen and an
ATPC loop alarm is activated (no other actions are taken); when the communication is restored the ATPC
loop alarm is disactivated after an hysteresis to be defined.
It is possible to enable or to disable ATPC function:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
when the ATPC is set in manual condition via ECT the output power can be changed starting from
the output power value at the moment of the manual operation;
when the ATPC is set in automatic condition the output power change in automatic way if the ATPC
loop is closed otherwise the output power remains at the value set in manual mode if the ATPC loop
is open.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
77 / 458
LMC (max calibrated level) Lmc (min calibrated level)

Every power change, from manual to automatic and viceversa is performed at the speed of 1dB /10ms.
To be sure that a decreasing of Rx power of one receiver corresponds to a PTx increasing of the relevant
Tx in remote station an identifier station code must be used. The same identifier station code should
be set on the two station involved in the ATPC functionality avoiding that in crosstalk/interference or
RFCOH bypass in repeater the Tx in one station can be driven by a not relevant Rx.
3.4.4 Transmitted power control: Static Adjustment

The capability to adjust transmitted power in a static and fixed way has been introduced for those countries
where, due to internal rules, the ATPC function is not accepted or for those hops in which due the short
length and interface problems, a fixed reduced transmitted power is preferred. The range of the possible
attenuation depends from the frequency band involved. The step for adjustment is 1 dB, with an accuracy
of 0.5 dB. The setting of the transmitted power can be performed locally by means ECT.
3.4.5 Frequency Reuse

The use of Frequency Reuse technology allows to double frequency plan transmission capacity, so to
permit the coexistence of two STM1 signals on a single radio link.
This cochannel system is seriously affected by cofrequency crosspolarized interference arising from
low XPD values that may occur during periods of multipath fading.
The XPIC (cross polar interference canceller) is a set of devices able to make negligible the mutual
interference of two signals travelling over the same carrier frequency, but on opposite polarization.
The XPIC option is available for all frequency bands with 128QAM modulation (is not available with 16QAM
modulation).
Fig. 24. on page 79 shows a simplified block diagram of XPIC kit and of its working principle.
XPIC kit composition
The XPIC kit includes:
a kit to be installed on both the units RRA/MODEM of the IDUUHRN assembly (see XPIC OPTION
in Tab. 25. on page 114 and Fig. 51. on page 126);
a kit for ODU assembly, having the function of synchronizing the Local Oscillators of the Receivers
(see an example in Fig. 73. on page 152);
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The XPIC kit requires:
that the four IDUODU IF cables have the same length ($ 20 m, corresponding to a delay of max
100 ns between signals)
the cross connection between the XPIC InputOutput sockets of the two units RRA/MODEM
(couples RMD 0/1 and 2/3) of the IDUUHRN assembly (see an example in Fig. 122. on page 206).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
78 / 458

Via ECT it is possible to set manually the output power in the range LM Lm. This setting must be
considered a temporary setting and a manual (abnormal) indication is activated. By portable service unit
and in factory only, it is possible to set manually the output power in the range:

IDU RRA/MODEM H
XPIC
BOARD
A
MOD H
RX H
TX H
IF
DEM H
XPIC
OUT
LO
XPIC
IN
B
H
ODU
XPIC
KIT
C
LO
MOD H
IF
RX V
TX V
XPIC
IN
XPIC
OUT
DEM V
XPIC
BOARD
IDU RRA/MODEM V
ODU
TX SIDE
RX SIDE
Fig. 24. XPIC kit in Frequency Reuse configurations
XPIC working principle (Fig. 24. )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In the following the signal processing operated on H Rx section is described. That operated on V Rx section
is analogous.
In points (A) and (B) the H signal is affected by V signal interference. At point (C) the V signal is sent to
H Rx section (DEM H + XPIC board) which, through a suitable processing, forwards toward the
subsequent RRA/MODEM baseband block (point (D) ) the H signal without the V interfering signal.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
79 / 458
3.4.6 Loopbacks
Loopbacks give the possibility of executing some system functional tests, like the BER test using a
pattern generator connected to the IDU STM input / output ports, thus making fault locations and
maintenance tests fast and simple.
In Rel.2.0, loopback function activation is possible directly by ECT.
The 9600USY/MDR9000s system is provided with Loopback function capabilities at various block
diagram level as depicted in following Fig. 26. thru Fig. 28. ; all of these are loopandcontinue loopbacks
(the signal is sent back and continues its path).
RRA (RMD) line loopback for electrical or optical STM1 ports at RMD level :
RST
SPI
RPS
RST
RFCOH
MODEM
RT
RSPI
RMD
RT
Fig. 25. Loopback A: RRA (RMD) line loopback
Internal loopback line side at RMD level :
RST
SPI
RST
RPS
RFCOH
MODEM
RT
RSPI
RMD
RT
Fig. 26. Loopback B: RRA (RMD) internal loopback
Internal loopback line side at RFCOH (RMD) level :
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
MODEM
RFCOH
RT
RSPI
RSPI
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RMD
RT
Fig. 27. Loopback C: RFCOH (RMD) Internal loopback
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
80 / 458

3.4.6.1 Types of loopbacks

Internal loopback line side at RF (RT) level :

at the activation of this loopback a switching off of the remote transmitter is required. However the
loopback is performed even if no confirmation of the switching off of the remote transmitter is
received:
RSPI
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
MODEM
RMD
RT
RT
Fig. 28. Loopback D: RF (RT) Internal loopback

the residual BER values (RBER) are not guaranteed in Radio Local Loop condition on.
3.4.6.2 Caution: recoverable and unrecoverable loopbacks (with RECT)
As explained in para.3.8.6 on page 101, an UHRN Network Element can be controlled, besides by the local
Craft Terminal (ECT), by a Remote Craft Terminal (RECT). In certain conditions, that are explained here,
loopbacks setup by RECT are not recoverable by RECT, therefore their settingup by RECT must be
avoided.
The remote control by RECT is carried out by means of the DCC channel which allows to access the
Equipment Controller from the Remote Craft Terminal, as depicted in Fig. 40. on page 99: this control
channel uses radio channels 0 and 1, in 1+1 protected configuration.
Figure in Fig. 29. on page 82 shows the position of the Equipment Controller EC with respect to the
loopback points A,B,C,D (these loopbacks are named as indicated in previous Fig. 26. thru Fig. 28. ).
Therefore, in 9600USY/MDR9000s UHRN configuration, the following rules must be applied to loopback
settingup:
loopbacks on channels 2 and 3:

there are no limitations (as these channels are not used for DCC communication purposes):
loopbacks setup by the local or remote Craft Terminal can be always removed by the local or remote
Craft Terminal
loopbacks on channels 0 and 1 (used for DCC communication purposes) setup by the local or
remote Craft Terminal:
can be always removed by the Local Craft Terminal
with regard to the remotion possibility by Remote Craft Terminal :
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
a)
ED
if only one DCC channel is available, i.e.:
CH1 in case of UHRN 1+0 configuration
CH0 or CH1 in case of other UHRN configurations, when any of CH0 or CH1
is unavailable for any reason
the loopback cannot be removed by the Remote Craft Terminal, according to the direction
from which the RECT tries (unsuccessfully) to access the controlled NE, because its EC
is not reachable, as depicted in Figures and in Fig. 29. on page 82.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
81 / 458
if both DCC channels are available (i.e. in all UHRN configurations, except 1+0), the
loopback remotion by RECT is possible; obviously:
unrecoverable loopbacks must not be setup on both channels CH0 and CH1
no failure on the other channel (not loopedback) CH0 or CH1 should occur in the
meanwhile
otherwise the same unrecoverable condition of previous point a ) will occur.
RT
IDU
A
EC
RT
IDU
A
RECT
EC
RT
IDU
A
RECT
EC
LOOPBACKS NOT RECOVERABLE BY REMOTE CRAFT TERMINAL

A=
B=
C=
D=
RRA (RMD) line loopback (see Fig. 25. on page 80)

RRA (RMD) internal loopback (see Fig. 26. on page 80)
RFCOH (RMD) Internal loopback (see Fig. 27. on page 80)
RF (RT) Internal loopback (see Fig. 28. on page 81
Read carefully text to interpret correctly this figure.
Fig. 29. EC position with respect to loopback points and consequent unavailability by RECT (CH0 / 1)
Fig. 30. sums up the recoverable and unrecoverable loopbacks by RECT in a double radio hop (with four
stations).
In the case the RECT controlling link comprises more than two radio hops, take into consideration that:
limitations to stations 1 and 3 apply also to all other oddnumbered stations
limitations to station 2 apply also to all other evennumbered stations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
While in first versions of UHRN SWP 2.0, remote loopback settingup by RECT can be done
without restrictions or checks, in subsequent versions the possible dangerous loopbacks
(dangerous for the DCC channel survival) will be made with a timeout control (e.g. 15 min);
the expiry of this timeout will cause the autonomous loopback remotion by the remote station.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
82 / 458

b)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Read carefully text to interpret correctly this figure.
Fig. 30. Allowed and not allowed loopbacks by RECT (CH0 / 1)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
83 / 458
EC
EC
IDU
1320CT
or OS
RT
STATION 3
RT
NOT ALLOWED LOOPBACKS

(NOT RECOVERABLE BY RECT)
ALLOWED LOOPBACKS
(RECOVERABLE BY RECT)
STATION 0
IDU
C
A=
B=
C=
D=
B
EC
B
EC
IDU
RECT CONTROL
A
D
RT
RT
STATION 1
STATION 2
IDU
EC
EC
IDU
STATION 0
IDU
STATION 3
1320CT
or OS
RT
RT
RRA (RMD) line loopback (see Fig. 25. on page 80)

RRA (RMD) internal loopback (see Fig. 26. on page 80)
RFCOH (RMD) Internal loopback (see Fig. 27. on page 80)
RF (RT) Internal loopback (see Fig. 28. on page 81
EC
IDU
EC
IDU
STATION 1
STATION 2
RT
RT

3.4.7 Performance Monitoring
3.5 UHRN Protections

3.5.1 Foreword
This paragraph sumsup the protection features for the 9600USY family in UHRN configuration; it
comprehends the following main subparagraphs:
Signal Protection
WST protection
Services protection
Further information is given in para.6.2.1.5 on page 251.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
para.3.2 on page 48
para.3.3 on page 60
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
84 / 458

Refer to para.6.2.1.2.1.3 on page 240 and para.6.2.1.3.1.2 on page 247.
3.5.2 Signal Protection

3.5.2.1 1:N HET configurations

The hitless switch, depicted in Fig. 31. herebelow, is driven by LOGIC unit located in base band shelf
tacking into account the following alarms:
Signal Fail alarm

HBER alarm
EWH (or LBER) alarm
EWL (or EW) alarm
priority
priority
priority
priority
1
2
3
4
switch performed after Rx alignment confirmation

switch performed after Rx alignment confirmation
The signal fail alarm include RCIM coming from RFCOH block (K0 management).
The logic needs to exchange information between Tx side and Rx side: after switching criterion activation,
the Rx side sends to Tx side, via DSI channel, a Tx parallel command (to send the same signal on main
channel and protection channel) and, only after a confirmation of Tx parallel, the RX switch can be
performed (after Rx alignment confirmation for EWH and EWH switching criteria).
EPS
DTX
DRX+SW
EPS
RRA
RRA
RRA
RRA
Fig. 31. 1:N HET protection
Please refer to para.6.2.1.5.2.1 on page 251 for more detailed information.

3.5.2.2 EPS protection
See Fig. 31. above.
It is driven by LOGIC unit located in 3+1 subrack taking into account the failure alarms of RRA/MODEM
boards. This protection has priority respect to hitless switch protection .
It is a dual ended protection, i.e. it acts both in Tx and Rx side at the same time.
Please refer to para.6.2.1.5.4 on page 255 for more detailed information.

3.5.3 WST protection
WST signal is available only on ch 0 and on ch 1 and on these two channels it is possible to have the WST
extra frame protected or unprotected: the choice can be performed with HW and/or SW presettings.
Please refer to para.6.2.1.5.2.2 on page 254 for more detailed information.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3.5.4 Services protection

Protected in 1+1 radio side on channels 0 and 1.
Please refer to para.6.2.1.5.5 on page 264 for more detailed information.

ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
85 / 458
3.6.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes the Signal transmission features for the 9600USY family in UHRN
configurations; it comprehends the following main subparagraphs:
STM1 transmission
SDH mapping adopted
SDH interfaces
SOH bytes and service channel access
UHRN Engineering Order Wire Characteristics
9600USY Data Channel Characteristics
para.3.2 on page 48
para.3.3 on page 60
3.6.2 STM1 transmission
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Differently from other 9600USY configurations, in UHRN environment only STM1 signal type is
supported.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
86 / 458

3.6 UHRN Signal transmission

3.6.3 SDH mapping adopted

Fig. 32. herebelow shows the more generalized multiplexing structure obtained merging the ITUT G.707
multiplexing figure with the correspondent figure of ITUR F.750.
Note that in European Standard only a subset of the generalized multiplexing structure is adopted, where
only plesiochronous interfaces at 2, 34 and 140 Mbit/s are used, but also the multiplexing of 3xAU3 into
AUG is forbidden (see Fig. 33. herebelow ).
Fig. 32. General Multiplexing Structure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 33. General European Multiplexing Structure with addition of 45 Mbit/s
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
87 / 458
3.6.4 SDH interfaces
STM1 Electrical G.708
STM1 Optical S1.1 G.957
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Some general information that are valid for each version (line rate, physical interface) of the SDH traffic
interfaces are herewith outlined:
SOH/POH bytes management according to the standard TTP or CTP rules
Optical interfaces according to the standard G.957 short and long haul
Automatic Laser Shutdown in compliance with G.958
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
88 / 458

In 9600USY/UHRN configuration, two kinds of SDH user interfaces STM1 are envisaged:
3.6.5 SOH bytes and service channel access

3.6.5.1 Overview
In the SDH system, some of SOH bytes (of SDH frame ) are used to transmit the service channels. So we
can distinguish RSOH bytes, that can be inserted/extracted both in multiplex and in regenerator station,
and MSOH bytes that can be inserted/extracted only in multiplex station. To the above rules there is the
exception (radio side) of using the insertion of a 1 WST (only in case of STM1 transmission on air)
mapped on 4 columns and the RFCOH channels mapped on two columns. The AUX/EOW bytes handling
on the Regenerator and on the WMSN supports two types of applications:
1)
Local access as termination: the auxiliary bytes of a trail termination can be bidirectionally
interconnected to the voice/data interfaces of the local service unit embedded in the equipment
itself.
2)
Crossconnection: the auxiliary bytes of two different trail terminations can be bidirectionally
interconnected providing an auxiliary channel passthrough between every couple of STM1
ports or different OH sections; it means each single byte can be configured to be
passedthrough from one direction (i.e. line side) to another one (i.e. radio side).
The auxiliary bytes connections are always unprotected and the selection of the bytes and the ports are
performed by CT/OS. The dashed cells in Tab. 15. thru Tab. 17. show the set of potential OH bytes
suitable to be processed as auxiliary channels at the section or the path terminations, with the associated
meaning.
RFCOH is a proprietary function implemented to transmit radio specific information (DSI, ATPC, MC,
WST) and to reroute over radio hop a few RSOH byte terminated.
Tab. 15. OH bytes suitable for handling on MST
RSOH
MSOH
1
A1
B1
D1
2
A1
d
d
3
A1
D
D
4
A2
E1
D2
5
A2
d
d
6
A2
f
f
7
J0
F1
D3
8
n
n
f
9
n
n
f
B2
D4
D7
D10
S1
B2
f
f
f
f
B2
f
f
f
f
K1
D5
D8
D11
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
M1
K2
D6
D9
D12
E2
f
f
f
f
n
f
f
f
f
n
6
A2
f
f
7
J0
F1
D3
8
n
n
f
9
n
n
f
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
J1
B3
C2
G1
F2
H4
F3
K3
N1
VC4/3
OH
Tab. 16. OH bytes suitable for handling on RST
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RSOH
1
A1
B1
D1
2
A1
d
d
MSOH
ED
3
A1
d
d
4
A2
E1
D2
5
A2
d
d
PASS THROUGH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
89 / 458
Tab. 17. RFCOH byte structure
Column 2
MC
MC
MC
MC
MC
FAIL serv + K0
d,n,f
d,n,f
d,n,f

Column 1
DSI
ATPC
D1
D2
D3
E1
F1
d,n,f
d,n,f
where the meaning of the bytes is summarized as follows:

for RSOH bytes:
A1A2:
J0:
d:
n:
f:
B1:
E1:
F1:
D1D2D3:
6 bytes: A1= (11110110) A2=(00101000) for frame alignment;

RS Trace for STM identification;
6 bytes for media specific usage;
4 bytes reserved for National Use;
4 bytes reserved for Future international standardization;
RS Error checking (BIP8) for regeneration section.
RS Voice for order wire channel;
data channel as user channel;
RS DCC data communication channel [192 Kb/s (TMN bytes for regenerator
section)];
for MSOH bytes:

B2:
E2:
n:
f:
K1K2:
D4..D12:
S1:
M1:
MS Error checking (BIP24) for terminal station.

MS Express channel.
2 bytes reserved for National Use;
26 bytes reserved for Future international standardization;
MPS channel K1(b1..b8) and K2(b1..b5), MSFERF/AIS K2(b6..b8):
110 indicates that the receive end is detecting a section failure or is receiving
MSAIS;
MS DCC data communication channel [576 Kb/s (TMN bytes for multiplex section)];
SDH Synchronization Quality Level: S1 (b5..b8)
Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
for POH bytes:

J1:
B3:
C2:
G1:
F2:
F3:
H4:
K3:
N1:
ED
Path trace (check end to end path connection)

Performance monitoring (BIP8 of VC4)
Signal label (full or empty VC)
Path status (FERF,FEBE) backward to the origin
Path user service channel
Path user service channel
Multiframe alignment (indicates tributary location)
4 bits for APS channel, 4 bits spare
Network operator byte for Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM) function
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
90 / 458
for RFCOH bytes:

Proprietary channels
MC:
k0:
DSI:
ATPC:
Monitoring channel:EWL, EWH, HBER, RTF, FAIL SERV.

Proprietary radio channel identifier
Digital Switching Information channel for RPS
Data channel for automatic transmitting power control
RSOH bytes rerouted over radio hop

E1:
F1:
D1D2D3:
d,n,f:
radio Order Wire

radio data channel
RS DCC data communication channel [192 Kb/s (TMN bytes for regenerator
section)];
5 addressable bytes out of d,f,n
3.6.5.2 Management carried out by UHRN

The 9600USY/UHRN Regenerator allows the management of:
Termination of RSOH or RFCOH bytes to auxiliary ports

RSOH RFCOH bytes cross connection
The following Tab. 18. shows for the Regenerator the possible AUX/EOW user interfaces of IDU suitable
to access the terminated channels:
Tab. 18. Reg. AUX/EOW user interfaces
QUANTITY
USER INTERFACES
V11 (RS422 64 Kb/s contradirectional )
V24 (RS232 9600 Kb/s)
G.703 (64 Kb/s codirectional)
EOW (telephone channel DTMF Q23)
Phonic extension
With reference to Tab. 16. on page 89, the RSOH bytes terminated line side may be in principle mapped
upon software configuration control in the following interfaces of IDU as summarized in the following table:
USER INTERFACES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RFCOH bytes (line side) [1]

V.11
V.24
G.703
EOW
(Q 23)
E1
F1
d,f,n [2]
Notes:
[1]
[2]
ED
For the DCCR (D1D3) and J0 the interfaces is towards SC

max 14 bytes d,n,f.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
91 / 458

With reference to Tab. 17. on page 90, the RSOH bytes terminated radio side through the RFCOH
function may be in principle mapped upon software configuration control in the following interfaces of IDU
as summarized in the following table:
USER INTERFACES
RFCOH bytes (radio side) [1]
V.11
V.24
G.703
EOW
(Q 23)
E1
F1
5 bytes out of d,f,n
Note:
[1] For the DCCR (D1D3) and k0 the interface is towards SC
Practically common usage of user interfaces and possible mapping is:
E1 always terminated on the EOW two ways (line side and radio side)
F1 plus max 3 bytes accessible (normally radio side) through the user interfaces 2x64 Kb/s, 1 V11
and 1 V24.
Each interface (with the exception of the voice type ) supports only one direction; the same byte can
be assigned to different direction (for example line side and radio side) using 2 interfaces.
Way Side Traffic (WST)

Additionally the Regenerator allows the management of the 2 Mb/s Way Side Traffic (WST) that represents
a service traffic in addition to the main one.
Both the WST and service channels are transmitted using the radio frame complementary overhead
(RFCOH, an arbitrary and unstandardized extra SDH frame overhead).
The main features of the 2 Mbit/s WST Channels management are the following:
One 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic can be inserted in each STM1 channel (CH0 and CH1 only); sub
STM1 / STM0 channels cannot transport 2 Mb/s WST.
The Regenerator N+1/N+0 can support one, two or none WST channels. If two WST are supported
they are unprotected, if only one is supported it is always protected. The Regenerator 1+0 can
support only one unprotected WST channel.
Automatic switching criteria are : Signal Fail (SF), HBER, LBER and EW.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The RFCOH service channels above considered are protected as a unique entity in 1+1 (this protection
is independent of WST channels protection) in all the configurations.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
92 / 458

3.6.6 UHRN Engineering Order Wire Characteristics

The EOW Channel allows the access to the phone services of the system.
It is interfaced with the telephone set with DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) Tones and with association
circuits, branching, exchange and receiving of the phone signal.
The EOW Channel allows the following types of calls:
TYPE OF CALL
No digits
Between two station (selective call)
Between one station and all the others (omnibus call)
The omnibus call number is identified in the number 00.
3.6.7 9600USY Data Channel Characteristics

a)
In case of G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface the timing signals (64 KHz and 8 KHz) are derived
from the data stream.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 34. G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
93 / 458
In case of RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface the timing signal (64 KHz and 8
KHz) are directed towards the user. The code is NRZ.
b)
Fig. 35. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface

c)
In case of RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous up to 9600 baud no timing signals are required. The signal
is internally over sampled up to 64 KHZ. The code is NRZ.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 36. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
94 / 458

3.7 UHRN Synchronization

3.7.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes the Synchronization strategy to be adopted for the 9600USY family in UHRN
configurations; it comprehends the following main subparagraphs:
General
Last mile and spur applications
para.3.2 on page 48
3.7.2 General
SDH transmission operates on general principles that implies the existence of timing devices that form
part of a synchronizing network.
Each STM1 stream incoming in UHRNRMDs Optical/Electrical STM1 interfaces takes the network
synchronization, that is recovered by the equipment and forwarded toward the radio hop or toward the line,
retiming the transmitted signal by means the recovered clock.
As the UHRN equipment (that is a regenerator) does not include MSA with its own CRU, the incoming
STM1 streams must be inclock synchronous with each other. In general, this can be obtained easily:
if all the incoming streams come from the same ADM
or, in case the incoming streams come from different ADMs, if these ADMs are inclock synchronous
with each other.
There is no need that the incoming STM1 streams are inphase synchronous with each other.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The synchronization requirements implies that the interfaced ADM equipment must include a
synchronization subsystem for a slave clock which functions are specified in ITUT Rec. G.783 as the
Synchronous Equipment Timing Source (SETS).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
95 / 458
Regarding the synchronization of radio links composing spur or last mile applications, the following
possible scenarios are offered:
a)
Pointtopoint connection between two possible SDH subnetworks as represented in

Fig. 37. herebelow: the radio link, composed by one or more hops, can be synchronized by one of
the two sides SDH subnetworks and the presence of the ADM is not important for the synchronism
purposes.
STM1
SDH
subnetwork
STM1
ADM
UHRN
SDH
subnetwork
ADM
UHRN
Fig. 37. Pointtopoint connection between two SDH subnetwork

b)
Pointtopoint connection between two Ethernet data routers as shown in Fig. 38. herebelow: in this
case one side is configurated as a master and the other one as slave. If a failure happens in one
direction the other one can take over the control of the synchronism for the complete link.
MASTER
SLAVE
Ethernet
Ethernet
Router
subnetwork
ADM
UHRN
Router
subnetwork
ADM
UHRN
Fig. 38. Pointtopoint connection between two Ethernet routers

c)
Connection between the SDH network and a User application that can be IP/ATM router or other type
of data equipment as shown in Fig. 39. herebelow: normally the complete radio link synchronization
is taken over starting from the SDH network and on the other side the presence of ADM is
recommended in order to have the possibility to work as a Master in the hypothesis that a failure
happens in the direction toward the user.
MTU
STM1
SDH
subnetwork
STM1
UHRN
UHRN
ADM
User
subnetwork
4.6 p.p.m.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 39. Spur/Last mile application between SDH network and User
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
96 / 458

3.7.3 Last mile and spur applications

3.8 UHRN Equipment control

3.8.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes the Equipment control features of the 9600USY family in UHRN configurations;
it comprehends the following main subparagraphs:
Introduction
The NE general architecture
UHRN behavior
The F and Qecc/QB3 interfaces
ECT and RECT
para.3.2 on page 48
3.8.2 Introduction
9600USY Digital Radio Relay Systems can operate correctly through Control and Management Functions
which are usually partially embedded as Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF) and
Message Communication Function (MCF) in the involved Network elements.
Equipment control can be performed locally through an Equipment Craft Terminal (1320CT) or remotely
through a Craft Terminal in a remote site.
External control units may be dedicated to a Radio subnetwork or may be the Control Elements of an SDH
Network including Radio Links, Fiber Optical Lines, Synchronous Multiplexers and CrossConnect
Equipment.
Inside an overall Managed Telecommunication Network, SDH Digital Radio Relay Systems are part of a
Managed Synchronous Network. The 9600USY DRRS equipment interfaces the TMN according to ETSI
Standard and ITUT Rec G.784, G.773 and ITUR Rec 750.
The architecture of the management process is intrinsically a distributed process based on Manager and
Agent Functions.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To connect SDH Radio Equipment to a TMN System, Qtype Interfaces are used, adopting the standard
Infomodel based QType Interfaces Qecc and QB3 for a full integration in a multivendor environment.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
97 / 458
A Digital Radio Relay Link identified as a Radio Switching Section is composed of two Radio Relay
Terminals (RRT). Each physical entity RRT is a SDH NE and therefore according to ITUT Rec G.784 they
have TMN Q3 and Qecc Interfaces.
All the SDH NE must be able to terminate the Regenerator Section (RS).
Two types of RRT are available depending on the ability to terminate a Multiplex Section (MS) or a
Regenerator Section (RS) only. This ability is required when the RRT having PDH tributaries (140 Mb/s,
2, 34 or 45 Mb/s) behaves like an SDH Multiplexer (i.e. WMSN station composed at least by two NEs: UHM
+ UHR). When the RRT has SDH tributaries, this ability is not strictly required and therefore the RRT may
be equipped with an RRA (Radio Regenerator Adaptation) Assembly (Regenerator station equal to the
NE UHRN or UHR/UHRC).
Associated to the RS and the MS there are in the SOH of the SDH frame two Embedded Control Channels
(having as physical interfaces the D1D3 bytes in the RSOH and D4D12 bytes in the MSOH) carrying
the management information between the ends of the RS and MS respectively. These channels are
terminated in the Message Communication Function (MCF), located in the Equipment Controller of the
NE, which behaves like a Packet Switching Node. The communication interface of these channels on the
physical interfaces D1D3 and D4D12 is a 7layer full OSI protocol stack as defined in ITUT Rec G.784
named Qecc.
While the intersite or interoffice communications links between SDH NEs is normally formed from the
SDH ECCs, within a particular site (intrasite connections) or when the SDH NE is acting as Gateway
Network Element (GNE) towards a Data Communication Network connecting the NE with an Operation
System (OS), a 7layer full OSI protocol stack named QBX is used. QBX is a Q3 type interface and with
reference to the foreseen protocol suites:
QB1 is a Connection oriented over X.25 (CONS1) interface,
QB2 is a Connectionless Mode over X.25 (CLNS2) interface,
QB3 is a Connectionless Mode over ISO 8802 LAN interface.
The previous Qtype interfaces in their standardized versions implies the use of a Management
Application Software based on an objectoriented Information Model and the use at the 7th layer of the
OSI stack of protocols as CMISE, ROSE and ACSE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The availability on the NE of all these QType TMN interfaces do not imply the contemporary use of all
of them. Their use and the criteria for selecting them is the TMN network designer responsibility according
to the management traffic load and the network layout. The only limitation imposed by standards is that
in the RRRs (and obviously in the RRTs equipped with RRA) the only RSOH has to be terminated
whereas the MSOH has to be passedthrough.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
98 / 458

3.8.3 The NE general architecture

3.8.4 UHRN behavior

As far as the QB3 and Qecc interfaces are concerned, the following criteria in their use have been adopted
in UHRN Regenerator station (Fig. 40. herebelow):
the DCCR bytes of the RSOH are reinserted in the SDH frame through the RFCOH and MODEM
units with 1+1 protection (Radio Channels 1 and 0)
the MSOH remains untouched and is carried transparently.
REG.
REG.
(1,0)
TR
TR
D1D3
MD
MD
RPS
RPS
(1,0)
(1,0)
D4D12
D1D3
(1,0)
D4D12
D1D3
D4D12
RRA
RRA
SEMF
SEMF
F
MCF
1320CT
QB3
MCF
QB3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 40. DCC management: Regenerator case
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
99 / 458
3.8.5 The F and Qecc/QB3 interfaces
The F interface is the control interface connecting locally the Craft Terminal to the Equipment
Controller.
The F interface is not a standard interface since in TMN there is only the F interface as reference point
between WSF (Work Station Function) and OSF (Operation System Function) and the F interface
is not yet standardized.
An F interface has been standardized for all the ALCATEL equipment and is using the following
protocols:
Physical Layer
Standard: EIA RS232C/ITUT V24V28

Type: Pointtopoint, Asynchronous full Duplex
Transmission rate: 38600 bit/s
Connector: 9 pin female Sub D
Data Link Layer
Asynchronous HDLC standard protocol

ISO 3309 ISO 4335 ISO 7809
Qecc/QB3 interfaces
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In the TMN (Telecommunication Management Network) Architecture, while Qecc is the

communication interface on the DCCs (Data Communication Channel) used as ECCs (Embedded
Control Channel) in a SDH Subnetwork, the QB3 interface is used to interface the SDH Subnetwork
to the OSs, usually through a DCN (Data Communication Network). The Gateway Function
performing the protocol conversion (from Qecc to QB3 and vice versa) is carried out by the GNE
(Gateway Network Element) of the subnetwork.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
100 / 458

F interface
3.8.6 ECT and RECT

ECT
ALCATEL TMN management products 1320 CT called Craft Terminals (CT) consists of a compatible
personal computer and application software specially developed for monitoring transmission
equipment. The CT designed to monitor a single transmission equipment is called Equipment Craft
Terminal (ECT) or 1320CT.
For each 9600USY/UHRN regenerator station an ALCATEL proprietary SWP package is employed:
SWP 3+1 REG. 9600USY Rel.x.x
The Equipment Craft Terminal, connected to the F interface of the Equipment Controller, enables an
operator to perform locally the following Element Management functions:
Equipment Management
Transmission Management
Test management
External points management
Alarm (fault) management
Synchronization management
Radio Management
Performance Monitoring Management
Event log manager
Overhead Management
Connection Management
Software Management
Communication and Routing Management
Security Management
Support Management
RECT
The Remote Equipment Craft Terminal is a feature only present in the Single NE Link architecture
which allows the local operator, using an ECT connected to the F interface of the Equipment
Controller, to zoom and perform a complete set of management operations on all the reachable SDH
NEs in the SDH.
The Remote NE can be physically reached through QB3/Qecc.
RECT can be connected to any NE pertaining to the same area of the local NE and to any NE
pertaining to different areas (assuming that the DCN network has been correctly designed and hence
interarea communication is possible from networking viewpoint).
Of course, due to the limitation of the physical resources in the Equipment Controller of the NE, some
network design constraints must be taken into account as the total number of managed NEs (64),
the number of the QB3 NEs (32), the number of the QB3* NEs (32), the number of associations
permanently open (31) between the CT and the remote NEs.
The RECT features and limitations are briefly the following:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1)
The RECT function provides a remote login facility similar to those offered by an OS to manage
several configured NEs, included the local one.
The contemporaneous presence of the RECT function and an OS is possible. The access
disable flag avoids access conflict between the OS and both RECT and ECT on some
operations as configuration modification and remote control with access filtering.
2)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
101 / 458
The NE which may be remotely controlled by a RECT must be configured and must be loaded
with the same SW version supporting the RECT function. A NE not supporting RECT function
shall refuse the incoming association issued by a RECT and the ECT displays only local
information.
Only three RECTs shall be active at a time over one NE. The coexistence of ECTs and RECTs
in the whole network is guaranteed since the conflict in configuring the QB3 NEs is solved locally
by the NE itself.
The operator, through the RECT function, is able to see the alarm synthesis of the whole
network .
In a SDH network the maximum number of QB3 NEs equipped with the RECT function are 32
and the maximum number of NEs (QB3* NEs and QB3 NEs) manageable by the RECT function
are 64. These figures identify what it is understood as small SDH network for which the RECT
function may substitute the Element Manager.
4)
5)
6)
N.B.
Refer to CT Operators Handbook for further information on:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
HW and SW requirement of the PC to be used as ECT and RECT

detailed description of ECT and RECT functionalities and operations allowed.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
102 / 458

3)
4 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION

4.1 Introduction
This chapter gives detailed operative information regarding:
the equipments items (P/Ns, equipping rules, labels for remote inventory)
their physical and logical position in the system
the unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description of the access
points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
WARNING FOR SOME WRITINGS
Some of the writings (on the units front panels) documented in this chapter are not present on the
units delivered to Customers during 2002. Delivery to Customers of units with such writings should
begin in 2003 (quarter to be defined). This note applies to the following figures:
Fig. 46. on page 120
pinout description of connectors for Customer usage
summary and operative information on characteristics of external interfaces

and is organized as follows:
Part list:
IDU/REG Part list:

ODU, Antenna and Outdoor Hybrids part list:
Additional items for EPS option
IDU/REG shelf
on page 105, including:

on page 105
on page 109
on page 110
Information for provisioning:
Shelf layout
on page 111
SAM 3+1 unit & Flash Card equipping rules and composition on page 112
LOGIC unit equipping rules and composition

on page 112
RMD, XPIC units and electrical and optical modules

equipping rules and composition
on page 113
PSU units equipping rules and composition

on page 116
FANS units equipping rules and composition

on page 117
Connection to EPS Subrack equipping rules and composition

on page 117
Operative information:
SAM 3+1 unit and Flash Card operative information

on page 118
LOGIC unit operative information

on page 123
RMD and XPIC Units operative information

on page 124
STM1 electrical and optical modules operative information on page 128
PSU units operative information

on page 129
FANS units operative information

on page 130
Connection To EPS Subrack operative information

on page 131
IDU/EPS shelf
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Information for provisioning:
Shelf layout
on page 132
EPS module & optical modules equipping rules and composition on page 133
PSU units equipping rules and composition

on page 134
Connection to 3+1 Subrack equipping rules and composition on page 135
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
103 / 458
ODU assembly
Types of ODU
ODU 1+0 compact equipping rules
ODU 1+1/2+0 equipping rules
ODU physical views
ODU service replaceable parts
External interfaces
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
SDH line interface

Input / Output WST
Management Interfaces
Service channels
IF Input / Output
Analogic Measures
Power Line Interface
LED meaning summary
Station Alarms
Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms

on page 140
on page 141
on page 143
on page 145
on page 153


on page 156
on page 158
on page 159
on page 160
on page 162
on page 162
on page 162
on page 163
on page 164
on page 164
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
104 / 458

4.2 Part lists

4.2.1 IDU/REG Part list
Tab. 19. 9600USY/UHRN IDU/REG Part list
REF [x] is used in other parts of this handbook to refer to the item
For notes (NBx) refer to Tab. 20. on page 109.
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
REF
a ) NAME
b ) position and/or
description
reference
QUANTITY ACCORDING TO
CONFIGURATION
1+0
1+1
2+0
NB1
2+1
3+0
NB2
3+1
4+0
NB3
SUBRACK
[1]
3DB02730AA
(593.230.035)
a ) 3+1
REGENERATOR
SUBRACK
b ) (A) in Fig. 42.
pg.111
COMMON PARTS WITH FRONT PLATES AND DUMMY PLATES

A) POWER SUPPLY AND DUMMY PLATE
[2]
[3]
3DB00090AA
(478.200.001)
a ) 48 TO 60V
DC/DC
CONVERTER
b ) (E) & (H) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
3DB00282AA
(299.702.692)
a ) PW.SUPPLY
FRONT COVER
PLATE
b ) (H) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
B) FANS UNIT AND FRONT PLATE

[4]
3DB00154AA
(487.230.478)
a ) FANS UNIT
b ) (F) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
[5]
3DB03766AA
(299.702.971)
a ) SINGLE FANS
FRONT PLATE
b ) (F) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
3DB02733AA
(299.702.841)
a ) ASSEMBLED
FRONTAL FOR
FANS
b ) (F) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
[6]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 19. continues ...
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
105 / 458
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
REF
a ) NAME
b ) position and/or
description
reference
CONFIGURATION
1+0
1+1
2+0
NB1
2+1
3+0
NB2
3+1
4+0
NB3
C) SAM UNIT AND FRONT PLATE
[7]
[8]
3DB02781AA
(411.200.552)
a ) 3+1 AUX.
SERVICE &
MANAGEMENT
b ) (B) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
3DB00273AA
(299.302.348)
a ) SERVICE FRONT
PLATE KIT
b ) (B) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
D) FLASH CARD on SAM (units in alternative)
[9]
[10]
1AB152050001
(084.617.902)
a ) FLASH CARD 80
MB
b ) (B) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
1AB151770001
(084.617.912)
a ) 48 MB FLASH
CARD
b ) (B) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
1
(in alternative)
E) LOGIC UNIT AND DUMMY PLATE
[11]
3DB02783AA
(411.200.553)
a ) 3+1 SWITCHING
LOGIC
b ) (C) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
[12]
3DB03767AA
(299.702.972)
a ) FRONT COVER
PLATE H35
b ) (C) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
0
or
1
NB5
0
or
1
NB4
0
or
1
NB5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
106 / 458

... continues Tab. 19.

ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
REF
a ) NAME
b ) position and/or
description
reference
CONFIGURATION
1+0
1+1
2+0
NB1
2+1
3+0
NB2
3+1
4+0
NB3
RRA/MODEM
F) RRA/MODEM (units in alternative)
[13]
3DB02289AA
(411.200.541)
a ) RRA MOD
128 QAM (STM1)
b ) (D) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
[14]
3DB02547AA
(411.200.549)
a ) RRA/MODEM 32
QAM (STM1)
b ) (D) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
3DB00275AA
(411.200.482)
a ) RRA/MODEM
16 QAM
(STM1STM0)
b ) (D) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
[15]
G) XPIC OPTION on RRA/MODEM units (see point c ) on page 113)

[16]
3DB01021AA
(474.210.087)
a ) XPIC BOARD
[17]
3DB01938AA
(299.302.018)
a ) XPIC CABLE KIT
FRONT PLATES AND DUMMY PLATE FOR RRA/MODEM

H) FRONT PLATE FOR RRA/MODEM WITHOUT XPIC OPTION
[18]
3DB00272AA
(299.302.347)
a ) RRA/MOD FRONT
PLATE KIT
b ) (D) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
I) FRONT PLATE FOR RRA/MODEM WITH XPIC OPTION
[19]
3DB00274AA
(299.302.349)
a ) RRA/MOD + XPIC
FRONT PLATE KIT
b ) (D) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
a ) FRONT COVER
PLATE H30
b ) (D) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
J) DUMMY PLATE
[20]
3DB00281AA
(299.702.691)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
107 / 458
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
REF
a ) NAME
b ) position and/or
description
reference
CONFIGURATION
1+0
1+1
2+0
NB1
2+1
3+0
NB2
3+1
4+0
NB3
STM1 Electrical/Optical Modules (in alternative) on RRA/MODEM units, PROTECTION CAPS

AND DUMMY PLATE (see Tab. 26. on page 115)
K) ELECTRICAL
[21]
3DB00304AA
(474.210.063)
a ) RRA STM1
ELECT.
INTERFACE
[22]
3AL79428AA
(298.701.200)
a ) CASE EMC 1.0/2.3

FOR ICMI 4.4 MM
L) OPTICAL (units in alternative)

[23]
3AL78815AA
(474.166.420)
a ) S1.1 OPTIC.
INTERF. FC/PC
[24]
3AL78815AB
(474.166.424)
a ) S1.1 OPTIC.
INTERF. SC/PC
M) DUMMY PLATE
[25]
3AN49453AA
(299.701.335)
a ) MASKING PLATE
COMPLETE
b ) (I) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
ACCESSORIES
[26]
3DB02997AA
(290.202.249)
a ) COMPLETE
MASKING PANEL
b ) (F) in
Fig. 42. pg.111
[27]
3DB 01398 AA
(299.702.815)
a ) MAINTENANCE
TOOL KIT
b ) para.8.3.2 pg.372
[28]
3DB 00511 AA
(411.200.483)
a ) PORTABLE
SERVICE KIT
(PSK)
b ) para.8.3.3 pg.376
SOFTWARE AND SOFTWARE LICENCES: refer to Operators Handbook REF.[H] on page 413
INSTALLATION MATERIALS: refer to Installation Handbook ref.[S] on page 415
DOCUMENTATION: see para.9.2 on page 410
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
end of Tab. 19.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
108 / 458


Tab. 20. Notes to Tab. 19.

MEANING
NOTE
NB1
or (1+1 with Occasional Traffic)
NB2
NB3
NB4
not necessary in configuration 2+0

must be equipped in configuration 1+1 with Occasional Traffic
NB5
must be equipped in configurations 1+0 and 2+0 if the LOGIC unit

is not equipped
not necessary in other configurations (all of which require the LOGIC
unit equipment)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4.2.2 ODU, Antenna and Outdoor Hybrids part list
For ODU refer to para.4.5.5 on page 153 (general description) and to the ODU TECHNICAL
HANDBOOK (REF.[A] on page 412) for detailed lists.
For antennas (integrated and external) and outdoor hybrids, please refer to the ODU TECHNICAL
HANDBOOK (REF.[A] on page 412).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
109 / 458
4.2.3 Additional items for EPS option
REF [x] is used in other parts of this handbook to refer to the item
This table details only the P/Ns specific of EPS option. P/Ns already used in IDU/REG shelf are
referenced, if necessary.
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
REF
a ) NAME
b ) position and/or
description
reference
CONFIGURATION
1+1
1+1
+occ
2+1
2+1
+occ
3+1
3+1
+occ
SUBRACK
[29]
3DB03525AA
(593.230.037)
a ) EPS SUBRACK
b ) (A) in Fig. 60. pg.132
POWER SUPPLY
P/N: see REF.[2] in Tab. 19.
Position (D) in Fig. 60. pg.132
EPS MODULE AND SUBSTITUTIVE DUMMY PLATE

[30]
3DB03536AA
(411.200.585)
a ) EPS MODULE
b ) (B) in Fig. 60. pg.132
[31]
3AN49397AA
(299.701.587)
a ) DUMMY PLATE W20

b ) (B) in Fig. 60. pg.132
max
1
max
2
max
2
max
3
max
3
max
4
OPTICAL MODULE ON EPS MODULE (optional)

P/N: see REF.[23] or [24] in Tab. 19.
Position (C) in Fig. 60. pg.132
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ITEMS FOR EPSREG SHELF INTERCONNECTION
[32]
3DB03202AA
(299.702.950)
a ) CABLE KIT
EXTENSION 1
CHANNEL
b ) Fig. 128. on page 213
[33]
3DB03604AA
(474.210.448)
a ) CONNECTION TO
EPS SUBRACK
b ) (G) in Fig. 42. pg.111
[34]
3DB03531AA
(487.230.556)
a ) CONNECTION TO
3+1 SUBRACK
b ) (E) in Fig. 60. pg.132
[35]
3DB03528AA
(299.702.967)
a ) COVER FOR
CONNECTION TO
3+1 SUBRACK
b ) (E) in Fig. 60. pg.132
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
110 / 458

Tab. 21. Additional items for EPS option

4.3 IDU/REG shelf

4.3.1 IDU/REG shelf composition and equipment provisioning
4.3.1.1 IDU/REG shelf layout
The Regenerator indoor part is composed by one shelf whose logical and physical composition is shown
in Fig. 41. and Fig. 42. herebelow.
CONNECTION TO
slot 7 : FANS0
EPS SUBRACK
slot 1 : SAM 3+1

slot 9 : PSU0
slot 2 : RMD0
slot 3 : RMD1
slot 10 : PSU1
slot 4 : LOGIC
slot 11 : PSU2
slot 5 : RMD2
slot 12 : PSU3
slot 6 : RMD3
slot 8 : FANS1
Fig. 41. UHRN IDU/REG shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering)
SUBRACK P/N:
REF.[1] in Tab. 19. on page 105
FANS0
E
G
SAM 3+1
RMD0
PSU0
RMD1
PSU1
LOGIC
PSU2
RMD2
PSU3
RMD3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
F
FANS1
Fig. 42. UHRN IDU/REG shelf board equipment physical view (max equipment)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
111 / 458
Tab. 22. SAM 3+1 unit and Flash Card equipping rules and composition
POSITION IN REG SHELF (see Fig. 42. on page 111)
The SAM unit is always equipped and contains the System Controller (with the equipment
and radio controller), the subunit ESCON (in its turn, housing the equipment configuration
data memory device FLASH CARD) and the external connectors for the QB3 and F
interfaces, for the auxiliary AUX/EOW service channels and 2Mbit/s WST.
The unit front plate has its own P/N.
Refer to para.4.3.2.1 on page 118 for unit drawings.
UNIT
P/N
([REF] in Tab. 19. on page 105)
Label for
Remote
Inventory
3+1 AUX. SERVICE &

MANAGEMENT
[7]
SAM
SERVICE FRONT PLATE KIT
[8]
FLASH CARD
[9] or [10] in alternative
MEMDEV
(B)
4.3.1.3 LOGIC unit equipping rules and composition

Tab. 23. LOGIC unit equipping rules and composition
LOGIC UNIT
The LOGIC unit contains the TX and RX distributor and the switch logic for the RPS and
EPS functions used in N+1 configurations.
In 3+0 and 4+0 configurations, where RPS is not used, nevertheless the unit is necessary
to control the RTs belonging to the channels 2 and 3.
Its equipping is not mandatory in 1+0 and 2+0 configurations, but it can be optionally
equipped (in 1+0 to allow future expansions, in 2+0 to allow configuration change from
2+0 to 1+1).
(C)
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
3+1 SWITCHING LOGIC
[11]
LOGIC
DUMMY PLATE
When LOGIC is not equipped (only in 1+0 and 2+0 configurations), the corresponding
slots must be closed by a dummy plate to guarantee EMC requirements and equipment
correct ventilation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FRONT COVER PLATE H35
ED
[12]
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
112 / 458

4.3.1.2 SAM 3+1 unit and Flash Card equipping rules and composition

4.3.1.4 RMD, XPIC units and electrical and optical modules equipping rules
and composition
IDU/REG subracks RMD slots occupation is as follows, according to system configuration:
Tab. 24. RMD slot occupation according to system configuration
CONFIGURATION
RMD SLOTS USAGE

(see Fig. 41. and Fig. 42. on page 111)
slot 2
RMD0
slot 3
RMD1
slot 5
RMD2
slot 6
RMD3
(1+0)
not equipped
N.B.
RMD unit
(main)
not equipped
N.B.
not equipped
N.B.
(1+1)
RMD unit
(standby)
RMD unit
(main1)
not equipped
N.B.
not equipped
N.B.
(2+0) or
(1+1 with Occasional)
RMD unit
(main0)
or (standby) +
(occasional0)
RMD unit
(main1)
not equipped
N.B.
not equipped
N.B.
(2+1)
RMD unit
(standby)
RMD unit
(main1)
not equipped
N.B.
RMD unit
(main3)
(3+0) or
RMD unit
(main0)
or (standby) +
(occasional0)
RMD unit
(main1)
not equipped
N.B.
RMD unit
(main3)
(3+1)
RMD unit
(standby)
RMD unit
(main1)
RMD unit
(main2)
RMD unit
(main3)
(4+0) or
RMD unit
(main0)
or (standby) +
(occasional0)
RMD unit
(main1)
RMD unit
(main2)
RMD unit
(main3)
N.B.
RMD slots, when unused, must be closed by a dummy plate to guarantee EMC requirements.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The RMD unit contains:

a)
the RMD basic board implementing the RRA, Modulator and Demodulator functions.
See Tab. 25. on page 114 for details.
b)
a slot for housing:
when EPS not equipped, one STM1 Electrical or Optical module by means of which the RRA
is connected to the transmission line, or a dummy plate.
The spare channel (RMD0) is equipped with this module (electrical or optical) only if
Occasional traffic is supported.
when EPS is equipped, one STM1 Electrical module by means of which the RRA is connected
to the corresponding EPS module in the EPS shelf.
c)
the XPIC option; this option is envisaged only in case of 128 QAM modulation.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
113 / 458
RMD BASIC BOARD (without XPIC option)

The following RRA/MODEM units are in alternative.
WARNING: in UHRN environment only STM1 signal is supported by the RMD card.
The unit front plate has its own P/N.
Refer to Fig. 49. on page 125 for unit assembly drawing and to Fig. 52. on page 126 for
unit front view.
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
RRA MOD
128 QAM (STM1)
[13]
RMD128N1
RRA/MODEM
32 QAM (STM1)
[14]
RMD32N1
RRA/MODEM
16 QAM (STM1STM0)
[15]
RMD16
RRA/MOD
FRONT PLATE KIT
[18]
XPIC OPTION
(D)
The XPIC option on RRA/MODEM unit is possible in the configurations listed in point c )
on page 113.
The unit front plate is different from that used when XPIC option is not present.
Refer to Fig. 51. on page 126 for unit assembly drawing and to Fig. 52. on page 126 for
unit front view.
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
XPIC BOARD
[16]
XPIC128
XPIC CABLE KIT
[17]
RRA/MOD + XPIC FRONT

PLATE KIT
[19]
DUMMY PLATE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When a RMD unit is not equipped, the corresponding subrack slot must be closed by a
dummy plate to guarantee EMC requirements and equipment correct ventilation.
ED
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
FRONT COVER PLATE H30
[20]
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
114 / 458

Tab. 25. RMD board equipping rules and composition

Tab. 26. Electrical/Optical Modules on RMD boards equipping rules and composition
POSITION IN REG SHELF (see Fig. 42. on page 111) on equipped RMD board
ELECTRICAL MODULES
Note: when the electrical module is equipped but is temporarily unused, a special case
must be put on it to guarantee EMC requirements.
The electrical module is always equipped in the configurations with EPS option.
Refer to Fig. 53. on page 128 for physical drawings.
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
RRA STM1 ELECT.

INTERFACE
[21]
CMIE
CASE EMC 1.0/2.3 FOR

ICMI 4.4 MM
[22]
OPTICAL MODULES
The optical module is never equipped in the configurations with EPS option.
Modules in alternative.
(I)
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
S1.1 OPTIC. INTERF.

FC/PC
[23]
IS1.1
S1.1 OPTIC. INTERF.

SC/PC
[24]
IS1.1
DUMMY PLATE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When neither electrical nor optical module is equipped (i.e. in N+1 configurations without
Occasional traffic and without EPS option) the module slot must be closed by a dummy
plate to guarantee EMC requirements and equipment correct ventilation (as in Fig. 52. on
page 126).
ED
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
MASKING PLATE
COMPLETE
[25]
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
115 / 458
The PSU units power the IDU/REG shelf and the associated ODUs; with reference to Fig. 41. and
Fig. 42. on page 111:
PSU0 and PSU1 are always equipped;

they give power supply:
in protected mode to:
SAM unit
LOGIC unit
RMD0 and RMD1
FANS0 unit
in unprotected mode:
PSU0 to RT0 of ODU0 (CH0), through RMD0
PSU2 and PSU3 are equipped only in the following configurations:
2+1; 3+0; 3+1 ; 4+0

they give power supply:
in protected mode to:
RMD2 and RMD3
FANS1 unit
in unprotected mode:
Tab. 27. PSU units equipping rules and composition in REG shelf
PSU UNIT
(E)
(H)
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
48 TO 60V DC/DC
CONVERTER
[2]
PSU4860
DUMMY PLATE
When PSU2 and PSU3 are not equipped (i.e. in 1+0, 1+1 and 2+0 configurations),
the corresponding slots must be closed by a dummy plate to guarantee EMC requirements
and equipment correct ventilation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(H)
ED
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
PW.SUPPLY FRONT COVER

PLATE
[3]
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
116 / 458

4.3.1.5 Power Supply Units equipping rules and composition

4.3.1.6 Fans units equipping rules and composition

The FANS unit contains fans, in order to provide the necessary ventilation to the IDU shelf, and the Rack
Lamp connector.
With reference to Fig. 41. and Fig. 42. on page 111:
FANS0 is always equipped;
FANS1 is equipped only in the following configurations:
2+1; 3+0; 3+1 ; 4+0
There are two types of front plates, to cover both FANS slots, according to the number of FANS units
equipped.
Tab. 28. FANS units equipping rules and composition
FANS UNIT
(F)
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
FANS UNIT
[4]
FANS
FRONT PLATE FOR ONE FANS UNIT

SINGLE FANS FRONT
PLATE
[5]
FRONT PLATE FOR TWO FANS UNITS

ASSEMBLED FRONTAL FOR
FANS
[6]
4.3.1.7 CONNECTION TO EPS SUBRACK equipping rules and composition

The SHELFs slot G (see Fig. 42. on page 111):
contains the passive board CONNECTION TO EPS SUBRACK, when EPS shelf is equipped (refer
to para.4.3.2.7 on page 131 for unit drawings);
otherwise is empty and closed by a dummy plate (COMPLETE MASKING PANEL) to guarantee EMC
requirements and equipment correct ventilation.
Tab. 29. CONNECTION TO EPS SUBRACK equipping rules and composition
SLOT G
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(G)
ED
UNIT
P/N
([REF] in Tab. 19. on page 105 or
Tab. 21. on page 110)
Label for
Remote
Inventory
CONNECTION TO EPS
SUBRACK
[33]
COMPLETE MASKING
PANEL
[26]
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
117 / 458
4.3.2 IDU/REG shelf units operative information
Refer to:
para.3.2.5 on page 56 for a brief functional description of the unit
para.4.3.1.2 on page 112 for physical composition and P/Ns
chapter 6, and in particular para.6.2.6 on page 304, for the detailed functional description of the unit
The following information is given hereafter:
Fig. 43. herebelow shows the unit assembly view
Fig. 44. herebelow shows the FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
para.4.3.2.1.1 on page 119 describes the unit front view
para.4.3.2.1.2 on page 120 gives details on Leds
para.4.3.2.1.3 on page 120 describes the connection rules for WST channels
para.4.3.2.1.4 on page 121 gives details on Lamp Test & Reset buttons
para.4.3.2.1.5 on page 121 describes the hardware setting options dependent on SWP and
system configuration.
Subunit
ESCON
FLASH CARD
main board
SAM 3+1 COMPATIBLE
SERVICE FRONT PLATE KIT
Fig. 43. SAM 3+1 AUX. SERVICE & MANAGEMENT Unit assembly view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TOP SIDE
INSERTION
Fig. 44. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
118 / 458

4.3.2.1 SAM 3+1 Unit and Flash Card operative information
4.3.2.1.1 SAM 3+1 Unit front view and access points

(4) I/0 * BNC Lan Ethernet
(5) Alarms,housekeeping,
and PRx analog measure
(2) RJ45 Lan Ethernet
(3) I/O WST

(1) LEDs
SERVICE
FRONT
PLATE KIT
(6) Alarm attending
(8) EOW jack

(10) Lamp test
(11) Reset
(9) RS232 for F interface

(7) Service channels
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LEGEND:
(1) : LEDs (details in Fig. 46. on page 120)
(2) : RJ45 Lan Ethernet (details in Tab. 43. on page 159)
(3) : I/O WST (details in para.4.3.2.1.3 on page 120)
(4) : I/O * BNC Lan Ethernet
(5) : Alarms, housekeeping, and PRx 01 analog measure (details in Tab. 49. on page 165)
(6) : Alarm attending button
(7) : Service channels (details in Tab. 45. on page 161)
(8) : EOW Telephone jack (details in para.4.6.4 on page 160)
(9) : RS232 for F interface (details in Tab. 44. on page 159)
(10) : Lamp test button (details in para.4.3.2.1.4 on page 121)
(11) : Reset button (details in para.4.3.2.1.4 on page 121)
Fig. 45. Auxiliary service unit (SAM 3+1) front view
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
119 / 458
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
N.B.
YELLOW
RED
GREEN
RED

4.3.2.1.2 Leds summary
YELLOW
for these writings, please read WARNING FOR SOME WRITINGS on page 103
for LEDs EOW meaning, refer to para.4.6.4.1 on page 160
for LEDs INDABNATTDNURGURG meaning, refer to para.8.4.1 on page 379
for LED FAIL (card fail) meaning, refer to para.8.7.3.4 on page 392
Fig. 46. SAM boards LEDs position, colour and meaning
4.3.2.1.3 WST connections
WST CH0 I/O
WST CH1 I/O
OUTPUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
INPUT
WST Configuration
WST CH0 I/O usage
WST CH1 I/O usage
NO WST
unused (N.B.)
unused (N.B.)
1 WST protected
unused (N.B.)
WST CH1 protected
2 WST unprotected
WST CH0 unprotected
WST CH1 unprotected
It is suggested to connect each other the Input and Output connectors of any unused WST
channel.
Fig. 47. SAM boards I/O WEST 2 Mbit/s 75 Ohm unbalanced connectors
Please refer to para.4.6.2 on page 158 for interface characteristics.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
120 / 458

4.3.2.1.4 Lamp Test & Reset buttons

With reference to Fig. 45. on page 119, the pushbuttons Lamp Test (10) and Reset (11) allow the following
operations:
Lamp test
Reset
Effect
System lamp test of all the leds (all leds of all units are turned on, with
the exception of SAMs Led CARD FAIL)
EC (Equipment Controller) reset
RC (Radio Controller) reset

N.B. to perform this operation, hold Lamp Test pushed and
contemporarily push Reset
For the meaning of EC and RC, make reference to para.6.2.2.2 on page 265.
4.3.2.1.5 SAM 3+1 Unit hardware presettings
Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the 3+1 AUX. SERVICE & MANAGEMENT unit for the TC and
DipSwitch physical position on the board (see Tab. 80. on page 456).
In the following, only the DipSwitch banks associated to software configurations are taken into
consideration (for other DipSwitch banks and TC meaning, please refer to the above cited documents).
a)
on subunit ESCON (see Fig. 43. on page 118) :

a Dipswitch bank allows to clear (erase) the System Configuration memory. The use of this
dipswitch bank is explained in the Operators Handbook.
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
These dipswitches must be usually in OFF position.
If unproperly set, these dipswitches will reset the FLASH CARD content, and you will loose all the
software herein contained (programs and system configuration data)
b)
on main board SAM 3+1 COMPATIBLE (see Fig. 43. on page 118) :
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
two dipswitches are present, I2 and I3, used to identify the main HW characteristics and equipment
type.
DipSwitches details are hereafter reported in Tab. 30. and Tab. 31. ; remember that 1 value
corresponds to Open or Off while 0 value corresponds to Close or On.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
121 / 458
Before using Tab. 30. or Tab. 31. for configuration setting/change purposes, verify that
the values correspond to those stated in the CT Operators Handbook associated to the
Software Package (SWP) running on your system. In the case of conflict between the
values stated in this manual and those indicated in CT Operators Handbook, these latter
will prevail.
EQTYPE and BKPV (Backplane version) fields

Tab. 30. SAM 3+1 Dipswitch I2
EQTYPE address
BKPV address
fixed
Description
UHRN Urban Haul split mount 3+1

Regenerator
SLOTID field for UHRN

Tab. 31. SAM 3+1 Dipswitch I3
SYSTEM
CONFIG.
N+1
N+0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
IDU
Subrack
SRIDU31
SRIDU40
SLOTID
fixed
WST
(N.B.)
NO
2 UNP
1 PR
NO
2 UNP
1 PR
see para.4.3.2.1.3 on page 120
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
122 / 458

N.B.
4.3.2.2 LOGIC Unit operative information

Refer to:
4.3.2.2.1 LOGIC Unit front view and access points

(2) digit display
for Tx
TX
(3) digit display

for Rx
RX
PRX 23
REM
(1) Red led
(5) Analogic measures
(4) Yellow led
LEGEND:
(1) : Red Led indicating unit failure
(2) and (3) :
1 digit display to indicate the number of the channel protected respectively at Rx and Tx side (N.B.):
0 if RMD0 carries the Occasional traffic
1 2 3 : protection on for RMD1/2/3

(4) : Yellow Led indicating manual operation in progress at Rx side of LOGIC switch (N.B.)
(5) : PRx 2 and 3 analog measure (pinout in Tab. 46. on page 162)
N.B.
In case EPS option is equipped, read also Displays and led on LOGIC unit on page 263.
Fig. 48. LOGIC unit front view
4.3.2.2.2 LOGIC Unit hardware presettings
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the 3+1 SWITCHING LOGIC unit for the TC and DipSwitch
physical position on the board and their meaning (see Tab. 80. on page 456).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
123 / 458
4.3.2.3 RMD and XPIC Units operative information
para.3.2.5 on page 56 for a brief functional description of the units
chapter 6, and in particular para.6.3.2 on page 316 (RMD) and para.6.3.5 on page 324 (XPIC unit),
for the detailed functional description of the units
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following information is given hereafter:
para.4.3.2.3.1 on page 125 describes the unit assembly view and access points, when the XPIC
option is not present
para.4.3.2.3.2 on page 126 describes the unit assembly view and access points, when the XPIC
option is present
para.4.3.2.3.3 and 4.3.2.3.4 on page 127 describes the

RRAMODEM unit and XPIC board respectively.
ED
hardware setting options of
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
124 / 458

Refer to:

4.3.2.3.1 RRA/MODEM Unit (without XPIC option) assembly view and access points
Fig. 49. herebelow shows an example of unit assembly:
with optical module and the relevant protection cap; in the case of electrical module, this protection
cap is not present;
without the XPIC option
RRA/MODEM
basic board
Optical module
RRA/MOD
Front Plate Kit
Protection cap
Fig. 49. RRA/MODEM assembly view (with optical module extracted and without XPIC option)
Fig. 50. herebelow shows the front view of RRA/MODEM board without the XPIC option. With regard to
writing on point (3), please read WARNING FOR SOME WRITINGS on page 103.
(3) IF monitoring point
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(1)
(4) IF in/out
towards ODU
Optical module
or Electrical module
or (shown) Masking Plate Complete
(N.B.1 on page 127)
(6) RT fail
(N.B.2 on page 127)
(5) Internal Bus
(7) RRA/MODEM fail

(red)
Fig. 50. RRA/MODEM unit front view (without XPIC option)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
125 / 458
4.3.2.3.2 RRA/MODEM Unit (with XPIC option) assembly view and access points
IF connection (*)

Fig. 51. herebelow shows the unit assembly with the XPIC option:
(*) make up XPIC cable kit
XPIC Board
RRA/MOD + XPIC
Front Plate Kit
Synchronism connection (*)
Fig. 51. RRA/MODEM with XPIC option

Fig. 52. herebelow shows the front view of RRA/MODEM board in the XPIC configuration. With regard to
writings on points (2) and (3), please read WARNING FOR SOME WRITINGS on page 103.
(3) IF XPIC Output
(2) IF XPIC Input
(4) IF in/out
towards ODU
(1)
Optical module
or Electrical module
or (shown) Masking Plate Complete
(N.B.1 on page 127)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(6) RT fail
(N.B.2 on page 127)
(5) Internal Bus
(7) RRA/MODEM fail

(red)
Fig. 52. RRA/MODEM unit front view (with XPIC)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
126 / 458

N.B.1
On the STM1 Optical/Electrical interface of RRA/MODEM board, the following modules can
be alternatively equipped:
N.B.2
in the case the colocated EPS shelf is not equipped:
STM1 Electrical Module

or:
STM1 Optical Module
in the case the colocated EPS shelf is equipped:
STM1 Electrical Module used to connect the equivalent EPS module on EPS shelf.
The behavior of this led depends on the hardware presetting led onair management (on the
specific RRA/MODEMs subunit) and is summed up in Tab. 32. and Tab. 33. herebelow.
Tab. 32. RT fail led operation when led onair management hardware setting is disabled
N.B.
Used in ETSI market

LED STATUS
MEANING
OFF
It is the nominal status: the ODUCARDFAIL alarm is not active and the
Transceiver is transmitting power toward antenna.
RED
The ODUCARDFAIL alarm is active. The Transceiver is NOT transmitting.
Tab. 33. RT fail led operation when led onair management hardware setting is enabled
N.B.
Used in USA market

LED STATUS
MEANING
GREEN
It is the nominal status: the ODUCARDFAIL alarm is not active and the
Transceiver is transmitting power toward antenna.
OFF
The ODUCARDFAIL alarm is not active. The Transceiver is NOT

transmitting (it is squelched/switched off or, in HST configuration, is insulated
from antenna by HST switch)
RED
The ODUCARDFAIL alarm is active. The Transceiver is NOT transmitting

(it is squelched/switched off or, in HST configuration, is insulated from
antenna by HST switch)
ORANGE
The ODUCARDFAIL alarm is active, but the Transceiver is transmitting

power toward antenna (it means that only the Receiver is faulty)
4.3.2.3.3 RRA/MODEM Unit hardware presettings
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the RRAMODEM unit for the TC and DipSwitch
physical position on the board and their meaning (choosing the used unit type between those
listed in Tab. 80. on page 456). For the meaning of the led onair management setting, refer
to Tab. 32. and Tab. 33. above.
4.3.2.3.4 XPIC Unit hardware presettings
Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the XPIC BOARD unit for the TC and DipSwitch
physical position on the board and their meaning (see Tab. 80. on page 456).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
127 / 458
4.3.2.4 STM1 electrical and optical modules operative information
Tab. 26. on page 115 for physical composition and P/Ns;
chapter 6, and in particular para.6.3.3 on page 322 (electrical module) and para.6.3.4 on page 323
(optical module), for the detailed functional description of the modules.
4.3.2.4.1 STM1 electrical and optical modules views
INPUT
OUTPUT
Case EMC 1.0/2.3 for

ICMI 4.4 MM
Fig. 53. View of STM1 electrical module
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
ALS restart key
ALS restart key

SC/PC
FC/PC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 54. View of STM1 optical module

4.3.2.4.2 STM1 electrical and optical modules hardware presettings
None
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
128 / 458

Refer to:
4.3.2.5 Power Supply Unit operative information

Refer to:
chapter 6, and in particular para.6.4 on page 329, for the detailed functional description of the unit
4.3.2.5.1 Power Supply Unit front view and access points
ON/OFF Switch
VB1
VB2
Correct operation green LED

Fig. 55. Power Supply Unit front view
N.B.
In IDUREG shelf, when a PSU switch is off (or in case of failure of the PSU):
the voltage toward the corresponding RT is switched off
the MODEM part of the corresponding RMD board is switched off
the RRA part of the corresponding RMD board is powered by the twin PSU board (twin
PSU boards are PSU0/1 and PSU2/3 according to Fig. 42. on page 111).
4.3.2.5.2 Power Supply Unit VB1 and VB2 connector pinout

See Tab. 47. on page 162.
4.3.2.5.3 Power Supply Unit hardware presettings
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
None
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
129 / 458
Refer to:
chapter 6, and in particular para.6.5 on page 334, for the detailed functional description of the unit
4.3.2.6.1 Fans Unit assembly
RACK LAMP
CONNECTOR
FANS
Fig. 56. FANS Unit assembly

4.3.2.6.2 Fans Unit + Front plate view and access points
FRONT PLATE
FOR TWO FANS UNITS
FRONT PLATE
FOR ONE FANS UNIT
Rack Lamp
connector
(pinout in Tab. 48.
on page 164)
Unused connector
covered by a protection plug
Front plate,
to be removed to access the
Fans Unit(s) for maintenance
purpose.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 57. Fans Unit + Front plate view

4.3.2.6.3 Fans Unit hardware presettings
None
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
130 / 458

4.3.2.6 Fans Unit operative information

4.3.2.7 CONNECTION TO EPS SUBRACK operative information

Refer to:

This is a passive unit present only when EPS shelf is equipped.
4.3.2.7.1 Connection To EPS Subrack Unit assembly and access points
25pin Female Cannon connector

(see Fig. 127. on page 212 for usage)
Fig. 58. CONNECTION TO EPS SUBRACK Unit assembly
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4.3.2.7.2 Connection To EPS Subrack Unit hardware presettings

None
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
131 / 458
4.4.1 IDU/EPS shelf composition and equipment provisioning

4.4.1.1 IDU/EPS shelf layout
The EPS equipment is composed by one shelf whose logical and physical composition is shown in
Fig. 59. and Fig. 60. herebelow.
slot 1 : EPS 0 (spare)

slot 6 : PSU0
slot 2 : EPS 1
slot 3 : EPS 2
slot 7 : PSU1
slot 4 : EPS 3
slot 5 : CONNECTION TO 3+1 SUBRACK

Fig. 59. UHRN IDU/EPS shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering)
SUBRACK P/N:
REF.[29] in Tab. 21. on page 110
EPS0
EPS1
EPS2
EPS3
PSU0
PSU1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 60. UHRN IDU/EPS shelf board equipment physical view (max equipment)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
132 / 458

4.4 IDU/EPS shelf
4.4.1.2 EPS MODULE and optical modules equipping rules and composition

IDU/EPS subracks EPS MODULE slots occupation is as follows, according to system configuration:
Tab. 34. EPS MODULE slot occupation according to system configuration
EPS MODULE SLOTS USAGE (see Fig. 59. and Fig. 60. above)
CONFIGURATION
slot 1
EPS0
slot 2
EPS1
slot 3
EPS2
slot 4
EPS3
(1+1)
equipped
equipped
not equipped
N.B.
not equipped
N.B.
(2+1)
equipped
equipped
not equipped
N.B.
equipped
(3+1)
equipped
equipped
equipped
equipped
N.B.
EPS MODULE slots, when unused, must be closed by a dummy plate to guarantee EMC
requirements.
Tab. 35. EPS MODULE board equipping rules and composition

POSITION IN IDUEPS SHELF (see Fig. 60. on page 132)
EPS MODULE BOARD
It carries out the following functions:
internal STM1 electrical interface between the EPS shelf and the corresponding
RRA/MODEM unit in the REG shelf
line side STM1 user interface; for this purpose the STM1 electrical interface is
embedded in the unit; a suitable slot is envisaged to house, when necessary, an
optional STM1 optical module or, when unnecessary, a dummy plate (see
Refer to Fig. 61. and Fig. 62. on page 137 for unit assembly drawing and to Fig. 63. on
page 138 for unit front view.
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
EPS MODULE
[30]
EPS
(B)
DUMMY PLATE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When an EPS MODULE unit is not equipped, the corresponding subrack slot must be
closed by a dummy plate to guarantee EMC requirements and equipment correct
ventilation.
ED
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
DUMMY PLATE W20
[31]
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
133 / 458
OPTICAL MODULES
The optical module on EPS MODULE boards is optional (each EPS MODULE has its own
electrical module embedded, as shown in Fig. 61. on page 137 .

Modules in alternative.
(C)
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
S1.1 OPTIC. INTERF.

FC/PC
[23]
IS1.1
S1.1 OPTIC. INTERF.

SC/PC
[24]
IS1.1
DUMMY PLATE
When optical module is not equipped, the module slot must be closed by a dummy plate
to guarantee EMC requirements and equipment correct ventilation (as in Fig. 61. on page
137).
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
MASKING PLATE
COMPLETE
[25]
4.4.1.3 Power Supply Units equipping rules and composition

The PSU units power the IDU/EPS shelf and are both always equipped.
Tab. 37. PSU units equipping rules and composition in EPS shelf
PSU UNIT
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
48 TO 60V DC/DC
CONVERTER
[2]
PSU4860
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(D)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
134 / 458

Tab. 36. Optical Modules on EPS MODULE boards equipping rules and composition
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

4.4.1.4 CONNECTION TO 3+1 SUBRACK Unit equipping rules and composition

The CONNECTION TO 3+1 SUBRACK is always present and houses the connector for plugging the cable
that connects REG and EPS shelves. The unit and the cover plate have individual P/Ns.
Tab. 38. CONNECTION TO 3+1 SUBRACK units equipping rules and composition in EPS shelf
CONNECTION TO 3+1 SUBRACK
(E)
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
CONNECTION TO 3+1
SUBRACK
[34]
FRONT PLATE
COVER FOR CONNECTION
TO 3+1 SUBRACK
ED
[35]
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
135 / 458
4.4.2 IDU/EPS shelf operative information
EPS module
CONNECTION TO 3+1 SUBRACK unit
For the following units (also equipped in the REG shelf):
PSU unit, refer to:
Fig. 55. on page 129 (front view) and Tab. 47. on page 162 (VB1 and VB2 connector pinout).
Moreover, refer to:
para.6.4.2 on page 329, for the detailed functional description of the unit
para.6.4.5 on page 333, for the detailed description of power supply distribution in IDU/EPS
shelf
optical module (optionally equipped on EPS module), refer to:
Tab. 36. on page 134 for physical composition and P/Ns
Fig. 54. on page 128 (I/O connectors).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Moreover, refer to chapter 6, and in particular para.6.3.4 on page 323, for the detailed functional
description of the optical module.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
136 / 458

In this paragraph, only the units specifically developed for the EPS shelf are described in detail:

4.4.2.1 EPS Module operative information

Refer to:
4.4.2.1.1 EPS module assembly views
Fig. 61. and Fig. 62. herebelow show the unit assembly respectively without/with the optional optical
module.
Masking Plate Complete
Lineside STM1 electrical interface
Fig. 61. EPS module assembly (without Optical module)
Optical module
Lineside STM1 optical interface
Protection cap
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 62. EPS module assembly (with Optical module)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
137 / 458
4.4.2.1.2 EPS module assembly views

(2)
(1)
(3) Red led

LEGEND:
(1) : lineside STM1 electrical interface (unused when optical module equipped on EPS module)
(2) : STM1 electrical interface connected to the corresponding RRA/MODEM in REG shelf (N.B.)
(3) : Red Led indicating unit failure
N.B.
Refer to para.5.4.2.2 on page 213 for details regarding the electrical STM1 connection
achieved through connectors (2) .
Fig. 63. EPS module front view (without Optical module)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4.4.2.1.3 EPS module hardware presettings

None
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
138 / 458

4.4.2.2 CONNECTION TO 3+1 SUBRACK unit operative information

Refer to:

4.4.2.2.1 CONNECTION TO 3+1 SUBRACK unit and Front plate assembly and access points
The unit is pluggedin into the backplane connector and is fixed by the front plate by means of two screws.
unit
front plate
25pin Female Cannon connector

(see Fig. 127. on page 212 for usage)
Fig. 64. CONNECTION TO 3+1 SUBRACK assembly and front view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4.4.2.2.2 CONNECTION TO 3+1 SUBRACK unit hardware presettings

None
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
139 / 458
4.5.1 Types of ODU

The OutDooor Unit (ODU) of 9600USY family can be supplied in different basic types (1 or 2 Transceivers)
and polarization configurations, not all of which can be used in UHRN configuration:
Tab. 39. Types of ODU employable in UHRN configuration
NR OF
TR
BASIC TYPE
USABLE IN UHRN
CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURATION
1+0 Compact ODU
Single polar
YES
1+1 ODU
HST (Hot Stand By)
NO
Co Polar:
ODU 1+1/2+0 CP
2
1+1/2+0 ODU
Double Polar:
ODU 1+1/2+0 AP
(note: AP=alternate polar)
Double Polar: XPOL
ODU 1+1/2+0 XPOL
YES
Co Polar:
ODU 1+0 Extendible CP
1
( 2)
1+0 Extendible ODU
Double Polar:
ODU 1+0 Extendible AP
(note: AP=alternate polar)
Dual Polar XPOL:
ODU 1+1/2+0 XPOL subequipped
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
changing in field the infactoryset HST/CP/AP/XPOL configuration into another configuration

is not advisable (would require special skills and instruments).
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
140 / 458

4.5 ODU assembly

4.5.2 ODU 1+0 compact equipping rules

In UHRN environment, up to four ODU 1+0 compact assemblies can be managed according to the
following configuration:
ODU 0:
ODU 1:
ODU 2:
ODU 3:
related to the channel 0

Then each ODU 1+0 compact assembly contains the following units (see Fig. 66. herebelow):
slot 1:
RT assembly plus its own Local Oscillator (LO) module
The same figure shows the association among ODUs RT slots and the RMD boards in IDUREG shelf.
This association is strictly mandatory.
ODU 0
IDUREG
slot 2 : RMD0
slot 3 : RMD1
RT0
CH0
ODU 1
RT0
CH1
ODU 2
slot 5 : RMD2
slot 6 : RMD3
RT0
CH2
ODU 3
RT0
CH3
TX0 plug always present inside RTs of ODU0 and ODU2

(see Fig. 68. on page 147)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 65. ODU 1+0 compact shelves and RTRMD association
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
141 / 458
Tab. 40. ODU 1+0 compact RT usage according to system configuration

IDUREG
ODU
RMD SLOTS USAGE
CONFIGU-
ODU 0
ODU 1
ODU 2
ODU 3
slot 2
RMD0
(CH0)
slot 3
RMD1
(CH1)
slot 5
RMD2
(CH2)
slot 6
RMD3
(CH3)
RT0
(CH0)
RT0
(CH1)
RT0
(CH2)
RT0
(CH3)
(1+0)
not
equip.
RMD
unit
not
equip.
not
equip.
ODU not
equip.
RT
+ LO
ODU not
equip.
ODU not
equip.
(1+1) or
(2+0) or
(1+1 with
Occasional)
RMD
unit
RMD
unit
not
equip.
not
equip.
RT
+ LO
RT
+ LO
ODU not
equip.
ODU not
equip.
(2+1) or
(3+0) or
(2+1 with
Occasional)
RMD
unit
RMD
unit
not
equip.
RMD
unit
RT
+ LO
RT
+ LO
ODU not
equip.
RT
+ LO
(3+1) or
(4+0) or
(3+1 with
Occasional)
RMD
unit
RMD
unit
RMD
unit
RMD
unit
RT
+ LO
RT
+ LO
RT
+ LO
RT
+ LO
RATION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For management purposes, IDU needs to distinguish the various RT interfaced. This addressing
distinction is obtained:
between odd and even ODUs, by means of an address plug, connected to RT0 and RT2 (see
Fig. 68. on page 147)
and inside IDUREG, where the LOGIC unit adds an address bit to distinguish the RTs belonging
to ODU2/3 (that so become RT2 and RT3) from those belonging to ODU0/1 (RT0 and RT1).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
142 / 458

Taking into account the RTRMD association shown in Fig. 65. on page 141 and the RMD equipping rules
depicted in Tab. 24. on page 113, the following Tab. 40. gives the ODU and RT equipping rules according
to system configurations.

4.5.3 ODU 1+1/2+0 equipping rules

In UHRN environment, up to two ODU 1+1/2+0 assemblies can be managed according to the following
configuration:
ODU 0: related to the channels 1 and 0

ODU 1: related to the channels 2 and 3
Then each ODU 1+1/2+0 assembly can contain the following units (see Fig. 66. herebelow):
slot 12:
RT assembly plus its own Local Oscillator (LO) module
The same figure shows the association among ODUs RT slots and the RMD boards in IDUREG shelf.
This association is strictly mandatory.
ODU 0
slot 1: RT0
IDUREG
slot 2 : RMD0
slot 3 : RMD1
CH0
slot 2 : RT1
CH1
slot 5 : RMD2
slot 6 : RMD3
slot 1: RT0
CH2
slot 2 : RT1
CH3
ODU 1
TX0 plug present inside RT0 of ODU0 and ODU1
in Co Polar & Double Polar without XPIC configurations
(see Fig. 71. on page 150 and Fig. 72. on page 151)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 66. ODU 1+1/2+0 shelves and RTRMD association
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
143 / 458
Tab. 41. ODU 1+1/2+0 RT slot occupation according to system configuration
CONFIGU-
IDU
ODU 0
ODU 1
RMD SLOTS USAGE
SLOTS USAGE
SLOTS USAGE
slot 2
RMD0
(CH0)
slot 3
RMD1
(CH1)
slot 5
RMD2
(CH2)
slot 6
RMD3
(CH3)
slot 1
RT0
(CH0)
slot 2
RT1
(CH1)
(1+0)
not
equip.
RMD
unit
not
equip.
not
equip.
not
equip.
RT
+ LO
ODU not
equip.
(1+1) or
(2+0) or
(1+1 with
Occasional)
RMD
unit
RMD
unit
not
equip.
not
equip.
RT
+ LO
RT
+ LO
ODU not
equip.
(2+1) or
(3+0) or
(2+1 with
Occasional)
RMD
unit
RMD
unit
not
equip.
RMD
unit
RT
+ LO
RT
+ LO
not
equip.
RT
+ LO
(3+1) or
(4+0) or
(3+1 with
Occasional)
RMD
unit
RMD
unit
RMD
unit
RMD
unit
RT
+ LO
RT
+ LO
RT
+ LO
RT
+ LO
RATION
slot 1
RT0
(CH2)
slot 2
RT1
(CH3)
Please take note that in subequipped ODU configurations, the equipped RT is always RT1.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For management purposes, IDU needs to distinguish the various RT interfaced. This addressing
distinction is obtained:
inside an ODU, by means of an address plug, connected to RT0 (see Fig. 71. on page 150 and
Fig. 72. on page 151). This plug is not used in XPOL configurations, where this function is exploited
by the XPIC adapter kit (see example in Fig. 73. on page 152)
and inside IDU, where the LOGIC unit adds an address bit to distinguish the RTs belonging to ODU1
(that so become RT2 and RT3) from those belonging to ODU0 (RT0 and RT1).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
144 / 458

Taking into account the RTRMD association shown in Fig. 66. on page 143 and the RMD equipping rules
depicted in Tab. 24. on page 113, the following Tab. 41. gives the ODU and RT equipping rules according
to system configurations.
4.5.4 ODU physical views
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The physical views given in the following are:
for IDU 1+0 compact:
External Interfaces on 1+0 compact ODU, on page 146
1+0 Compact ODU physical view, on page 147
for IDU 1+0 EXP / 1+1 / 2+0:
External Interfaces on ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1 and 2+0 on page 148
1+1 ODU copolar frequency diversityr on page 150
1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar on page 151
1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar XPOL (with XPIC) on page 152
N.B.
ED
The figures are enclosed for general information only and the layout corresponds to the 18 GHz
ODU type. In the ODU TECHNICAL HANDBOOK (REF.[A] on page 412) you can find figures
relevant to all frequencies.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
145 / 458
Fig. 67. herebelow shows the external interfaces as well the external identification mask to distinguish
channels 01.
N.B.
this mask would be present only on ODU cabinets whose delivery will take place in second
mid 2002
this mask has no electronic functions
For PSK (Portable Service Kit) see para.8.3.3 on page 376.
I/O CABLE
IDUODU CONNECTION
FOR TR
I/O CABLE
PSK CONNECTION
FOR TR (WARNING)
ROTATING MASK
To change the shown channel number:
turn off the screw
turn the rotating mask
fix the screw

SCREW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 67. External Interfaces and channel external identification on ODU 1+0 COMPACT
WARNING:
some error burst may be produced at the PSK insertion and disconnection
the PSK insertion should be strictly limited to activation and maintenance activities: leaving it
permanently connected may cause BER curve performance degradation.
For ODU labelling, please refer to para.10.7.1.2 on page 440.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
146 / 458

4.5.4.1 External Interfaces on 1+0 compact ODU
4.5.4.2 1+0 compact ODU physical view

Dimensions 260x90x342 mm.

12
11
6
10
9
13
1
14
15
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 68. ODU 1+0 compact physical view

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10 )
11 )
12 )
13 )
14 )
15 )
Waterresistant cabinet
Transceiver
Local oscillator
Branching 1+0
Antenna circulator
Receiver RF filter
Transmitter RF filter
DC/DC converter (not visible in figure)
IF Transmitter circuits
IF Receiver circuits
RF Transmitter circuits
RF Receiver circuits
Plug (on ODU0 and ODU2 only) for RT address distinction (see Fig. 65. on page 141)
IDUODU I/O cable connection
PSK I/O cable connection
An additional solar shield can be provided as options.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
147 / 458

4.5.4.3 External Interfaces on ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1 and 2+0
I/O CABLE
PSK CONNECTION
FOR TR 0
(WARNING)
I/O CABLE
PSK CONNECTION
FOR TR 1
(WARNING)
I/O CABLE
IDUODU CONNECTION
FOR TR 0
I/O CABLE
IDUODU CONNECTION
FOR TR 1
N.B.
In 1+0 EXP configuration, only TR 1 exists
N.B.
For PSK (Portable Service Kit) see para.8.3.3 on page 376.

Fig. 69. External Interfaces on ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1 and 2+0
WARNING:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For ODU labelling, please refer to para.10.7.1.3 on page 441.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
148 / 458

Fig. 70. herebelow shows the external identification mask to distinguish channels 0123.
N.B.
this mask would be present only on ODU cabinets whose delivery will take place in second mid
2002
N.B.
this mask has no electronic functions.
ROTATING MASK
To change the shown channel number:
turn off the screw
turn the rotating mask
fix the screw
SCREW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 70. Channel external identification on ODU 1+0 EXP, 1+1 and 2+0
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
149 / 458
4.5.4.4 1+1/2+0 ODU copolar frequency diversity physical view

Dimension 268X277X250 mm
5
Fig. 71. 1+1/2+0 ODU Copolar frequency diversity physical view

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Transceiver 0, with its own:
Local oscillator
Receiver and Transmitter RF filters
IF Receiver and Transmitter circuits
DC/DC converter
branching adapter kit

Local oscillator
DC/DC converter

Branching 1+1 with Antenna circulators
Plug (on Transceiver 0 only) for TR0/TR1 address distinction (see Fig. 66. on page 143)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
An additional solar shield can be provided as option.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
150 / 458
4.5.4.5 1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar physical view

Dimension 268x277x250mm.
4
2
(8BW 00560 0003 BDZZQ)
Fig. 72. 1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar physical view

1)
2)
3)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4)
5)
Local oscillator
DC/DC converter

Local oscillator
DC/DC converter

Branching 1+1 with Antenna circulators
Plug (on Transceiver 0 only) for TR0/TR1 address distinction (see Fig. 66. on page 143)
An additional solar shield can be provided as option.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
151 / 458

4.5.4.6 1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar XPOL (with XPIC) physical view
XPIC ODU ADAPTER KIT
1
(8BW 03059 0001 BDZZQ)
Fig. 73. 1+1/2+0 ODU Double Polar XPOL (with XPIC) physical view
1)
2)
RF Switch
Hybrid
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The other parts are as in Fig. 72. on page 151, except plug for TR0/TR1 address distinction, that is not
present in XPOL configuration.
N.B.
ED
The XPIC option cannot be added in the field, but only in factory or in a specialized maintenance
center.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
152 / 458
4.5.5 ODU service replaceable parts

The ODU parts that are usually supplied as spares are:
the Transceivers (RT or TR).

The Transceivers have different P/Ns for the following characteristics:
frequency range (6L, 6U, .....38 GHz)
modulation (128 QAM, 64 QAM)

An example of transceiver unit assembly is shown in Fig. 74. on page 154 (N.B.)
the Local Oscillator modules (LO or OL).

The Local Oscillator modules have different P/Ns for the following characteristics:
frequency range (6L, 6U, .....)
application for the particular channel plan used

There is always one Local Oscillators module inside a transceiver, working for both the Rx section
and the Tx section.
An example of LO module is shown in Fig. 75. on page 155 (N.B.)
The LO position inside the transceiver unit is shown in Fig. 76. on page 155 (N.B.)
and, optionally but recommended, the Adapter Kits.

The Adapter Kit is used to interface the Transceiver to the Branching.
For maintenance purposes, the best solution to speed up the replacement procedure and to minimize
the outofservice time is to have, as spare part, an assembly TR + LO + adapter kits (as depicted
in Fig. 76. on page 155 (N.B.) ) already assembled and pretested at the correct operating
frequency.
The Adapter Kits have different P/Ns for the following characteristics:
frequency range (6L, 6U, .....38 GHz)
N.B.
These figures are examples referred to 9618USY equipment. The ODU TECHNICAL
HANDBOOK (REF.[A] on page 412) gives drawings for all frequencies.
The P/Ns of the pair of Transceivers and Adapter Kits included in an ODU 1+1/2+0 assembly must be
equal.
The P/Ns of the pair of Local Oscillator modules included in an ODU 1+1/2+0 assembly must be:
different from each other, in case of AP/CP configuration
equal, in case of XPOL configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The P/Ns of Transceivers, Local Oscillator modules and Adapter Kits for the various frequencies are given
in the ODU TECHNICAL HANDBOOK (REF.[A] on page 412).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
153 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RF Rx
ED
955.203.363 W
RF Tx
DC/DC CONVERTER
IF Rx
IF Tx
SERVICE UNIT
(411.200.484 HDZZQ_04 1/3)
Fig. 74. Example of Transceiver (1825 GHz)
01
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
154 / 458

AREA FOR
LOCAL OSCILLATOR

(474.230.252 HDZZQ_02)
Fig. 75. Example of Local Oscillator (1338 GHz)

ADAPTER KITS
LOCAL OSCILLATOR
(8BW 00560 0006 BDZZQ_04)
TRANSCEIVER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 76. Example of TransceiverLocal OscillatorAdapter kit ASSEMBLY (1825 GHz)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
155 / 458
4.6 External interfaces
The SDH interfaces (line side) can be electrical or optical and are housed:
in configurations without EPS shelf, on RRA/MODEM units (see (1) in Fig. 52. on page 126).
in configurations with EPS shelf, on EPSMODULE units (see Fig. 61. on page 137 for
embedded electrical interface and Fig. 62. on page 137 for optional optical module interface ).
4.6.1.1 Electrical
Maximum cables number N.1 inputs and N.1 outputs on each RRA/MODEM unit or EPSMODULE
unit. For physical interface see:
Fig. 53. on page 128 (Electrical module on RRA/MODEM unit)
(1) in Fig. 52. on page 126 (electrical interface embedded on EPSMODULE unit)
In both cases, the connector used is Siemens, 1.0/2.3 75ohm male coax, and the main
characteristics are according to ITUT G.703:
Line code
CMI
Impedance
75 Ohm
Level
1 Vpp
Cable equalizer
12.7 dB at78 MHz as f
4.6.1.2 Optical
Maximum fibres number N.1 inputs and N.1 outputs on each RRA /MODEM unit or EPSMODULE
unit. The main characteristics are:
Type of fibre
Single mode, according to ITU TG.652,G653 and G654
Span Length
Depending on fibre type and optical power budget reported
in Tab. 42. on page 157
STM1 type
S1.1 (see Tab. 42. on page 157)
Laser safety
According to ITUT G958 and IEC 8251
Optical Connectors
FCPC, SCPC (interchangeable modules; see Fig. 54. on page
128)
N.B.
Specification of points S and R in Tab. 42. (extracted from Recc. ITUT G.957 (06/99):
For the purposes of this Recommendation, optical fibre line system interfaces can be
represented as shown in Figure 1 (Fig. 77. herebelow). In Figure 1 (Fig. 77. herebelow),
point S is a reference point on the optical fibre just after the transmitter optical connector
(CTX) and point R is a reference point on the optical fibre just before the receiver optical
connector (CRX). Additional connectors at a distribution frame (if used) are considered to
be part of the fibre link and to be located between points S and R. In this Recommendation,
optical parameters are specified for the transmitter at point S, for the receiver at point R,
and for the optical path between points S and R.
Transmitter
connector
Receiver
connector
CTX
CRX
Plant fibre
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Plug
Plug
Transmitter
circuit package
Receiver
circuit package
Fig. 77. Representation of optical line system interface (as Figure 1/G.957)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
156 / 458

4.6.1 SDH line interface
Tab. 42. Parameters specified for STM1 Optical Interfaces

CHARACTERISTICS
UNIT
DIGITAL SIGNAL
Nominal bit rate
VALUES
STM1 according to G.707 and G.958
Kbit/s
155520
Application code (Table 1/G.957)

Operating wavelength range
S1.1
nm
12611360
TRANSMITTER AT REFERENCE
POINT S
Source type
MLM
Spectral characteristics
maximum RMS width
nm
7.7
maximum 20 dB width
nm
minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
Mean launched power

maximum
dBm
minimum
dBm
15
dB
8.2
dB
012
ps/nm
100
Minimum optical return loss of cable

plant at S, including any connectors
dB
NA
Maximum discrete reflectance between

S and R
dB
NA
Minimum extinction ratio

OPTICAL PATH BETWEEN S AND R
Attenuation range
Maximum dispersion
RECEIVER AT REFERENCE POINT R

Type of detector
In Ga As
PIN
Minimum sensitivity (BER 1010)
dBm
28
Minimum overload
dBm
Maximum optical path penalty
dB
Maximum reflectance of receiver

measured at R
dB
14
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.A = not applicable
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
157 / 458
4.6.2 Input / Output WST
WST protected mode:

Maximum cables number: N.1 inputs and N.1 outputs
WST unprotected mode:

Maximum cables number: N.2 inputs and N.2 outputs
The WST access is on SAM board: see (3) in Fig. 45. on page 119.
The standard interface provided on WST protected and unprotected unit is according to Rec. G703:
Type of interface: Electrical according to ITUT Rec. G.703
Bit rate:
2048 Kbit/s 50 ppm
Code:
HDB3
Signal amplitude: 2.37 Vp on 75 Ohm unbalanced

Attenuation:
0 to 6 dB at 1024 Khz with law f
Return loss:
w12 dB 51102 kHz

w18 dB 1022048 kHz
w14 dB 20483072 kHz
Pulse shape:
See ITUT Rec. G.703
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The connector used is Siemens, 1.0/2.3 75ohm male coax (see Fig. 47. on page 120).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
158 / 458

The WST signal is managed on channel 0 and on channel 1 only:
4.6.3 Management Interfaces

I/0 for TMN (QB3) on SAM 3+1 unit:
one BNC connector 10BASE2: see (4) in Fig. 45. on page 119
one RJ45 connector 10BASET: see (2) in Fig. 45. on page 119 and Tab. 43. herebelow
Craft terminal interface (F) on S.A.M 3+1 unit

The connection for F interface (RS232 to local PC) is provided on SC unit through a standard
SUB 9pin female connector: : see (9) in Fig. 45. on page 119
RRCAN / Direct VI Manager interface access on RRA/modem unit

The connection RRCAN interface (RS232 or CAN BUS to local PC) is provided on RJ11
connector: see (5) in Fig. 52. on page 126.
The special cables needed to connect the CRAFT TERMINAL to the system are supplied with the
equipment (pinout in Tab. 44. herebelow).
Tab. 43. RJ45 Connector for 10baseT interface on SAM 3+1 unit
Pin
Signal
TPTXP
TPTXN
TPRXP
4
5
6
TPRXN
7
8
GND
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 44. RS232 for F interface connection table
ED
PAIR
WIRE
RS232
(SAM side)
RJ45
(PC side)
Not used
Not used
White / Blue ring
Not used
Not used
Blue
Not used
Not used
White / Green ring
Green
Not used
Not used
White / Brown ring
Not used
Not used
Brown
COLOR
White / Orange ring

Orange
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
159 / 458
SAM unit provides external access for service channels: see (7) and (8) in Fig. 45. on page 119.
This table sums up the available interfaces:
N.
bit/s
Format
inserted/
extracted
wires
9600
asynchronous
V24/V28)
RSOH/RFCOH
64k
G703
RSOH/RFCOH
64k
V11
RSOH/RFCOH
Speech
Party line
I/O 3dBm
RSOH/RFCOH
Speech
telephonic
RSOH/RFCOH
Connector
SCSI 26 PINS
for pinout
see Tab. 45. on page 161
EOW
jack
4.6.4.1 EOW Channel use

The User can implement two call modes:
selective
activates a twoway speech link between two users
omnibus
activates a oneway link with all users
The User number, within a 10 to 99 range, is software programmable; to make an omnibus call, digit
00.
Front LED indications (see Fig. 45. on page 119 and Fig. 46. on page 120):
EOWf (EOW free, green) on:
EOWb (EOW busy, yellow):
free line
on:
engaged line
flashing:
call received and acknowledged
Keys on telephone handset:

* : forced line release
# : line seizure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Connector SCSI makes two PartyLine (A and B) paths available.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
160 / 458

4.6.4 Service channels
Tab. 45. SAM 3+1 boards Service channels on SCSI 26 pins connector
Pin
Description
Interface
TXA+
64kbit/s data channel output port A
G703
TXA
14
64kbit/s data channel output port A
G703
RXA+
64kbit/s data channel input port A
G703
RXA
15
64kbit/s data channel input port A
G703
TXB+
64kbit/s data channel output port B
G703
TXB
16
64kbit/s data channel output port B
G703
RXB+
64kbit/s data channel input port B
G703
RXB
17
64kbit/s data channel input port B
G703
RXA+VF
Analog party line input path A
voice
RXAVF
18
Analog party line input path A
voice
TXA+VF
Analog party line output path A
voice
TXAVF
19
Analog party line output path A
voice
RXB+VF
Analog party line input path B
voice
RXBVF
20
Analog party line input path B
voice
TXB+VF
Analog party line output path B
voice
TXBVF
21
Analog party line output path B
voice
RX+V11
64kbit/s data channel positive input
V11
RXV11
22
64kbit/s data channel negative input
V11
TX+V11
10
64kbit/s data channel positive output
V11
TXV11
23
64kbit/s data channel negative output
V11
CK+RX
11
Rx clock positive output
V11
CKRX
24
Rx clock negative output
V11
CK+TX
12
Tx clock positive output
V11
CKTX
25
Tx clock negative output
V11
TXSPV
13
9.6 kbit/s data channel input
V24V28
RXSPV
26
9.6 kbit/s data channel output
V24V28
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NET Name
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
161 / 458
One Ntype connector on each RRA/MODEM unit (see (4) in Fig. 52. on page 126) must be
connected to a lightning discharger by means of cable.
The Ntype connector carries +48 DC voltage for ODU power supply.
Do not connect measuring instruments directly.
Lightning discharger is external to the subrack and must be considered as the IDU interface toward
ODU.
Refer to Fig. 69. on page 148 for operative information regarding IF cable connection at ODU side.
4.6.6 Analogic Measures

Rx Power can be monitored by an external analogic measuring instrument/recorder (03 V on 1 KW
load). The access points are:
for Rx 0 and 1 power: pins 39/40 on SAM 3+1 connector (5) in Fig. 45. on page 119
for Rx 2 and 3 power: LOGIC connector (5) in Fig. 48. on page Fig. 48. Pinout in
Tab. 46. herebelow.
Tab. 46. PRx 23 analog measures (on LOGIC unit) connector pinout
PINS
SIGNAL
PRX2
24
5
Rx 2 Power (03 V on 1 KW load for external instrument)

unused
GND
68
9
MEANING
GROUND
unused
PRX3
4.6.7 Power Line Interface

Main power supply connections are provided through 2x3pin subD connectors on Power Supply
units (see para.4.3.2.5 on page 129). The connector pinout is shown in Tab. 47. herebelow.
Nominal voltage is 48 to 60 V DC (accepted 40.5 to 72 V DC).
Tab. 47. Power Supply Unit connector pinout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Pins
Meaning
A1
+BATT
+BATTERY
A2
GND
Ground
A3
BATT
Battery
Service battery connection is provided through the Station Alarms connector located on FANS0 unit
(see Fig. 57. on page 130). The pins used are indicated in Tab. 48. on page 164.
Nominal voltage is 48 to 60 V DC (accepted 40.5 to 72 V DC) or 24 V DC. This choice is done
by hardware setting on SAM 3+1 units main board.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
162 / 458

4.6.5 IF Input / Output
4.6.8 LED meaning summary

Unit
Function
Led color
Mnemonic
IDUREG SHELF
Logic Unit
(Fig. 48. on
page 123)
(1)
Logic UNIT card fail
(4)
One led indicating manual

operation at RX side
Yellow
(2) and (3) Indications of the channel

on protections number (TX and
RX sides)
Two One digit Displays
(7) RRA/MODEM card fail

RRA/MODEM
(Fig. 52. on
page 126)
Red
Multicolor
(see Tab. 32. and
(6) RT fail
Card fail
SAM 3+1
(Fig. 45. on
page 119
and
Fig. 46. on
page 120)
Red
Red
EOW line busy
Yellow
EOW line free
Green
OR of all urgent alarms
Red
URG
OR of all not urgent alarms
Red
NURG
OR of all indication alarms
Yellow
IND
OR of all abnormal conditions
Yellow
ABN
Attended alarm
Yellow
ATTD
IDUEPS SHELF
EPS MODULE
(Fig. 63. on
page 138)
(3) Card fail
Red
IDUREG AND IDUEPS SHELVES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PSU
(Fig. 55. on
page 129)
ED
PSU switch ON
Green
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
163 / 458
Station alarm interface access is provided on FANS Unit 0 located in slot 7 by means of SUBD 9
pins male connector (see para.4.3.2.6 on page 130).
The interface characteristics are the same reported for Summarizing and Housekeeping alarms (see
para.4.6.10 on page 164).
Please refer to para.8.4.4 on page 381 for further information.
Tab. 48. Station Alarms connector pinout
PINS
ALARMS
MEANING
+VSERV
RATTD
Yellow storing LED switch on
RURG
Red Major LED switch on
RNURG
Red Minor LED switch on
VSERV
Service battery
CH
Green LED switch on (buzzer)
TOR
Remote alarm 1 battery failure
GND
GROUND
+Service battery
Alarm storing command
4.6.10 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms

Summarizing and Housekeeping interface access is provided in SAM 3+1 unit. It uses one SCSI
40 pins female connector (see (5) in Fig. 45. on page 119).
The interface characteristics herebelow reported apply both to summarizing alarms and
housekeeping alarms.
The presence of active alarm corresponds to closed relays contact with a common wire available to
the Customer.
Electrical characteristics ( V is voltage between the warm and common wires):
open contact 72 r V r 2V ; I r 0.2mA
closed contact 2 r V r 0V ; I r 50mA

The 8 inputs and 4 outputs dedicated to housekeeping alarms/commands are configurable via SW
as additional summarizing discrete alarms.
Tab. 49. on page 165 shows the connector pinout.
Tab. 50. on page 166 gives the relationship between remote alarms and alarm primitives.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 51. on page 170 gives the relationship between Remote and Station Alarms.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
164 / 458

4.6.9 Station Alarms
Tab. 49. SAM 3+1 boards Alarms, Rx field analog voltage and housekeeping, SCSI 40 pins
connector
Alarm
HK IN 1
HK IN 2
HK IN 3
HK IN 4
HK IN 5
HK IN 6
HK IN 7
HK IN 8
TUP
CH2 aff.
HK OUT 1
HK OUT 2
HK OUT 3
HK OUT 4
Comrele A
URG
NURG
IND
ABN
Comrele B
TORC
TANC
EXT
INT
CH3 aff.
Comrele C
FAN
SERV
RRAMD
TR
HBER
LOGIC
EPS
CH0 aff.
CH1 aff.
SA aff.
TOR
TAND
PRX 1
PRX 0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Description
Housekeeping input
Housekeeping input
Housekeeping input
Housekeeping input
Housekeeping input
Housekeeping input
Housekeeping input
Housekeeping input
ESCON card fail or missing
Alarm related to channel 2
Housekeeping output
Housekeeping output
Housekeeping output
Housekeeping output
Common wire
OR of all Urgent Alarms
OR of all Not Urgent Alarms
OR of all Indicative Alarms
Manual operation in progress
Common wire
OR of power supply alarms
AND of power supply alarms
External alarm (LOS)
OR of all unit local alarms
Common wire
OR of FAN units failure or missing
SAM unit fail
OR of RRA/MODEM units failure or missing
OR of Transceiver units failure
High BER alarm
LOGIC unit failure or missing
OR of EPS0/1/2/3 units failure or missing
Service Affecting
OR of the station batteries failure
AND of the station batteries failure
For summary information refer to:
para.4.6.10 on page 164 (PINS 138)
para.4.6.6 on page 162 (PINS 3940)
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
165 / 458
Tab. 50. Relationship between remote alarms and alarm primitives

Remote Alarm primitives
TOR
VBATT1 failure or VBATT2 failure
TAND
VBATT1 and VBATT2 failure
TUP
ESCON card fail or missing
URG
or of all urgent alarms (severity = Major or Critical)
NURG

Remote Alarm
or of all not urgent alarms (severity= Minor)
IND
or of all indicative alarms (severity = Warning or Indeterminate)
ABN
or of all the abnormal conditions
TORC
or of PSU X (X =0..5) card fail
TANC
(PSU0 card fail and PSU1 card fail) or

(PSU2 card fail and PSU3 card fail) or
(PSU4 card fail and PSU5 card fail)
(note 1)
(note 1)
El./Opt STM1
or of the following alarms:
module fail/missing
STM1 El./Opt. X (X=0..3) module fail
STM1 El./Opt. X (X=0..3) module missing
(note 2)
INT
FANS card fail/

missing

FANS 0, 1 card fail
FANS 0, 1 card missing
SAM card fail
SAM card fail
RRA/MODEM/
XPIC card fail/
missing
or of the following alarms :

RMD X (X=0..3) card fail
RMD X (X=0..3) card missing
MOD X (X=0..3) card fail
DEM X (X=0..3) card fail
XPIC X (X=0..3) card fail
XPIC X (X=0..3) card missing
LOGIC card fail/

missing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
or of all internal alarms :

card fail, card missing,
equipment mismatch, RC unreachable,
battery fail/missing,
LAN alarm,
transmitterFailure, transmitterDegraded
software mismatch, software processing error,
housekeeping alarm, unconfigured equipment

LOGIC card fail
LOGIC card missing
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
166 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Remote Alarm
RT card fail

RT X (X=0..3) card fail
LO X (X=0..3) card fail
TX X (X=0..3) card fail
RX X (X=0..3) card fail
EPS card fail/

missing

X (X=0..3) card fail
X (X=0..3) card missing
HBER
or of highBER of all the channels X (X=0..3)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
167 / 458
CHX_affect
(X = 0..3)

Remote Alarm
Alarms related to channel X and affecting the traffic:

equipment alarms:
RMD X card fail
RMD X card missing
STM1 El./Opt. X card fail
(note 3)
STM1 El./Opt. X card missing
(note 3)
MOD X card fail
DEM X card fail
XPIC X card fail
XPIC X card missing
RT X card fail
LO X card fail
TX X card fail
RX X card fail
PSU X card fail
PSU X card missing
sfwrEnvironmentProblem RMD X, RT X
EPS X card fail
EPS X card missing
communication alarms:
LOS
(STM1 El./Opt. X )
(note 3)
LOS
(EPS (line side) X)
LOS
(EPS (RMD side) X)
LOF
(STM1 El./Opt. X)
transmitterFailure (STM1 Opt. X)
transmitterDegraded (STM1 Opt. X)
LOF
(RMD X)
modulationFail (RMD X)
demodulationFail (RMD X)
demLOS (RMD X)
rxFail
(RT X)
txLOS
(RT X)
txFail
(RT X)
LOF
(RMD X, radioSPITTPBidR1)
HBER
(DEM X)
LBER
(DEM X)
atpcLoop (RMD X)
atpcIdentifierMismatch (RMD X)
demXpicLOS (XPIC X)
incompatibleTxPower
(RT X)
incompatibleFrequency (RT X)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
168 / 458

Remote Alarm
SA
(note 4)

The following alarms are always SA:
STM1 Opt. card fail
STM1 Opt. card missing
LOS
(STM1 Opt./ EPS) (note 5)
LOF
(STM1 El. / Opt.)
EPS card fail
EPS card missing
PSU0 and PSU1 (both referred to EPS) card fail / missing
The following alarms are SA when the EPS interface protection cannot recover the
service (they are always SA if EPS is not supported):
RMD (RRA) card fail
RMD (RRA) card missing
STM1 El. card fail / missing
LOS
(STM1 El.)
The following alarms are SA when RPS protection cannot recover the service (they
are always SA if RPS is not supported ):
DEM card fail
RT card fail
LO card fail
PSU card fail
PSU card missing
RX card fail
HBER (DEM)
LOF
(RMD)
demodulationFail (RMD)
demLOS (RMD)
rxFail
(RX)
LOF
(RMD, radioSPITTPBidR1)
atpcIdentifierMismatch (RMD)
incompatibleFrequency (RT)
incompatibleTxPower (RT)
(note 1) The PSU X (X = 0 .. 3) units are referred to rack IDU (naming: 021X0101, X =
09,10,11,12) and the PSU X (X = 4, 5) units are referred to rack EPS (naming: 011X0101, X = 06,
07); if the EPS interface protection is not present, only the PSU X (X = 0 .. 3) units are considered.
(note 2) If the EPS and the Opt. STM1 module are present, then the OR of the alarms can have up
to 8 alarms (4 electrical and 4 optical modules alarms); in all the other cases, the OR of the alarms can
have up to 4 alarms of the same kind.
(note 3) The alarm can come from one and/or the other module.
(note 4) SA Remote Alarm is related only to alarms affecting to the Rx side.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(note 5) If the EPS card is present, the LOS alarm is referred to line side.
end of Tab. 50.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
169 / 458
Tab. 51. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms

For the alarm meaning refer to Tab. 50. on page 166
Remote Alarm
Consequent Remote
Alarms
Station Alarm
TOR
HW
NURG
SW
TOR
RNURG
HW
TAND
HW
URG
HW
RURG
HW
TUP
HW
URG
INT
HW
RURG
HW
URG
SW
RURG
SW
NURG
SW
RNURG
SW
IND
SW
ABN
SW
ABN
SW
TORC
SW
NURG
INT
SW
RNURG
SW
TANC
HW
URG
INT
HW
RURG
HW
El./Opt. STM1
module fail/missing
SW
URG/NURG/IND
INT (note 1)
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
INT
SW
LOGIC
card fail/missing
SW
URG/NURG/IND
INT
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
FANS
card fail/missing
SW
URG/NURG/IND
INT
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
SAM
card fail
SW
URG/NURG/IND
INT
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
RRA/MODEM/XPIC
card fail/missing
SW
URG/NURG/IND
INT (note 1)
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
RT
card fail
SW
URG/NURG/IND
INT (note 1)
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
HBER
SW
URG/NURG/IND
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
CHX_affect
SW
SA
SW

N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(note 1) A CHX_affect consequent remote alarm is generated according to the channel

affected by the primary alarm.
A SA consequent remote alarm is generated if a primary alarm affects the service.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
170 / 458

5 STATION LAYOUTS
5.1 Introduction
This chapter lists and describes the most common of all the available system layouts envisaged for the
9600USY family in UHRN configuration.
For further possible UHRN layouts, refer to Alcatel organization.
This chapter is organized as follows:
Constraints for UHRN multiple equipping in a rack on page 172
Configurations without EPS
on page 173, including

General notes
on page 173
Equipment provisioning with ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets
on page 174
Equipment provisioning with ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets
on page 174
Heterofrequency CoPolar (CP) and AlternatePolar (AP) configurations
on page 177
XPOL Frequency Reuse configurations
on page 197
Procedures for station layout change
on page 210
Configurations with EPS
on page 211, including

General notes
on page 211
IDU/REG and IDU/EPS shelf interconnections
on page 212
Equipment provisioning with ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets
on page 215
Equipment provisioning with ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets
on page 216
Heterofrequency CoPolar (CP) and AlternatePolar (AP) configurations
on page 217
XPOL Frequency Reuse configurations
on page 226
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
171 / 458
5.2 Constraints for UHRN multiple equipping in a rack

RACK
UHRN n
(with/without EPS)
Distance between shelves
UHRN m
(with/without EPS)
DISTANCE (1 unit=44.45 mm)
N.B.
MINIMUM
SUGGESTED
2 units
3 units
This minimum value is mandatory to N.B.

avoid overtemperature problems.
This value can create possible access
difficulties in installation and
maintenance activities.
N.B.
This value avoids access difficulties in

installation and maintenance activities.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For further details, please refer to UHRN Installation Handbook (REF.[S] on page 415).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
172 / 458

5.3 Configurations without EPS

5.3.1 General notes
For each configuration a station layout and a simple system block diagram are present.
Refer to para.3.3 on page 60 for explanations on Radio configurations at ODU level.
Herebelow general information and warnings for a correct interpretation of such layouts and block
diagrams are given:
a)
The connections that are drawn are:
Electrical STM1 lineside connections

refer to Fig. 53. on page 128 for operative information regarding cable connection (n.b.)
(n.b.) Note on Optical STM1 lineside connections
For STM1 access on RMD unit, drawings show always the STM1 Electrical module. In all
cases, STM1 Optical module can be equipped instead; in this case, for operative
information regarding fiber cable connection, refer to Fig. 54. on page 128.
IDUODU IF connections
for operative information regarding IF cable connection on:
ODU 1+0 COMPACT, please refer to Fig. 67. on page 146
ODU 1+1/2+0, please refer to Fig. 69. on page 148
XPIC crossconnections between RMD units (in XPOL FR configurations)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Warning about interconnection cables drawn in Station Layout figures

They are drawn just to show the endtoend points of each connection and must not be
used for physically settingup the connections, that must be done taking into account the
need of extracting any board without removing cables not strictly relevant to it. Refer to
9600USY/UHRN Installation Handbook (Ref.[S] on page 415) for detailed installation
information like cable P/Ns, connectors, cabling rules, etc.
b)
The connections that are not drawn are relevant to:
WST
Auxiliary channels
Power supply
Please refer to the 9600USY/UHRN Installation Handbook (REF.[S] on page 415) for detailed
connection information like cable P/Ns, connectors, cabling rules, etc.
Summary information on the involved interfaces are given in para.4.6 on page 156.
c)
Legend
AP = Alternate polar
CP = Copolar
XPOL FR = Cross polar frequency reuse
HET = HETero frequency
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
173 / 458
Fig. 78. herebelow and Fig. 79. on page 175 sum up the system provisioning.
With regard to ODU 1+0 expandable configuration, please make reference to considerations pointed out
in para.3.3.2.5 on page 62.
units always equipped
RT0
CH0
F
A
N
S
0
F
A
N
S
1
SAM
RMD0
RMD1
LOGIC
RMD2
RMD3
ODU 0
RT1
CH1
PSU 0
PSU 1
IDU/REG
PSU 2
RT0
CH2
PSU 3
ODU 1
RT1
CH3
IDU/REG
RMD
System
RATION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SAM LOGIC
ODU 1
CH
CH
PSU & FANS
CONFIGU-
growth
ODU 0
PSU
0/1 &
FANS
0
PSU
2/3 &
FANS
1
(CH0)
(CH1)
(CH0)
(CH1)
(1+0)
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
ODU not
equip.
(2+0)
NE
NE
NE
NE
ODU not
equip.
(1+1) or
(1+1 with
Occasional)
NE
NE
NE
ODU not
equip.
(2+1) or
(3+0) or
(2+1 with
Occasional)
NE
NE
(3+1) or
(4+0) or
(3+1 with
Occasional)
E = equipped
NE = not equipped
Fig. 78. UHRN board provisioning (system growth) with ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets and without EPS
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
174 / 458

5.3.2 Equipment provisioning with ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets

RMD0
RMD1
E/O
E/O
IDU/REG
RMD2
RMD3
E/O
E/O
Configurations N+0 and N+1 with occasional

RMD
System
CONFIGU-
growth
RATION
BOARD
E/O
MOD
BOARD
E/O
MOD
BOARD
E/O
MOD
BOARD
E/O
MOD
(1+0)
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
(2+0) or
(1+1 with
Occasional)
NE
NE
NE
NE
(3+0) or
(2+1 with
Occasional)
NE
NE
(4+0) or
(3+1 with
Occasional)
Configurations N+1
RMD
System
CONFIGU-
growth
RATION
BOARD
E/O
MOD
BOARD
E/O
MOD
BOARD
E/O
MOD
BOARD
E/O
MOD
(1+1)
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
(2+1)
NE
NE
NE
(3+1)
NE
E = equipped
NE = not equipped
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 79. UHRN E/O modules provisioning (system growth), without EPS
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
175 / 458
5.3.3 Equipment provisioning with ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets
RT0
CH0
ODU 0
RT0
CH1
ODU 1
RT0
CH2
ODU 2
F
A
N
S
0
F
A
N
S
1
SAM
RMD0
RMD1
LOGIC
RMD2
RMD3
PSU 0
PSU 1

Fig. 80. herebelow and Fig. 79. on page 175 sum up the system provisioning.
IDU/REG
PSU 2
PSU 3
RT0
CH3
ODU 3
IDU/REG
RMD
Sys-
CONFIGU-
tem
RATION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
growth
SAM LOGIC
ODU
PSU & FANS
PSU
0/1 &
FANS
0
PSU
2/3 &
FANS
1
(1+0)
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
(2+0)
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
(1+1) or
(1+1 with
Occasional)
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
(2+1) or
(3+0) or
(2+1 with
Occasional)
NE
NE
(3+1) or
(4+0) or
(3+1 with
Occasional)
E = equipped
NE = not equipped
Fig. 80. UHRN board provisioning (system growth) with ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets, without EPS
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
176 / 458
5.3.4 Heterofrequency CoPolar (CP) and AlternatePolar (AP) configurations

5.3.4.1 Foreword
For the correct interpretation of layouts and block diagrams, refer to para.5.3.1 on page 173.
The configurations described are:
Configurations with ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets

CONFIGURATION
PARAGRAPH
PAGE
5.3.4.2
178
UHRN 1+1 CP/AP
5.3.4.3
180
UHRN 2+0 CP/AP
5.3.4.4
182
UHRN 1+1 with occasional traffic CP/AP
5.3.4.5
184
UHRN 2+1 CP/AP
5.3.4.6
185
UHRN 3+0 CP/AP
5.3.4.7
187
5.3.4.8
189
UHRN 3+1 CP/AP
5.3.4.9
190
UHRN 4+0 CP/AP
5.3.4.10
192
5.3.4.11
194
1 channel
UHRN 1+0 expandable CP/AP
2 channels
3 channels
4 channels
Configurations with ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets

CONFIGURATION
All
PARAGRAPH
PAGE
5.3.4.12
195
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
As specified in other parts of this handbooks, a single UHRN system cannot

accept different types of ODU cabinets (e.g. a mixed configuration with one
1+1/2+0 cabinet and one 1+0 Compact cabinet is not allowed).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
177 / 458
5.3.4.2 UHRN 1+0 expandable CP/AP
RADIO CHANNEL 1
STM1CH1

ODU CP/AP
1+0
extendible
( TR 0 )
TR 1
unused
1
External
Lightning
discharger
EQUIPPED RMD
Fig. 81. UHRN 1+0 CP/AP : station layout
IDU/REG
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
RMD1
ODU CP
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 82. UHRN 1+0 CP : block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
178 / 458

IDU/REG
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
RMD1
ODU AP
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 83. UHRN 1+0 AP : block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
179 / 458
5.3.4.3 UHRN 1+1 CP/AP, without EPS
TR 0
RADIO CHANNELS 0 & 1

(CHANNEL 0 = STANDBY)
STM1CH.1

ODU CP/AP
1+1 / 2+0
TR 1
0
0
1
External
Lightning
dischargers
EQUIPPED RMD
Fig. 84. UHRN 1+1 CP/AP without EPS: station layout
IDU/REG
ODU CP
LOGIC
RMD0
TO/FROM
TRANSCEIVER 0
(STANDBY)
LOGIC
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
RMD1
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 85. UHRN 1+1 CP without EPS : block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
180 / 458

IDU/REG
ODU AP
LOGIC
RMD0
TO/FROM
TRANSCEIVER 0
(STANDBY)
LOGIC
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
RMD1
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 86. UHRN 1+1 AP without EPS : block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
181 / 458
5.3.4.4 UHRN 2+0 CP/AP

ODU CP/AP
1+1 / 2+0

(CHANNEL 0 = STANDBY
or occasional)
STM1CH.1
TR 0
TR 1
STM1CH.0 (in 2+0) or occasional (in 1+1)

0
0
1
External
Lightning
dischargers
EQUIPPED RMD
N.B. the LOGIC unit is mandatory in 1+1 with occasional traffic configuration and is not
necessary in 2+0 configuration
Fig. 87. UHRN 2+0 or 1+1 with occasional traffic CP/AP : station layout
IDU/REG
ODU CP
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH0)
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
RMD1
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
182 / 458

IDU/REG
ODU AP
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH0)
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
RMD1
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
183 / 458
5.3.4.5 UHRN 1+1 with occasional traffic CP/AP, without EPS
IDU/REG

Station layout: see Fig. 87. on page 182.
ODU CP
LOGIC
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
TO/FROM
TRANSCEIVER 0
(stbyoccasional)
LOGIC
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
RMD1
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
Fig. 90. UHRN 1+1 with occasional traffic CP without EPS : block diagram
IDU/REG
ODU AP
LOGIC
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
TO/FROM
TRANSCEIVER 0
(stbyoccasional)
LOGIC
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
RMD1
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 91. UHRN 1+1 with occasional traffic AP without EPS : block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
184 / 458


TR 0
TR 1
0
ODU CP/AP
1+1 / 2+0
ODU
1
ODU CP/AP
1+0
extendible
(TR 0)
RADIO CHANNEL 3
ODU
0
TR 1
STM1CH.3
unused
STM1CH.1
(3)
0
1
3
External
Lightning
dischargers
EQUIPPED RMD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 92. UHRN 2+1 CP/AP without EPS : station layout
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
185 / 458
IDU/REG
RMD0
TO/FROM
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
ODU CP0

LOGIC
TRANSCEIVER 0
(STANDBY)
LOGIC
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
RMD1
ODU CP1
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
TO/FROM
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
LOGIC
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
RMD3
IDU/REG
LOGIC
RMD0
TO/FROM
ODU AP0
TRANSCEIVER 0
(STANDBY)
LOGIC
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
RMD1
ODU AP1
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
TO/FROM
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
LOGIC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
RMD3
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
186 / 458

5.3.4.7 UHRN 3+0 CP/AP
TR 0

or occasional)
TR 1
0
(TR 0)
TR 1
STM1CH.1
unused
ODU CP/AP
1+1 / 2+0
ODU
1
ODU CP/AP
1+0
extendible
RADIO CHANNEL 3
STM1CH.3
ODU
0
(3)
STM1CH.0 (in 3+0)

or occasional (in 2+1)
0
1
3
External
Lightning
dischargers
EQUIPPED RMD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
187 / 458
IDU/REG
ODU CP0
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH0)
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
RMD1
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)

LOGIC
ODU CP1
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
TO/FROM
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
LOGIC
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
RMD3
IDU/REG
LOGIC
ODU AP0
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH0)
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
RMD1
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
ODU AP1
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
TO/FROM
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
LOGIC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
RMD3
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
188 / 458

IDU/REG
LOGIC
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
TO/FROM
ODU CP0
TRANSCEIVER 0
(stbyoccasional)
LOGIC
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
RMD1
ODU CP1
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
TO/FROM
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
LOGIC
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
RMD3
IDU/REG
LOGIC
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
TO/FROM
ODU AP0
TRANSCEIVER 0
(stbyoccasional)
LOGIC
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
RMD1
ODU AP1
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
TO/FROM
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
LOGIC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
RMD3
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
189 / 458
TR 0


2 x (ODU CP/AP 1+1 / 2+0)
ODU
0
TR 1
0
TR 0
ODU
1
TR 1
STM1CH.3
0
(2)
STM1CH.2
1
(3)
STM1CH.1
0
1
2
3
External
Lightning
dischargers
EQUIPPED RMD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 100. UHRN 3+1 CP/AP without EPS : station layout
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
190 / 458

IDU/REG
LOGIC
RMD0
TO/FROM
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 0
(STANDBY)
LOGIC
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.1)
RMD1
TO/FROM
LOGIC
STM1CH.2
EL/OPT
ODU CP0
RMD2
TO/FROM
ODU CP1
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH.2)
LOGIC
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
RMD3
IDU/REG
LOGIC
RMD0
TO/FROM
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 0
(STANDBY)
LOGIC
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.1)
RMD1
TO/FROM
LOGIC
STM1CH.2
EL/OPT
ODU AP0
RMD2
TO/FROM
ODU AP1
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH.2)
LOGIC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
RMD3
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
191 / 458
5.3.4.10 UHRN 4+0 CP/AP
TR 0
or occasional)
TR 1
0
ODU
0
1
TR 0
STM1CH.3
ODU
1
TR 1
STM1CH.2
STM1CH.1

2 x (ODU CP/AP 1+1 / 2+0)
0
(2)
1
(3)
STM1CH.0 (in 4+0)

0
1
2
3
External
Lightning
dischargers
EQUIPPED RMD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
192 / 458

IDU/REG
LOGIC
ODU CP0
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH.0)
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
RMD1
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.1)
TO/FROM
LOGIC
STM1CH.2
EL/OPT
RMD2
TO/FROM
ODU CP1
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH.2)
LOGIC
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
RMD3
IDU/REG
LOGIC
ODU AP0
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH.0)
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
RMD1
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.1)
TO/FROM
LOGIC
STM1CH.2
EL/OPT
RMD2
TO/FROM
ODU AP1
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH.2)
LOGIC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
RMD3
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
193 / 458

IDU/REG
LOGIC
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
ODU CP0
TRANSCEIVER 0
(stbyoccasional)
RMD0
TO/FROM
LOGIC
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.1)
RMD1
TO/FROM
LOGIC
STM1CH.2
EL/OPT
RMD2
TO/FROM
ODU CP1
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH.2)
LOGIC
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
RMD3
IDU/REG
LOGIC
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
TO/FROM
ODU AP0
TRANSCEIVER 0
(stbyoccasional)
LOGIC
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.1)
RMD1
TO/FROM
ODU AP1
LOGIC
STM1CH.2
EL/OPT
RMD2
TO/FROM
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH.2)
LOGIC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
RMD3
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
194 / 458

5.3.4.12 UHRN Double Cabinet configurations, without EPS

As example, the following Fig. 108. and Fig. 109. show respectively the station layout and block diagram
of UHRN in 3+1 configuration using four ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets instead of two ODU 1+1/2+0
cabinets.
4 x (ODU 1+0 COMPACT)
ODU0
RADIO CHANNEL 0 (STANDBY)
TR
ODU1
RADIO CHANNEL 1
TR
ODU2
RADIO CHANNEL 2
TR
ODU3
RADIO CHANNEL 3
TR
STM1CH.3
STM1CH.2
STM1CH.1
0
1
2
3
External
Lightning
dischargers
EQUIPPED RMD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 108. UHRN 3+1 DOUBLE CABINET without EPS : station layout
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
195 / 458
IDU/REG
ODU0

LOGIC
TRANSCEIVER 0
(STANDBY)
RMD0
TO/FROM
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
LOGIC
RMD1
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH1)
TO/FROM
LOGIC
STM1CH.2
EL/OPT
RMD2
ODU2
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH2)
TO/FROM
LOGIC
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
ODU1
RMD3
ODU3
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH3)
Fig. 109. UHRN 3+1 DOUBLE CABINET without EPS : block diagram
Comparing this configuration with the corresponding ones using ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets (para.5.3.4.9 on
page 190), you can see that the IDU parts and the IDUODU interconnections are equal.
The same considerations apply to all configurations depicted in previous paragraphs: you can use the
same station layouts replacing one ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets with two ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets (or one,
if you replace one 1+0/2+0 subequipped ODU cabinet).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Please refer to para.5.3.3 on page 176, for equipment provisioning rules in all configurations using ODU
1+0 COMPACT cabinets.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
196 / 458
5.3.5 XPOL Frequency Reuse configurations

5.3.5.1 Foreword
CONFIGURATION
PARAGRAPH
PAGE
5.3.5.2
198
UHRN 1+1 XPOL FR
5.3.5.3
199
UHRN 2+0 or 1+1 with occasional traffic XPOL FR
5.3.5.4
200
UHRN 2+1 XPOL FR
5.3.5.5
202
5.3.5.6
204
UHRN 3+1 XPOL FR
5.3.5.7
206
5.3.5.8
208
1 channel
UHRN 1+0 expandable XPOL FR
2 channels
3 channels
4 channels
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
The XPOL FR configuration is available:
for all frequency bands
with 128QAM modulation (is not available with 16QAM/32QAM modulation).
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
197 / 458
5.3.5.2 UHRN 1+0 expandable XPOL FR
RADIO CHANNEL 1
STM1CH1

ODU XPOL
1+1 / 2+0
subequipped
(TR 0)
TR 1
unused
1
External
Lightning
discharger
EQUIPPED RMD
Fig. 110. UHRN 1+0 expandable XPOL FR : station layout
IDU/REG
ODU XPOL
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
RMD1
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 111. UHRN 1+0 expandable XPOL FR : block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
198 / 458
5.3.5.3 UHRN 1+1 XPOL FR, without EPS

ODU XPOL
1+1 / 2+0
TR 0

STM1CH.1
TR 1
0
0
1
External
Lightning
dischargers
EQUIPPED RMD
XPIC CROSSCONNECTION
Fig. 112. UHRN 1+1 XPOL FR without EPS : station layout
IDU/REG
ODU XPOL
LOGIC
RMD0
TO/FROM
XPIC CONN.
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 0
(STANDBY)
LOGIC
RMD1
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 113. UHRN 1+1 XPOL FR without EPS : block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
199 / 458
5.3.5.4 UHRN 2+0 or 1+1 with occasional traffic without EPS XPOL FR

ODU XPOL
1+1 / 2+0

STM1CH.1
TR 0
or occasional)
TR 1
STM1CH.0 (in 2+0) or occasional (in 1+1)

0
0
1
External
Lightning
dischargers
EQUIPPED RMD
N.B. the LOGIC unit is mandatory in 1+1 with occasional traffic configuration and is not
necessary in 2+0 configuration
Fig. 114. UHRN 2+0 or 1+1 with occasional traffic without EPS XPOL FR : station layout
IDU/REG
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
ODU XPOL
TRANSCEIVER 0
XPIC CONN.
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
RMD1
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
Fig. 115. UHRN 2+0 XPOL FR : block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
200 / 458
ODU XPOL

IDU/REG
LOGIC
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
TO/FROM
XPIC CONN.
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 0
(stbyoccasional)
LOGIC
RMD1
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 116. UHRN 1+1 with occasional traffic XPOL FR without EPS : block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
201 / 458
TR 0

TR 1
0
RADIO CHANNEL 3
TR 1
STM1CH.1
unused
ODU XPOL
1+1 / 2+0
ODU
1
ODU XPOL
1+1 / 2+0
subequipped
(TR 0)
STM1CH.3
ODU
0
(3)
XPIC
CROSSCONNECTION
0
1
3
External
Lightning
dischargers
EQUIPPED RMD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
202 / 458


IDU/REG
LOGIC
RMD0
XPIC CONN.
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TO/FROM
ODU XPOL0
TRANSCEIVER 0
(STANDBY)
LOGIC
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
RMD1
ODU XPOL1
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
TO/FROM
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
LOGIC
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
RMD3
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
203 / 458
TR 0

or occasional)
ODU
0
TR 1
0
(TR 0)
RADIO CHANNEL 3
ODU
1
STM1CH.3
TR 1
STM1CH.1
unused
STM1CH.0 (in 3+0)

ODU XPOL
1+1 / 2+0
ODU XPOL
1+1 / 2+0
subequipped
(3)
0
1
3
External
Lightning
dischargers
EQUIPPED RMD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
204 / 458

5.3.5.6 UHRN 3+0 or 2+1 with occasional traffic without EPS XPOL FR

IDU/REG
LOGIC
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
ODU XPOL0
TRANSCEIVER 0
XPIC CONN.
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
RMD1
ODU XPOL1
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
TO/FROM
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
LOGIC
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
RMD3
IDU/REG
LOGIC
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
TO/FROM
XPIC CONN.
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
ODU XPOL0
TRANSCEIVER 0
(stbyoccasional)
LOGIC
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
RMD1
ODU XPOL1
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
TO/FROM
EXTENSION
FREE FOR FUTURE
LOGIC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
RMD3
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
Fig. 121. UHRN 2+1 with occasional traffic without EPS XPOL FR : block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
205 / 458

2 x (ODU XPOL 1+1 / 2+0)
TR 0

ODU
0
TR 1
0
TR 0
ODU
1
TR 1
STM1CH.3
0
(2)
STM1CH.2
1
(3)
STM1CH.1
0
1
2
3
External
Lightning
dischargers
XPIC CROSSCONNECTIONS
EQUIPPED RMD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
206 / 458

IDU/REG
LOGIC
RMD0
TO/FROM
XPIC CONN.
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
TO/FROM
LOGIC
RMD2
TO/FROM
XPIC CONN.
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
RMD3
TRANSCEIVER 0
(STANDBY)
LOGIC
RMD1
STM1CH.2
EL/OPT
ODU XPOL0
ODU XPOL1
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH.2)
LOGIC
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
207 / 458
5.3.5.8 UHRN 4+0 or 3+1 with occasional traffic XPOL FR

or occasional)

2 x (ODU XPOL 1+1 / 2+0)
TR 0
ODU
0
TR 1
0
TR 0
STM1CH.3
STM1CH.2
ODU
1
TR 1
0
(2)
STM1CH.1
1
(3)
STM1CH.0 (in 4+0)

0
1
2
3
External
Lightning
dischargers
EQUIPPED RMD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
208 / 458

IDU/REG
LOGIC
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
ODU XPOL0
TRANSCEIVER 0
XPIC CONN.
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
RMD1
TO/FROM
LOGIC
STM1CH.2
EL/OPT
RMD2
TO/FROM
XPIC CONN.
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
ODU XPOL1
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH.2)
LOGIC
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
RMD3
IDU/REG
LOGIC
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
RMD0
XPIC CONN.
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TO/FROM
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH1)
LOGIC
RMD2
TO/FROM
XPIC CONN.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
RMD3
TRANSCEIVER 0
(stbyoccasional)
LOGIC
RMD1
TO/FROM
STM1CH.2
EL/OPT
ODU XPOL0
ODU XPOL1
TRANSCEIVER 0
(CH.2)
LOGIC
TRANSCEIVER 1
(CH.3)
Fig. 126. UHRN 3+1 with occasional traffic without EPS XPOL FR : block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
209 / 458
5.3.6 Procedures for station layout change
1)
2)
3)
equip the additional hardware (see para.5.3.2 on page 174)

set up the possible new connections as indicated in the suitable paragraph of this chapter
configure the new units and connections by Craft Terminal
This operation should not impact the already working connections.

5.3.6.2 Expansion with contemporary N+0 to/from N+1 configuration change
As para.5.3.6.3 herebelow.
5.3.6.3 Configuration change from N+0 to N+1 or viceversa
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
extract the SAM 3+1 Unit

set up the Dipswitch I3 according to Tab. 31. on page 122
equip the additional hardware (see para.5.3.2 on page 174), if necessary
set up the possible new connections as indicated in the suitable paragraph of this chapter
reinsert the SAM 3+1 Unit
by means of the Craft Terminal:
a ) unconfigure all the units that were configured in the old configuration
b ) configure all the units in the new configuration
This operation:
should not impact the already working connections, in the configuration change from N+1 to
N+0
might cause a max 1 min. traffic loss on the occasional traffic channel, in the configuration
change from N+0 to N+1 with occasional.
5.3.6.4 WST configuration change within the same N+0 or N+1 configuration
1)
2)
3)
extract the SAM 3+1 Unit

set up the Dipswitch I3 according to Tab. 31. on page 122
reinsert the SAM 3+1 Unit
This operation should not impact the already working connections.

5.3.6.5 WST configuration change with contemporary N+0 to/from N+1 configuration change
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
As para.5.3.6.3 above.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
210 / 458

5.3.6.1 Expansion within the same N+0 or N+1 configuration
5.4 Configurations with EPS

5.4.1 General notes

For each configuration a station layout and a simple system block diagram are present.
Refer to para.3.3 on page 60 for explanations on Radio configurations at ODU level.
Herebelow general information and warnings for a correct interpretation of such layouts and block
diagrams are given:
a)
IDU/REG and IDU/EPS assembly

The EPS shelf must be always installed under the REG shelf, as depicted in Fig. 127. on page 212;
please refer to 9600USY/UHRN Installation Handbook (Ref.[S] on page 415) for detailed installation
information.
b)
The connections that are drawn are:
Electrical STM1 connections between RMD and EPS units

These connections are represented by a single line; the real connection must be done with a
suitable in/out cable that is described in para.5.4.2.2 on page 213.
Electrical STM1 lineside connections on EPS units

These connections are represented by a single line; refer to Fig. 63. on page 138 for operative
information regarding real cable connection (n.b.)
(n.b.)
Note on Optical STM1 lineside connections
Drawings show always the usage of the STM1 Electrical interface embedded
on EPS unit front panel. In all cases, STM1 Optical module can be optionally
equipped, as depicted in Fig. 62. on page 137; in this case, for operative
information regarding fiber cable connection, refer to Fig. 54. on page 128.
IDUODU IF connections
for operative information regarding IF cable connection on:
ODU 1+0 COMPACT, please refer to Fig. 67. on page 146
ODU 1+1/2+0, please refer to Fig. 69. on page 148
XPIC crossconnections between RMD units (in XPOL FR configurations)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Warning about interconnection cables drawn in Station Layout figures

They are drawn just to show the endtoend points of each connection and must not be
used for physically settingup the connections, that must be done taking into account the
need of extracting any board without removing cables not strictly relevant to it. Refer to
9600USY/UHRN Installation Handbook (Ref.[S] on page 415) for detailed installation
information like cable P/Ns, connectors, cabling rules, etc.
c)
The connections that are not drawn are relevant to:
IDU/REG and IDU/EPS interconnection for logic signals

This interconnection is realized by a special cable; see para.5.4.2.1 on page 212 for details
WST
Auxiliary channels
Power supply
Please refer to the 9600USY/UHRN Installation Handbook (REF.[S] on page 415) for detailed
connection information like cable P/Ns, connectors, cabling rules, etc.
Summary information on the involved interfaces are given in para.4.6 on page 156.
d)
Legend
AP = Alternate polar
CP = Copolar
XPOL FR = Cross polar frequency reuse
HET = HETero frequency
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
211 / 458
Interconnection between IDU/REG and IDU/EPS is achieved through two types of cables:
interconnection for logic signals
interconnection for electrical STM1 signals

5.4.2.1 Interconnection for logic signals
As depicted in following Fig. 127. , one 25 pin cannoncannon malemale cable (N.B.) is used to
interconnect the:
IDU/REG shelfs CONNECTION TO EPS SUBRACK unit (see para.4.3.1.7 on page 117 and
para.4.3.2.7 on page 131)
IDU/EPS shelfs CONNECTION TO 3+1 SUBRACK unit (see para.4.4.1.4 on page 135 and
para.4.4.2.2 on page 139)
N.B.
Pin connection is 1:1 (i.e. pin 1 left connected to pin 1 right, pin 2 left connected to pin 2 right,
etc.). No plug labelling is envisaged.
Details on signals carried through this cable are given in Fig. 170. on page 271.
REG SHELF
EPS SHELF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
suggested cable path
Fig. 127. IDU/REG and IDU/EPS logic signal interconnection
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
212 / 458

5.4.2 IDU/REG and IDU/EPS shelf interconnections

5.4.2.2 Interconnection for electrical STM1 signals

The following Fig. 128. depicts the special cable (*) used to interface the STM1 electrical module placed
on IDU/REG shelfs RRA/MODEM unit n to the IDU/EPS shelfs EPS MODULE unit n.
(*)
for P/N, REF.[32] in Tab. 21. on page 110.
The interconnection is fixed, i.e.:
RRA/MODEM0 with EPS MODULE 0

To avoid problems in installation and maintenance activities, it is suggested, before installation, to put
identification labels, as depicted in Fig. 128. herebelow.
connection to
electrical STM1
module on RMD n
signal flow
RMD n
RMD n
EPS n
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
connection to
RRA/MD interface on
EPSMODULE n
(see (2) in Fig. 63. on page 138)
RMD n
EPS n
signal flow
= 0 to 3
Fig. 128. Cable Kit Extension 1 Channel and suggested labelling
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
213 / 458

Fig. 129. herebelow shows an example of cable suggested labelling and cable usage (this example
depicts the connection between IDU/REG shelfs RRA/MODEM unit 0 to the IDU/EPS shelfs EPS
MODULE unit 0).
RMD 0
RMD 0
EPS 0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RMD 0
EPS 0
Fig. 129. IDU/REG and IDU/EPS electrical STM1 interconnection (example)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
214 / 458

5.4.3 Equipment provisioning with ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets, with EPS

Fig. 130. herebelow sums up the system provisioning.
With regard to ODU 1+0 expandable configuration, please make reference to considerations pointed out
in para.3.3.2.5 on page 62.
RT0
CH0
ODU 0
A
PSU 0
F
A
N
S
0
F
A
N
S
1
SAM
RMD0
RMD1
LOGIC
RMD2
RMD3
RT1
CH1
PSU 1
IDU/REG
PSU 2
RT0
CH2
PSU 3
ODU 1
RT1
CH3
EPS0
EPS1
EPS2
EPS3
PSU 0
IDU/EPS
PSU 1
A= CONNECTION TO EPS SUBRACK

B= CONNECTION TO 3+1 SUBRACK
IDU/REG
IDU/EPS
A
System
growth
CONFIGURATION
&
S
A
M
L
O
G
I
C
RMD (N.B.1)
0
&
1
EPS
MODULE
(N.B.2)
PSU & FANS
PSU PSU
0/1 & 2/3 &
FANS0
FANS1
0
&
1
ODU 0
B&
PSU
0/1
RT
0
&
1
ODU 1
RT
(CH2)
(CH3)
(1+1) or
(1+1 with
Occasional)
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
(2+1) or
(2+1 with
Occasional)
NE
NE
NE
(3+1) or
(3+1 with
Occasional)
ODU not
equip.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
E = equipped
NE = not equipped
N.B.1
In IDU/REG shelf, all provisioned RMD units must be equipped with the Electrical STM1
module.
N.B.2
In IDU/EPS shelf, if STM1 lineside optical interface is required, the relevant EPS module
must be equipped with the Optical STM1 module.
Fig. 130. UHRN board provisioning (system growth) with ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets and with EPS
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
215 / 458
5.4.4 Equipment provisioning with ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets, with EPS
A
PSU 0
F
A
N
S
0
F
A
N
S
1
SAM
RMD0
RMD1
LOGIC
RMD2
RMD3
EPS0
EPS1
EPS2
EPS3
PSU 1
RT0
CH0
ODU 0
RT0
CH1
ODU 1
RT0
CH2
ODU 2
IDU/REG
PSU 2
PSU 3
RT0
CH3
PSU 0
ODU 3
IDU/EPS
PSU 1
A= CONNECTION TO EPS SUBRACK

B= CONNECTION TO 3+1 SUBRACK
IDU/REG
A
System
growth
CONFIGURATION
&
S
A
M
L
O
G
I
C
IDU/EPS
RMD (N.B.1)
PSU & FANS
0
&
1
PSU
0/1
&
PSU
2/3
&
FANS0
FANS1
EPS
MODULE
(N.B.2)
0
&
1
ODU
B&
PSU
0/1
(1+1) or
(1+1 with
Occasional)
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
(2+1) or
(2+1 with
Occasional)
NE
NE
NE
(3+1) or
(3+1 with
Occasional)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
E = equipped
NE = not equipped
N.B.1
In IDU/REG shelf, all provisioned RMD units must be equipped with the Electrical STM1
module.
N.B.2
In IDU/EPS shelf, if STM1 lineside optical interface is required, the relevant EPS module
must be equipped with the Optical STM1 module.
Fig. 131. UHRN board provisioning (system growth) with ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets and with EPS
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
216 / 458

Fig. 131. herebelow sums up the system provisioning.

5.4.5 Heterofrequency CoPolar (CP) and AlternatePolar (AP)

configurations, with EPS
5.4.5.1 Foreword
Configurations with ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets

CONFIGURATION
PARAGRAPH
PAGE
5.4.5.2
218
5.4.5.3
220
5.4.5.4
222
2 channels
UHRN 1+1 with/without occasional traffic CP/AP
3 channels
4 channels
Configurations with ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets

CONFIGURATION
All
PARAGRAPH
PAGE
5.4.5.5
224
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
As specified in other parts of this handbooks, a single UHRN system cannot

accept different types of ODU cabinets (e.g. a mixed configuration with one
1+1/2+0 cabinet and one 1+0 Compact cabinet is not allowed).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
217 / 458
5.4.5.2 UHRN 1+1 with/without occasional traffic CP/AP, with EPS

ODU CP/AP
1+1 / 2+0

or occasional)
EQUIPPED RMD
& EPS
TR 0
TR 1
0
0
1
External
Lightning
dischargers
0
1
STM1CH.1
STM1CH.0 occasional (if necessary)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 132. UHRN 1+1 with/without occasional traffic CP/AP, with EPS : station layout
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
218 / 458

IDU/EPS
IDU/REG
LOGIC
ODU CP
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
(OCC.)
EPS0
RMD0
TO/FROM
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TR 0
(stbyocc.)
LOGIC
EPS1
RMD1
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
TR 1
(CH1)
Fig. 133. UHRN 1+1 with/without occasional traffic CP with EPS : block diagram
IDU/EPS
IDU/REG
LOGIC
ODU AP
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
(OCC.)
EPS0
RMD0
TO/FROM
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TR 0
(stbyocc.)
LOGIC
EPS1
RMD1
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
TR 1
(CH1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 134. UHRN 1+1 with/without occasional traffic AP with EPS : block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
219 / 458
TR 0

or occasional)
TR 1
0
ODU CP/AP
1+1 / 2+0
ODU
1
ODU CP/AP
1+0
extendible
(TR 0)
TR 1
RADIO CHANNEL 3
ODU
0
unused
(3)
EQUIPPED RMD
& EPS
0
1
External
Lightning
dischargers
0
1
3
STM1CH.3
STM1CH.1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
220 / 458


IDU/EPS
IDU/REG
LOGIC
ODU CP0
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
(OCC.)
EPS0
RMD0
TO/FROM
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
LOGIC
EPS1
RMD1
TR 0
(stbyocc.)
TR 1
(CH1)
ODU CP1
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
TO/FROM
LOGIC
EPS3
RMD3
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
TR 1
(CH3)
IDU/EPS
IDU/REG
LOGIC
ODU AP0
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
(OCC.)
EPS0
RMD0
TO/FROM
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
LOGIC
EPS1
RMD1
TR 0
(stbyocc.)
TR 1
(CH1)
ODU AP1
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
TO/FROM
LOGIC
EPS3
RMD3
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
TR 1
(CH3)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
221 / 458
TR 0
or occasional)
TR 1
0

2 x (ODU CP/AP 1+1 / 2+0)
ODU
0
1
TR 0
ODU
1
TR 1
0
(2)
1
(3)
EQUIPPED RMD
& EPS
0
1
2
3
External
Lightning
dischargers
0
1
2
3
STM1CH.3
STM1CH.2
STM1CH.1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
222 / 458

IDU/EPS
IDU/REG
LOGIC
ODU CP0
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
(OCC.)
EPS0
RMD0
TO/FROM
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
LOGIC
EPS1
RMD1
TO/FROM
STM1CH.2
EL/OPT
LOGIC
EPS2
RMD2
TO/FROM
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
LOGIC
EPS3
RMD3
TR 0
(stbyocc.)
TR 1
(CH1)
ODU CP1
TR 0
(CH2)
TR 1
(CH3)
IDU/EPS
IDU/REG
LOGIC
ODU AP0
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
(OCC.)
EPS0
RMD0
TO/FROM
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
LOGIC
EPS1
RMD1
TO/FROM
STM1CH.2
EL/OPT
LOGIC
EPS2
RMD2
TO/FROM
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
LOGIC
EPS3
RMD3
TR 0
(stbyocc.)
TR 1
(CH1)
ODU AP1
TR 0
(CH2)
TR 1
(CH3)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
223 / 458
As example, the following Fig. 141. and Fig. 142. show respectively the station layout and block diagram
of UHRN in 3+1 configuration using four ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets instead of two ODU 1+1/2+0
cabinets.
4 x (ODU 1+0 COMPACT)
ODU0
RADIO CHANNEL 0
(STANDBY or occasional)
TR
ODU1
TR
RADIO CHANNEL 1
ODU2
RADIO CHANNEL 2
TR
ODU3
RADIO CHANNEL 3
TR
EQUIPPED RMD
& EPS
0
1
2
3
External
Lightning
dischargers
0
1
2
3
STM1CH.3
STM1CH.2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM1CH.1
Fig. 141. UHRN 3+1 with/without occasional traffic DOUBLE CABINET with EPS : station layout
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
224 / 458

5.4.5.5 UHRN Double Cabinet configurations, with EPS

IDU/EPS
IDU/REG
LOGIC
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
(OCC.)
EPS0
ODU0
TR 0
(stbyocc.)
RMD0
TO/FROM
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
LOGIC
EPS1
RMD1
TO/FROM
STM1CH.2
EL/OPT
LOGIC
EPS2
RMD2
TO/FROM
LOGIC
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
EPS3
RMD3
ODU1
TR 0
(CH1)
ODU2
TR 0
(CH2)
ODU3
TR 0
(CH3)
Fig. 142. UHRN 3+1 with/without occasional traffic DOUBLE CABINET with EPS : block diagram
Comparing this configuration with the corresponding one using ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets (para.5.4.5.4 on
page 222), you can see that the IDU parts and the IDUODU interconnections are equal.
The same considerations apply to all configurations depicted in previous paragraphs: you can use the
same station layouts replacing one ODU 1+1/2+0 cabinets with two ODU 1+0 COMPACT cabinets (or one,
if you replace one 1+0/2+0 subequipped ODU cabinet).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Please refer to para.5.4.4 on page 216, for equipment provisioning rules in all configurations using ODU
1+0 COMPACT cabinets.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
225 / 458
5.4.6 XPOL Frequency Reuse configurations, with EPS

5.4.6.1 Foreword
CONFIGURATION
PARAGRAPH
PAGE
5.4.6.2
227
5.4.6.3
228
5.4.6.4
230
2 channels
UHRN 1+1 XPOL FR with/without occasional traffic
3 channels
4 channels
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
The XPOL FR configuration is available:
for all frequency bands
with 128QAM modulation (is not available with 16QAM/32QAM modulation).
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
226 / 458

5.4.6.2 UHRN 1+1 XPOL FR with/without occasional traffic, with EPS

ODU XPOL
1+1 / 2+0

EQUIPPED RMD
& EPS
TR 0
or occasional)
TR 1
0
0
1
External
Lightning
dischargers
0
1
STM1CH.1
Fig. 143. UHRN 1+1 XPOL FR with/without occasional traffic, with EPS : station layout
IDU/EPS
IDU/REG
LOGIC
ODU XPOL
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
(OCC.)
EPS0
RMD0
XPIC CONN.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
TO/FROM
TR 0
(stbyocc.)
LOGIC
EPS1
RMD1
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
TR 1
(CH1)
Fig. 144. UHRN 1+1 XPOL FR with/without occasional traffic, with EPS : block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
227 / 458
TR 0

or occasional)
ODU
0
TR 1
0
(TR 0)
unused
EQUIPPED RMD
& EPS
ODU
1
TR 1
RADIO CHANNEL 3
ODU XPOL
1+1 / 2+0
ODU XPOL
1+1 / 2+0
subequipped
(3)
0
1
External
Lightning
dischargers
0
1
3
STM1CH.3
STM1CH.1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
228 / 458


IDU/EPS
IDU/REG
LOGIC
ODU XPOL0
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
(OCC.)
EPS0
RMD0
TO/FROM
XPIC CONN.
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
EPS1
LOGIC
RMD1
TR 0
(stbyocc.)
TR 1
(CH1)
ODU XPOL1
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
EXTENSION
FREE FOR
FUTURE
TO/FROM
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
LOGIC
EPS3
RMD3
TR 1
(CH3)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
229 / 458

or occasional)

2 x (ODU XPOL 1+1 / 2+0)
TR 0
ODU
0
TR 1
0
TR 0
ODU
1
TR 1
0
(2)
1
(3)
EQUIPPED RMD
& EPS
0
1
2
3
External
Lightning
dischargers
0
1
2
3
STM1CH.3
STM1CH.2
STM1CH.1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
230 / 458

IDU/EPS
IDU/REG
LOGIC
ODU XPOL0
STM1CH.0
EL/OPT
(OCC.)
EPS0
RMD0
TO/FROM
XPIC CONN.
STM1CH.1
EL/OPT
EPS1
LOGIC
RMD1
TO/FROM
XPIC CONN.
STM1CH.2
EL/OPT
EPS2
LOGIC
TR 0
(stbyocc.)
TR 1
(CH1)
ODU XPOL1
TR 0
(CH2)
RMD2
TO/FROM
STM1CH.3
EL/OPT
LOGIC
EPS3
RMD3
TR 1
(CH3)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
231 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
232 / 458
6 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

6.1 Introduction
N.B.
In all this chapter, text in Italic (like this) denotes parts of the description that refer to functions:
not yet implemented in the 9600USY/UHRN equipment release (HW and SW) this
handbook refers to
or used in UHR/UHRC configurations, but not used in UHRN configuration.
This chapter gives the deepestlevel description of 9600USY equipment in the UHRN configuration, and
and is organized as follows:
Equipment Control Subsystem

Control Subsystem Architecture

on page 234
This paragraph provides the overall architecture of this subsystem describing the macro
functionalities performed and partitioning these functionalities into hardware and software
components.
Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture

on page 265
This paragraph describes the control subsystem hardware architecture, defines the control
elements, the function partitioning among them and the external and internal interfaces
managed by this subsystem.
Control Subsystem Software Architecture

on page 272
This paragraph describes the software architecture of the equipment control subsystem.
Signal Management
on page 275
This paragraph describes the signal management performed by 9600USY/UHRN equipment.
Remote Inventory subsystem

on page 303
SAM 3+1 unit description

on page 304
Flash Card description

on page 307
LOGIC unit description

on page 308
Baseband subsystem
General and interconnection block diagrams
RMD unit description
STM1 Electrical module description
STM1 Optical module description
XPIC board description
EPS board description

on page 311
on page 316
on page 322
on page 323
on page 324
on page 325
Power supply subsystem
General
Power Supply Unit description
Power supply distribution in IDU/REG shelf
Power supply distribution in ODU assembly
Power supply distribution in IDU/EPS shelf

on page 329
on page 329
on page 330
on page 332
on page 333
FANS subsystem
on page 334
ODU subsystem
Introduction
Transceiver unit description
Local Oscillator description
RF Branching description

on page 335
on page 337
on page 340
on page 341
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
233 / 458
6.2.1 Control Subsystem Architecture

The equipment control subsystem is the full set of software facilities and the full set of hardware items,
devices and connections necessary to support such software.
This paragraph provides the overall architecture of this subsystem describing the macro functionalities
performed and partitioning these functionalities into hardware and software components.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For reader convenience, the content index of this part is detailed herebelow:
Functionalities
on page 235
Atomic Functions
Supervision process
Fault management and performance monitoring process
Fault management process
Performance monitoring process
Test management process

on page 244
on page 237
on page 238
on page 240
Management Functions
Supervision process
Fault management process

on page 246
Performance monitoring process

on page 247
Configuration and provisioning process

on page 249
Software download
on page 249
Security
on page 249
Time stamping
on page 249
Message Communication Functions
Protections
General
Radio Protection (RPS)

Signal protection
on page 251
WST protection
on page 254
Equipment Protection of control subsystem

on page 254
Equipment Protection (EPS)

on page 255
Services protection
on page 264
Network Protections
on page 264
ED
on page 250
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
234 / 458

6.2 Equipment Control Subsystem

6.2.1.1 Functionalities
Digital transmission systems can be broadly described as a collection of multiplexing, framing, transport,
routeing, timing and protection processes. Each of these processes can be decomposed into a collection
of atomic functions. These atomic functions interact with other functionalities, the equipment management
functionalities, which provide the atomic functions with configuration data and monitor the signals they are
processing, providing performance monitoring and alarms conditions to an external management system,
which is able to access to these information by means of communication functions.
Thus, the product functionalities can be broadly described according to the following functional
decomposition (see Fig. 149. herebelow):
Atomic Functions (AF)

Equipment Management Functions (EMF)
Message Communication Functions (MCF)
atomic
function
fault &
performance
monitoring
atomic
function
DCC line side

MCF
EMF
DCCR radio side
atomic
function
configuration &
provisioning
Fig. 149. Functional decomposition

The generic supervision process inside the NE, describes the way in which the occurrence of a
disturbance or fault is analyzed with the purpose of providing an appropriate indication of performance
and/or detected fault condition.
Transmission and equipment supervision processes are concerned with the management of the
transmission resources in the network and they are only interested in the functionality provided by a NE.
They require a functional representation of the NE that is implementation independent.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
From transmission point of view, most atomic functions monitor the signals they are processing for certain
characteristics and provide performance information and/or alarm conditions based on these
characteristics. Therefore, transmission supervision process provides information on the external
interface signals that are processed by an NE.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
235 / 458
The supervision process is performed both in the atomic functions and in the management functions, so
it can be decomposed into major subprocesses: atomic function fault management and performance
monitoring, management function fault management, management function performance monitoring and
radio performance monitoring (see Fig. 150. herebelow). These processes are described in the next
paragraphs.
Atomic function
Fault & Performance
Monitoring process
cZZZ
pZZZ
Management function
process
rpZZZ
Management function
Fault Management
process
Management function
Radio Performance
Monitoring process
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 150. Supervision process decomposition
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
236 / 458

Any equipment fault is represented by the unavailability of the affected functions because the transmission
management has no knowledge of the equipment as such. Equipment supervision process is concerned
with the fault localization and repair of the equipment itself. It does not require a knowledge of the
transmission network.
6.2.1.2 Atomic Functions

6.2.1.2.1 Supervision process

6.2.1.2.1.1 Fault management and performance monitoring process
The following Fig. 151. shows the supervision process inside the atomic functions. The anomalies
integration, consequent action control and defects correlations functions are components of the fault
management process and are performed both in the trail termination function and in trail adaptation
function. The performance monitoring primitives processing function represent the performance
monitoring process and is performed only inside the trail termination function.
The output signals cZZZ are the input signals for the management function fault management process,
while the output signals pZZZ are the input signals for the management function performance monitoring
process.
Anomalies
Defects
Near end
Anomalies
Consequent
Actions
aZZZ
Anomalies
Integration
Consequent
Actions
Control
Near end
defects
dZZZ
Perf. Mon.
Primitives
Processing
1 second primitives
pZZZ/rpZZZ
Fault Cause
cZZZ
Defects
Correlation
report options
enable/disable
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 151. Supervision process within atomic functions
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
237 / 458
Anomalies integration (f1)

Anomalies integration (or defect filter) provides a persistency check on the detected anomalies while
monitoring the data stream. When passed the defect is being detected.
Two class of defects are reported to the defect correlation for further processing: transmission and
equipment defects. Equipment defects (hardware fault) with signal transfer interruption will be
reported per replaceable unit. These defects will cause a performance primitive N_DS (see below)
activation if equipment protection (EPS) is not available.
This function is performed by HW.
Consequent action control (f2)

This process provides the generation and the control of action consequent to detected defects. The
consequent action control process for each specific atomic function is described in the related
sections.
This function is performed by HW.
Defects correlation (f3)

Defect correlation process provides correlation to reduce the amount of information offered to the
EMF. It determines, from a set of activated defects, which fault is present.
This function is performed by SW.
These processes are summarized, for each atomic function, in Tab. 52. on page 239.
In order to simplify the reading of this table, it could be useful to remember the meaning of the RSPI
functional block (see ITUR 750 and ETS 300 635). It represents the radio frequency signal conversion
into an internal logic level STM1 signal, and viceversa. It contains the following radio functions (see
Fig. 152. below):
Modulation and TX functions in the Transmit side
Demodulation and RX functions in the Receive side
rxLOS rxFail
Radio side
demLOS
demFail
Receive
function
Demodulation
function
Transmit
function
Modulation
function
txFail txLOS
modFail
modLOS
Fig. 152. RSPI functional decomposition
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
If it is not possible to distinguish between loss of signal and internal failure for a given subfunction with a
sufficient degree of confidence, the minimal set of defect should be txFail, modFail, rxFail and demFail.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
238 / 458

6.2.1.2.1.2 Fault management process

Tab. 52. Fault management process

Functional
Blocks
Defect
Consequent
Action
Transmit Degraded
not Transmit Fail
Transmit Degraded
Transmit Fail
Transmit Fail
SPI source
(electrical)
SPI sink
(electrical/optical)
Loss of Signal
AIS
Loss Of Signal
Loss of Frame
AIS
not Loss of Signal
Loss Of Frame
SPI source
(optical)
RST sink
(line side)
Trace Identifier
Mismatch
AIS
not (Loss of Signal or Trace Identifier

Loss of Frame)
Mismatch
RST sink
(radio side)
Trace Identifier
Mismatch
AIS
(1)
Trace Identifier
Mismatch
RSPI RFCOH
source
RSPI RFCOH
sink
Loss of Frame
AIS
not (rxLOS or rxFail Loss Of Frame

or
demLOS
or
demFail)
Radio Channel
Identifier Mismatch
AIS
not (rxLOS or rxFail Radio Channel

or demLOS
Identifier Mismatch
or demFail
or Loss of Frame)
RSPI sink
(1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fault Causes
RST source
RSPI source
(2)
Defect
Correlations
txLOS
txLOS
txFail
not txLOS (2)
txFail
modFail
not (txLOS or txFail ) modFail

(2)
rxLOS
AIS
rxLOS
rxFail
AIS
not rxLOS (2)
rxFail
demLOS
AIS
not (rxLOS or rxFail)

(2)
demLOS
demFail
AIS
Not (rxLOS or rxFail demFail

or demLOS) (2)
This defect correlation is configuration dependent:
N+0: not (rxLOS or rxFail or demLOS or demFail or Loss of Frame)
N+1: not (rxLOS or rxFail or demLOS or demFail or Loss of Frame or Radio Channel Identifier
Mismatch). These defects are those generated by the channel currently working (RPS
protection), the same defects generated by the channel currently in standby state are not
considered in this defect correlation procedure.
This defect correlation is different from the one reported in draft MI/TM4048 (stable part)
In unbalanced configurations, defects coming from the unbalanced channels and generated from the not
working function (Rx or Tx) must be inhibited.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
239 / 458
The requirements for the performance monitoring is to provide both performance monitoring quality of
service (SDH regenerator section quality of service and typical radio sections quality of service) and
performance monitoring of radio specific parameters.
a)
Sections quality monitoring

The performance monitoring of SDH regenerator section (line side) must be consistent with the
performance monitoring of the remaining part of the SDH network ( e.g. optical link ). Methodology
used to provide performance monitoring are defined in DEN/TM 2246, ETS 300 417 series and
ITUT rec. G.783, G.784 and G.829. The evaluations on line side signal is given by means of B1
according to the standard methodology.
ADM
.......
MST
UHRx
RST
SPI
RST
SPI
.. .....
Regenerator Section
Fig. 153. Regenerator section

Two different radio sections must be monitored (see Fig. 154. below):
a)
b)
Hop Section: the section between two radio stations inside the protection section. Due to
the RPS location it is not possible to perform the monitoring of the hop section by means
of standard methodologies. It must be provided in a proprietary way by means of Forward
Error Correction.
Link Section: the section identifying the protected section (the section outside the radio
protection switching). The performance monitoring of the radio link section may be
performed by using B1 bytes at each side of the section. Methodology used to provide this
performance monitoring are defined in DEN/TM 2246, ETS 300 417 series and ITUT rec.
G.783, G.784 and G.829.
UHRx
...
RST
RPS
RFCOH
UHRx
RSPI
RSPI
RFCOH
RPS
RST
...
Radio HOP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Radio LINK
Fig. 154. Radio sections
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
240 / 458

6.2.1.2.1.3 Performance monitoring process
b)
Radio specific parameter monitoring

Radio specific performance monitoring deals with monitoring of the radio specific functional blocks
RSPI and RPS. The parameters provided by this PM is used in close conjunction with the ordinary
ones related to quality transmission.
The global performance monitoring process performed in the UHRx atomic functions is described
in the following Fig. 155. This process is completely applicable to the UHM equipment (equipped in
WMSN configuration). In this case the PM related to the functional blocks performed by the
WADM/WLT (i.e. at multiplex section level by using B2 bytes) are added.
to EMF
to EMF
RLS1
One second
primitives
TLS1
RLS2
FSRD
PSAD
NDS
NEBC
OFS
One second filter
Performance PSA
primitives
PSR
RPS
FEC
RL
TL
Defect
EB
RSPI
OOF
RST
Fig. 155. PM inside atomic functions
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The one second primitives processing performs an integration of reported anomalies and defects by
counting them during a one second interval. At the end of each one second interval the contents of
the counters is made available to the performance monitoring process within the EMF for further
processing. Hereafter these performance primitives are described:
ED
Near end Errored Block Count (N_EBC) (f11)

This primitive counts, every second, the number of errored nearend blocks within that second.
A block is errored if one or more EDC violations are detected.
Near end defect second determination process (N_DS) (f12)

Every second with at least one occurrence of TSF consequent action (LOS, LOF, TIM ....) or
equipment defect is indicated as a near end defect second.
Out of Frame Second (OFS)

A OFS is a second in which the frame alignment process was in the OOF state for at least a part
of that second.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
241 / 458
Received Level Threshold Second (RLTS)

A Received Level Second is generated if in one second period the detected RL is below a
predefined threshold. The threshold value is also expressed in minus dBm. At least two RLS
events are required corresponding to two different threshold values (TBD).
Transmitted Level Threshold Second (TLTS)

A Transmitted Level Second is generated if in one second period the detected TL is greater than
a predefined threshold. The threshold value is also expressed in dB. One additional TLTS
corresponding to a different threshold is optional (TBD).
This processing is performed only if ATPC functionality is available.
Protection Switch Actual Duration (PSAD)

Protection Switch Actual Duration represents one second period in which a channel is in the
switched status for at least a fraction of that second. This event is generated only for automatic
switches.
This event is defined for any channel involved in the protection scheme, both protected and
protecting channel, for protected channel this means that the associated traffic is carried by the
protecting channel, for the protecting channel that it is carrying traffic from a protected channel.
TBD in case of 1+1 non revertive mode (protected and protecting).
Failed Switch Request Duration (FSRD)

A Failed Switch Request Duration represents one second period in which at least for a fraction
of that second, an automatic switch request is detected active on the associated channel while
it is carrying regular traffic and the request cannot be completed. This event is required only
for working channels.
Hereafter the performance primitives that dont require one second filter are described:
Protection Switch Actual Count (PSAC)

Protection Switch Actual Count represents the number of protection switch actual occurrences
in one second. This counter is defined for any protected (working) or protecting (standby)
channel involved in the protection scheme (1+1, N+1, N+2). In case of protecting channel this
counter represents the number of any actual switch from any protected channel to this channel.
Failed Switch Request Count (FSRC)

Failed Switch Request Count represents the number of occurrences in one second of the
following events:
a protection switch request is activated on a working channel and the protecting channels
are not available
a working channel is restored from a protecting channel while the request is still active on
that channel.
This event must be generated only on protected channel. It must be generated in all the
protection scheme. The activation of a switch criterion on a given channel doesnt increment
the counter if another activation criterion is already present on that channel.
The one second primitives processing is performed by SW.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following Tab. 53. reports, for each atomic function, the entity monitored by the performance
primitives and the one second primitives provided to EMF for further processing.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
242 / 458


Tab. 53. Entities monitored by the performance monitoring primitives

Functional
Block
SPI source
RST source
(line and radio side)
SPI sink
RST sink
(line side)
RST sink
(radio side)
Performance
Primitives
Monitored Entity
One Second
Primitives
Frame Alignment
Out Of Frame
OFS
SDH RS
Errored Block
N_EBC
N_DS
Radio Link Section
Transm. Def. => LOS,

LOF,
TIM)
Eqpt Def.
=> EQ
Errored Block
N_EBC
Transm.
(1)
Def.
RSPI source
Transmitted level
Def.
=> N_DS
demLOS,
LOF,
RCIM,
TIM
Eqpt
=> EQ
TL > Thres. 3
TLTS3
TL > Thres. 4 (opt.)
TLTS4
RSPI RFCOH sink
Frame Alignment
Out Of Frame
OFS
RSPI sink
Received level
RL < Thres. 1
RLTS1
RL < Thres. 2
RLTS2
RL < Thres. N (opt.)
RLTSN
FEC
N_EBC
Radio Hop (2)
Transm. Def. => rxLOS, N_DS

rxFail,
demLOS,
demFail,
LOF,
RCIM
Eqpt Def. => EQ
RPS
Protection switch actual PSA
PSAC
PSAD
Protection switch failed
FSRC
FSRD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(1)
(2)
ED
The transmission performance primitives are configuration dependent:
N+0: demLOS, LOF, TIM
N+1: demLOS, LOF, RCIM, TIM. The demLOS, LOF, RCIM defects are those generated by the
channel currently working (RPS protection), the same defects generated by the channel
currently in standby state are not considered as performance primitives.
Radio Hop performance monitoring hasnt be provided in N+0 configurations.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
243 / 458
In UHRx NEs line and internal loopbacks can be performed at different levels, as described in para.3.4.6
on page 80.
The signal that is sent after the loopback can be an AIS (loop and AIS) or the same signal as it was received
(loop and continue).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Test process is performed by HW (according to software control).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
244 / 458

6.2.1.2.2 Test management process

6.2.1.3 Management Functions

The management functions are handled by means of synchronous equipment management function block
described in the following figure. It provides the means through which the synchronous network element
function is managed by an internal or external manager.
SEMF
fault &
PM
Supervision
Process
AFs
NER
MCF
MAF
configuration &
provisioning
Fig. 156. Equipment management function

The SEMF interacts with the atomic functions by exchanging information across the MP reference points.
This information flow is related to configuration and provisioning data and to anomalies and defects
detected in the atomic functions. The EMF contains a number of filters that provide supervision process
by means of a data reduction mechanism on the information received across the MP reference points. The
filters outputs are available to the management application functions (MAF), via the network element
resources (NER). The NER provide event processing and data storage, while the MAF process the
information provide to and by the NER. The MAF represents the information as managed object according
to the object oriented approach.
The MAF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into object oriented
messages for transmission on DCCR channel and/or on Q interface. It also converts object oriented
messages coming from external manager into internal specific messages for AF configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The information to and from MAF is provide by means of the message communication function (MCF).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
245 / 458
6.2.1.3.1 Supervision process

6.2.1.3.1.1 Fault management process

The following Fig. 157. shows the subprocesses composing the fault management process.
Unit
Alarms
Alarms
Logging
Fault Cause
Fault Cause
Severity
Persistency
Assignment
Alarms
Reporting
MCF
Station
Alarms
Fig. 157. Fault management inside management function
Fault cause persistency (f4)

The equipment management function performs a persistency check on the fault causes before
generating an alarm.
> Number of seconds for declaring and clearing the failure TBD.
EMF fault management severity assignment
EMF fault management logging
EMF fault management reporting
Unit alarms generation (f5)
Station alarms generation (f7)

They represent a synthesis of alarm with the purpose to provide an audible and visual indication to
the station operator.
All the equipment defects (including the ASICs faults) must be reported per replaceable unit. If a
replaceable unit is reported as being faulty, all the signals processed by this unit are assumed to be
interrupted. The atomic function performed by this unit will represent this situation activating the
performance primitive Defect Second (DS).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All these processes are performed by SW.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
246 / 458

6.2.1.3.1.2 Performance monitoring process

The one second primitives related to the SDH regenerator section quality of service and typical radio
section quality of service must to be processed to determine the performance events (ES, SES, BBE). This
process is explained in the following Fig. 158.
Monitored
Second
Defect ?
(p_DS)
N
N
Anomalies?
(p_EBC >0)
Y
EB >=2400 ?
N
N
Available
State ?
Y
Available
State ?
ES = ES +1
BBE = BBE + EB
SES = SES +1
Data
Collection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 158. Performance events generation process
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
247 / 458
The following Fig. 159. shows the PM process inside the management functions.
Performance Reporting
Performance History
Information

QOS Alarm
Threshold crossing
control
Performance data collection
Performance Count Inhibition
Performance Events
SES
BBE
ES
Event processing
RPSI, RPS one second

performance primitives
OFS
NEBC
NDS
Fig. 159. PM inside management functions
EMF performance monitoring event processing (PM filter: f13, f14, f15, f16)
EMF performance count inhibition
EMF performance monitoring data collection (f31)

One second performance events are collected into current registers (15minutes and 24 hours).
Notice that no processing are necessary on RSPI and RPS one second performance primitives to
generate performance events.
EMF performance monitoring recent registers history management (f31)

At least 16 recent registers are required for 15 minutes and 1 for 24 hours.
EMF performance monitoring reporting management (f32)
EMF performance monitoring threshold crossing check management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All these functionalities are, of course, performed by SW.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
248 / 458

6.2.1.3.2 Configuration and provisioning process

The information flow over the MP reference points related to configuration and provisioning data is
described in details for each atomic function in ETS 300 417 series and in G.783. It is to be noted the
necessity to provide to the RFCOH atomic functions with the following information:
the radio channel identifier expected value (to be compared with the one received on radio side,
functionality performed sink side)
the radio channel identifier value to be inserted in frame (functionality performed source side)
This information flow refers both to configuration and provisioning data passed to the atomic functions and
to status reports coming from the atomic function as response to a request from SEMF.
The channel number associated to each RT position and the definition of which positions assume
the spare rule in the radio protection scheme (RPS) must be configured by ECT operator.
This functionality is completely performed by software.
6.2.1.3.3 Software download
Software download process (local and remote) has the same feature already implemented for new
generation of the Alcatel equipment. In synthesis:
this process is hitless and causes no loss of control functionality when in progress
a roll back to previous release is available when problems arises with the new software version.
6.2.1.3.4 Security
6.2.1.3.5 Time stamping
Events are time stamped with the resolution of one second (according to G.784).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
249 / 458
This function provides facilities for the transport of the TMN messages. It receives and buffers messages
from the DCC, Q and F interfaces and from EMF. Messages not addressed to the local site are relayed
to one or more outgoing DCCs in accordance with the local routing procedures and/or to Q interface (see
the following figure). In this way the TMN can be provided with a direct logical link to any SDH equipment
via a single Q interface and the interconnecting DCCs.
MCF is associated with all atomic functions having a physical interface.
NE 1
AF
NE 2
DCC
DCC
AF
NE 3
DCC
DCC
AF
EMF
EMF
EMF
MCF
MCF
MCF
Q
TMN
Fig. 160. DCC routing

Q interface
When the access to the TMN is provided by the Q interface, it will be conform to the ITUT G.773.
QB3 protocol stack
F interface
F protocol stack
DCC interface
Only DCCR are managed in the MCF in case of UHRx (line and radio side). DCCR and DCCM are
managed, line side, in case of WADM/WLT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
DCC protocol stack.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
250 / 458

6.2.1.4 Message Communication Functions
6.2.1.5 Protections

6.2.1.5.1 General
Several types of protections are envisaged in UHRN equipment. They can be categorized into the
following classes:
trail protection (radio protection);

equipment protection;
services protection;
network protection.
The protection types can be characterized by the following parameters:
protection architectures (in general: 1+1 or M+N, also named M:N )

operation type (revertive, notrevertive)
protection switch requests
Hereafter this parameters are described only for Radio protection, in case of equipment protection similar
considerations can be applied.
6.2.1.5.2 Radio Protection (RPS)
Two kinds of Radio Protections can be distinguished:
Signal protection
WST protection
6.2.1.5.2.1 Signal protection

Radio Protection is a trail protection. It is used to provide protection for a working channel. Generally, this
function provides N protection channels for M signals against trail associated failures, both for
hardware failure and temporary signal degradation or losses due to propagation effects (e.g. rain or
multipath phenomena). The signal on the working channel is protected. This type of protection is
performed by switching a working channel to a protection section when the working section fails or when
its performance falls below the required level. A RPS function is used to perform the switching between
the protection and working section. The status of the sections is made available to the RPS function to
allow it to decide when an automatic switch should be performed.
[1]
Protection architectures
UHRN equipment supports the M+N protection architecture.
In UHRN environment, the 1+1 protection architecture must be considered a M+N subcase (in
other systems the 1+1 and M+N protection architecture has some different behavior details).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The M+N Protection Switch Architecture is shown in Fig. 161. on page 252.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
251 / 458
Protection
Section
RFCOH
RSPI
..
..
..
.
.
.
RSPI
.
.
.
RFCOH
RST

RST
.
.
.
.
.
.
Working
Section
RST
RFCOH
RSPI
RSPI
RFCOH
NE A
RST
NE B
Only present if extra (occasional) traffic is supported.
Fig. 161. M+N Protection Switch Architecture

M+N protection architecture is characterized by the detection of failure events by the RSPI function;
and the resultant reconfiguration uses the protection switching functions that are in the RPS.
The UHRNs M+N protection architecture has M ( M 3 ) working (protected) trails supporting a
normal traffic signal and N (=1) protecting trail that may support the normal signal (if a protection
switch is active) or an extra traffic signal or a null signal (if no protection switch is active).
In UHRN, as shown in Fig. 10. on page 53, channel 0 is always the protecting trail.
At the source end, when a defect condition is detected on a working trail, or under the effect of
appropriate external commands, the transported signal is routed over the protection trail and the
possible extra traffic is lost. At the sink end, the signal from this protection trail is selected instead.
In M+N architecture dual ended switching is necessary. The traffic signal is switched from the active
to the protection trail at both ends of the protection span.
Dualended switching requires a communication channel between the two end of the protection trail.
This channel is called RAPS (Radio Automatic Protection Switching) or DSI channel. RAPS provides
information regarding the activation of switching procedure or about information on the channel
status that have to be shared at both ends of the connection.
Under dualended switching protocol, switching at only one end is not allowed. The two ends have
to communicate each other to synchronize the transfer of the traffic signal (service). If, at one end,
a switching criterion is detected, with a certain priority, a parallelizing request for the involved traffic
signal is sent to the remote end. When the positive acknowledge is received, the switching is
performed.
[2]
Operation Type
Speaking in general, operation type may be Revertive or Notrevertive.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
M+N architecture is always revertive (let us remind that, in UHRN environment, the 1+1 configuration
is a M+N subcase, thus it is revertive, too). In revertive mode of operation, the working channel is
switched back to the working section when the working section has recovered from failure or when
a switch command is released. In nonrevertive mode of operation, the switch is maintained even
after recovery from failure or release of a switch command.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
252 / 458
[3]
Switching Initiation Criteria Priority Management

When more than one switch request are present, the highest priority is served. Refer to the list given
in the following Tab. 54. This information cannot be set up by the management system.
Tab. 54. Switching Initiation Criteria Priority
Priority
Radio Protection Switch Request
Lockout
Forced Switch
AutoSwitch Signal Fail (SF)
AutoSwitch High Bit Error Rate (HBER)
AutoSwitch Low Bit Error Rate (LBER or EWH)
AutoSwitch Early Warning (EW or EWL)
Manual Switch
Wait To Restore
Do Not Revert [1]
10
Exercise [1]
11
No Request
N.B.
[1] Do Not Revert and Exercise Request have been listed in this order because an
exercise request can only be performed when the protection channel is not in use.
Another priority criteria is associated to each channel. This information is used to select the channel
of highest priority when different channels have the same switch request. This priority may be set up
by the management system.
Lockout, forced and manual switch, exercise are external requests (from management system). In
the following some of these RPS requests are explained.
Lockout
The lockout RPS request is applicable to a working and to a protection trail, in both cases it
excludes one trail (working or protecting) from protection schema. In fact it prevents a working
trail from being protected and it prevents a protection trail from being used for protection.
Exercise
Exercising the RPS is done in order to detect silent failures on the RPS. The exercise operation
performs all the steps to perform a switch except for the actual switch.
Two types of exercise may be used:
a)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
b)
ED
Single exercise: the operator send one command to perform a single exercise. At the end
of the operation, the NE returns the result to the OS.
Continuous Exercise: after starting by the operator, the exercise operation is repeated till
the operator sends the stop command.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
253 / 458
Automatic Switch Initiation Criteria

An automatic switch is only initiated upon detection of a failure at the receiving end(i.e. Sink
side). If a failure occurs at the transmission end (i.e. Source side), an automatic switch will be
initiated by the remote(i.e. far end) network element when it detects the failure at its receiving
end. The failures that can be detected at the receiving end are the following:
HBER is generated by the RSPI functional block

LBER (or EWH): generated by the RSPI functional block
EW (or EWL): Early Warning generated by the RSPI functional block
Signal Fail: generated from RSPIlossOfSignal and fails (RxLos, RxFail, DemLos,
DemFail, LOF and RCIM of the RFCOH block and Equipment Defect for the functional
block RSPI and RFCOH.
Wait to restore
In the revertive mode, a working channel will be switched back to its working section when the
working section has recovered from its failure. In order to prevent several protection switches
due to an intermittent failure, a failed section must be faultfree during a fixed period of time
called waittorestore (WTR) period before it can be used again by a working channel. An Auto
Switch condition will override the WTR period.
The WRT period is not configurable by the management system.
6.2.1.5.2.2 WST protection

As specified in para.3.2.3 on page 50, in all configurations it is possible to have one (and one only as a
whole, transported contemporarily by channel 0 and 1) WST extra frame protected. The WST extra frame
switch, if used, works in 1+1 mode tacking into account the following switching criteria:
Signal Fail alarm

HBER alarm
LBER alarm
EW alarm
priority 1
priority 2
priority 3
priority 4
The signal fail alarm include RCIM coming from RFCOH block and ATL RFCOH remotized (K0
management).
6.2.1.5.3 Equipment Protection of control subsystem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
No protection of the units composing the control subsystem (i.e. System Controller and Logic units) is
envisaged (the payload traffic is not affected by their loss, because configuration data are present also,
and thus survive, on the peripheral units). Equipment configuration data, as a whole, are contained in a
nonvolatile memory in the System Controller unit. Such data can be backupped and restored to/from
the Equipment Craft Terminal/OS in order to limit the eventual reconfiguration of the NE to the delta
between the back up configuration and the state before the crash is occurred.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
254 / 458


6.2.1.5.4 Equipment Protection (EPS)

Equipment Protection is provided on RMD units, protecting the RST section of STM1 line interfaces (see
Fig. 8. on page 51). This implies optional hardware addition (EPS shelf with EPS boards).
[1]
General
The EPS 3+1 protects at RST section the lineside electrical/optical STM1 interface in the UHRN
configurations up to 3+1 with/without occasional traffic.
EPS protection is unmeaningful in N+0 configurations.
The line protection functionality is implemented by a FPGA inside the LOGIC unit of IDU/REG shelf.
The switching commands generated by LOGIC are forwarded to a FPGA inside EPS0 (of IDU/EPS
shelf) that physically carries out switching operations. The local and remote LOGIC units
communicate with each other through a dedicated byte (DSI) that is inserted/extracted on the 5,1 Mb
stream.
Station A
Station B
SWC A
SWC A
CH 1
5,1 Mb
CH 1
5,1 Mb
DATA IN
DATA IN
SERVICE
SERVICE
DATA OUT
DATA OUT
5,1 Mb
SPARE A
5,1 Mb
SPARE A
Fig. 162. DSI channel implementation

The same FPGA inside EPS0 includes also all functionalities regarding the RPS protection of
STM1 streams at radioside; RPS and EPS protections share the RST section of the spare channel
as described in the following.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The EPS line protection, dual ended type, has greater priority with respect to RPS; thus, all
protections that may be active in both directions are removed when the EPS protection is required;
moreover, when EPS protection is active, the RPS protection is inhibited, so that all alarms arising
at radio side are ignored by the LOGIC unit.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
255 / 458
The block diagram in Fig. 163. is relevant to EPSs Tx section and depicts alarms used by the switching
logic.
EPS TX
EPS 1
DL1_Tx
LOS IN1
LOS EPS1
Delay
0255 bit
IN CH 1
LRST1
Delay
0255 bit
RFCOH1
M1
T1
RFCOH2
M2
T2
RFCOH3
M3
T3
N.U.
EPS 2
LOS IN2
LOS EPS2
DL2_Tx
Delay
0255 bit
IN CH 2
LRST2
Delay
0255 bit
N.U.
EPS 3
LOS EPS3
DL3_Tx
LOS IN3
Delay
0255 bit
IN CH 3
LRST3
Delay
0255 bit
N.U.
K_EPS (0 3)
LOS
EPS0
DLA_Tx
Delay
0255 bit
IN OCC
EPS 0
N.U.
LOS IN0
Delay
0255 bit
LRSTA
Delay
0255 bit
RFCOHA
MOD A
TX A
N.U.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 163. EPS 3+1, Tx section
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
256 / 458

The block diagram in Fig. 164. is relevant to EPSs Rx section and depicts alarms used by the switching
logic.
EPS RX
EPS 1
RMD 1 C.F.
MIR 1
K_EPS 1
KR_SWC 1
OUT CH 1
LRST1
MIR
EPS1
Missing
LOS IN
Laser Fail
M.E.
Delay 0/255
M.E.
Delay 0/255
RFCOH1
D1
R1
D2
R2
Card Fail
O/E
INT.
Laser Degr
RMD 1 Missing
Card Missing
RMD 2 C.F.
EPS 2
RMD 2 Missing
MIR 2
K_EPS 2
KR_SWC2
OUT CH 2
LRST2
M.E.
Delay 0/255
M.E.
Delay 0/255
RFCOH2
MIR
EPS 2
Card Fail
Card Missing
RMD 3 C.F.
EPS 3
RMD 3 Missing
MIR 3
K_EPS 3
KR_SWC 3
OUT CH 3
LRST3
MIR
EPS 3
M.E.
Delay 0/255
M.E.
Delay 0/255
RFCOH3
R3
D3
Card Fail
Card Mis sing
K_OCC
Serialized alarms
to LOGIC unit
Serialized alarms
from EPS0 unit
OUT
OCC
Card Fail 0 3
Card Missing 0
MS
AIS
K_OCC
MIR EPS 0 3
MIR
EPS 0
D RX
K_EPS 0
MIR 1 3
K_EPS 1
LOS EPS 0 3
K_EPS 2
K_EPS 3
EPS 0
Card Fail
LRST A
Alarms from
O/E INT 0 3
M.E.
Delay 0/255
M.E.
Delay 0/255
RFCOHA
DEM A
RX A
Card Missing
RMD 0 C.F.
RMD 0 Missing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 164. EPS 3+1, Rx section
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
257 / 458
Getting switching criteria

The protection scheme is Dual Ended type, so that the switch is done contemporarily both at
transmission and receiving sides in both stations.
EPS switching criteria are the pieces of information that the switching logic is able to get, reading
them directly from channels or from the demodulators which describe the state and functionality of
the channel itself and of the signal processed by it; these pieces of information are used by the
switching logic to decide whether or not the EPS protection must be set up.
These criteria are:
RMD(0 3) Card fail:
criterion arising for RMD unit internal failure (OR of MOD C.F.+ DEM C.F.
+ RRA C.F.)
RMD(0 3) Missing:
RMD unit missing
MIR EPS (1 3):
MIR detected by EPS splitter
MIR (1 3):
MIR detected at EPS unit input (Rx section) on signal coming from the
relative RST sections
EPS (0 3) Card fail:
EPS unit internal failure
EPS (0 3) Missing:
EPS unit missing
LOS IN (0 3):
signal loss detected at relative RST section inputs (N.B.1)
These alarms are sent to LOGIC unit in serial way.

N.B.1 :
alarm LOS IN 1 is inhibited by alarm LOS EPS 1

N.B.2 : the alarm LOS IN 0 does not arise for absence of user signal; therefore:
in configurations with Occasional traffic:

when alarm LOS EPS 0 arises, the EPS0 switch is moved in order to send the signal present
at EPS1 block input toward the RSTA block; should this last signal be missing, the signal
present at EPS2 block input is selected; if both are missing, the signal present at EPS3 block
input is selected; whenever all user signal are contemporarily missing, the alarm LOS IN 0
arises.
in configurations without Occasional traffic:

alarm LOS EPS 0 is always active, therefore LOGIC sends the signal present at EPS1 block
input toward the RSTA block; should this last signal be missing, the signal present at EPS2
block input is selected; if both are missing, the signal present at EPS3 block input is selected;
whenever all user signal are contemporarily missing, the alarm LOS IN 0 arises.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This functionality is managed directly by EPS0s FPGA and is inhibited when LOGICs FPGA sends
commands K_EPS1, K_EPS2 or K_EPS3 (in normal operating conditions and without any protection
requests, EPS0s FPGA sends permanently command K_EPS0; with this command the behavior
of N.B.2 is followed).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
258 / 458

[2]
[3]
Switching procedure

Alarms causing switching on are:
RMD Missing 1 3
RMD Card fail 1 3
MIR 1 3
LOS IN 1 3 (provided that are not inhibited by respective LOS EPS 1 3)
When one of these alarms arises on any channel, the local stations Rx logic sends, through DSI, the
suitable parallel orders (O.P.) to the remote stations Rx logic; this latter, if able to do that, activates
the remote EPS protection and, as soon as carried out, sends back the consequent message stating
that protection has been set up.
in its turn, the local stations Rx logic, as soon as has received the confirmation DSI message (C.C.),
performs the EPS protection, thus concluding the switching cycle.
The complete sequence for the local station A is:
1)
2)
The Rx logic of station A detects a generic criterion for EPS switch

It verifies the availability of the spare and of the EPSi switch itself (if the spare and/or the EPSi
switch are not available, the logic does not proceed to the following step, but goes on checking
the situation until the spare/EPSi switch become again available; when this happens, and if
alarms requiring EPS protection are still present, logic goes to the following step).
It sets up the failure lockout all radio channels equipped, so that it frees the spare channel in
the direction A B.
It sends the EPS PROTECTION request (O.P.) to the remote station.
It waits for the remote EPS setup confirmation messages (C.C.). Four kinds of messages could
be received:
EPS protection setup (process skips to step 6 )
unavailable EPS spare (during all the alarm persistence, logic sends continuously the
relative requests O.P.)
inhibited EPS (during all the alarm persistence, logic sends the relative requests O.P.
every 500 ms)
Message not consistent with the sent O.P. requests (during all the alarm persistence, logic
sends the request every 500 ms)
It generates the switching commands (K_EPS) to set up the local EPS protection, therefore
finishing the Dual Ended switch.
3)
4)
5)
6)
When the EPSi protection is active on a generic channel CHi for an alarm risen in station A, the Rx
logics of stations A and B reject all other switch requests both at radio and line side, and state all
equipped radio channels lockedout for failure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The LOGIC unit remotion (that causes the unavailability of the switching logic in the EPS0 FPGA)
moves any channel previously protected both at line and radio sides toward the unprotected status,
whichever the anomaly kinds (having determined the protection) may have been.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
259 / 458
Unswitching procedure
The spare channel, if engaged at line side by a switched channel, is released in one or more of
following cases:
criteria having caused the protection setup have disappeared because channel has come
back to efficient status
the spare channel in unavailable for all channels, because one or more of following alarms arise:
EW 0
LBER 0
HBER 0
Dem Fail 0
EPS 0 Missing
EPS 0 Card fail
RMD0 Missing
RMD0 Card fail
MIR EPS 0
MIR EPSi where i is the number of the generic channel (13) (N.B.)
LOS IN 0
N.B.
alarm MIR EPSi is selective as far as it makes the spare channel unavailable for that
generic CHi, but available for the other channels.
the DSI channel is missing and logic enter the frozen state.
If the frozen state is not entered, unswitching sequence is as follows:

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
The station As Rx LOGIC detects that channel previously protected has become efficient again
It removes switching commands (K_EPS)
It sends the O.P. relative to channels status to radio side
It waits for relevant C.C.s
It removes the lockoutforfailure on all channels, therefore concluding the unswitching
process.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
If the frozen status is entered during the unswitching procedure, LOGICs of stations A and B operate
autonomously removing all current protections and lockoutforfailure conditions.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
260 / 458

[4]
[5]
The inhibition of a channel is detected and declared only when there is a fault which should need the
EPS protection and, contemporarily, one or more of following alarms are present:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Incoming inhibitions management
EW 0
LBER 0
HBER 0
Dem Fail 0
EPS 0 Card Fail
EPS 0 Missing
RMD 0 Card Fail
RMD 0 Missing
MIR EPS 0
MIR EPS i where i is the number of the generic channel (13)
Should the inhibition on a generic channel arise after the channel itself has been protected due to
a previous fault, LOGIC will decide the unswitching of such channel.
Should the inhibition in transmission of a generic channel arise when the channel itself is already
switched, the Rx logic will wait 500 ms before unswitching it, in order to avoid useless unswitching
when these inhibitions are unstable.
After, every 500 ms, it sends O.P.s (if the alarm justifying this request is stable) to verify that the
inhibition has been removed.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
261 / 458
Frozen state management

Whenever the Rx section of station B (see Fig. 165. herebelow) receives for more than 1 s the
message Wrong Received Messages (all 1) for the DSI communication channel failure, thus all
messages O.P.BA and C.C.AB of this direction have been lost; therefore logic removes the active
K_EPS, if any, and sends the message No parallel request O.P.AB and the C.C.BA message
Unavailable Tx spare; this latter action (that is successful only if DSI channel in the other direction
is efficient) has the aim of making the remote Tx and Rx spare free.
The Station Bs logic restarts to send messages C.C.BA and O.P.AB 250 ms after the DSI
communication has been recovered and all messages O.P.BA and C.C.AB are different from all 1.
Station A
Station B
OP BA
OP BA
CC BA
Tx
Rx
OP BA + CC AB
Rx
CC AB
Tx
CC AB
CC BA
Rx
OP AB + CC BA
Tx
Rx
Tx
OP AB
OP AB
Logic B
Logic A
DSI communication channel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 165. Frozen state management
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
262 / 458

[6]
[7]
Operator controls

The operator control of equipped channels is envisaged through commands described here.
These commands have priority from 1 (higher priority) to 3 (lower priority) according to following
Tab. 55.
Tab. 55. EPS control command priority
Command
Priority
Lockout
Force_switch
Automatic_switch
where:
Lockout
Channel set in lockout is NOT protected by spare whichever the alarm

status of the channel itself my be.
If lockout command is sent toward a channel presently protected, it is
immediately unswitched according to the unswitching procedure.
The logic frozen state and/or the DSI communication unavailability
inhibits the possibility to execute the lockout command.
Force_switch
The channel n on which the force_switch command is executed is set

protected whichever the current state of spare may be.
Command force_switch is carried out as described in the switching
procedure, without checking the spare status.
The logic frozen state and/or the DSI communication unavailability
inhibits the possibility to execute the force_switch command.
Automatic_switch
Normal working condition. Absence of manual operations.
Whenever an active Operator Control engages the spare, the local Rx logic forwards K_OCC
towards the unit EPS0 so that outgoing MSAIS is inserted.
[8]
Displays and led on LOGIC unit

Two displays and a led are present on LOGIC unit front panel (see Fig. 48. on page 123):
displays show the channel presently protected at Tx and Rx sections (both displays show 0
when spare is free or the occasional stream is transmitted on both directions)
the led indicates that Operator Controls are active.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
It is possible, through Craft Terminal, to know if the Operator Control having caused the EPS switch
(Force_switch) or unswitch (Lockout) has been forwarded in the local or remote station.
Displays show indifferently the protected channel both at line and radio side; in order to know if the
protection is at line or radio side, the use of Craft Terminal or Network Management OS is necessary.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
263 / 458
The services are always protected in N+1 radio side while N+1 protection line side is performed only when
EPS protection is present on STM1 signal. In case of N+0 configuration there is no services protection and
the services insertion/extraction line side can be managed on both RMD 0/1 line interfaces (it means that
no protection line side is performed but fixed service channels can be managed on both interfaces).
Radio side switch works in N+1 mode tacking into account the following switching criteria :
Signal Fail alarm

HBER alarm
LBER alarm
priority
1
2
3
The signal fail alarm include RCIM coming from RFCOH block and ATL rfcoh remotized.
Line side switch works in N+1 mode tacking into account the following switching criteria :
LOS CKSYN
RRA card fail
RRA LOS alarm
priority
1
1
1
6.2.1.5.6 Network Protections

The following network protections should be provided by WADM/WLT external to UHRN:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
MSP on STM1 ports

SNCP on all the virtual container
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
264 / 458

6.2.1.5.5 Services protection

6.2.2 Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture

This paragraph describes the control subsystem hardware architecture, defines the control elements, the
function partitioning among them and the external and internal interfaces managed by this subsystem.
Function partitioning
Control elements
Communication interfaces
on page 265
on page 265
on page 267
6.2.2.1 Function partitioning

The control subsystem provides the resources to support the communication interfaces and the
processing functions required by the TMN.
As described in the previous para.6.2.1 on page 234 (Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture), the
functionalities performed by the control subsystem can be summarized as follows:
Message Communication Function (MCF)
Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF)
Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF)
Physical Machine Management Function on whole equipment basis (PMMF/E)
Physical Machine Management Function on unit basis (PMMF/U)
Basic Functions (BF)

Each of these functionality groups includes functions with similar characteristics in terms of scope of
operation and performance requirements. In fact:
MCF have to support a high routing throughput and dont require a high availability
Management functions dont require a strict real time processing and a high availability
BF require a strict real time processing and high availability

6.2.2.2 Control elements
The control elements supporting the functionalities described above are:
Equipment controller (EC)
Radio Controller (RC)
Supervisory Units (SU)

The control elements logical hierarchy is depicted in Fig. 166. on page 266.
The functionalities are splitted on the control elements composing the control subsystem architecture.
Equipment Controller
One EC has in charge the MCF and VMMF: it provides resources (physical interfaces and protocol
stack) required for the communication between NE and the management systems (OS and ECT),
it performs all the control and management functions of the virtual machine (info model).
No protection of this control element is performed. The EC is physically located aboard the SAM
board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Radio Controller
One RC has in charge the PMMF/E: it provides the resources to support the control and management
functions related to the real physical machine.
No protection of this control element is performed. The RC is physically located aboard the SAM
board.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
265 / 458
The SUs have in charge the PMMF/U and the AF. This function requires a real time processing of
the data coming from the ASICs. The SU on board of each unit has the aim to provide an uniform
interface towards the RC avoiding a RC dependency from the HW where the SUs are
accommodated. One SU is accommodated in each unit.
OS
QB3
ECT
F
EC
ISSB
RC
SAM
CAN
Rem
Inv
Local
uP
Rem
Inv
SU
Local
uP
SU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 166. UHRx control subsystem architecture
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
266 / 458

Supervisory Units

6.2.2.3 Communication interfaces

A set of (serial and parallel) interfaces are defined as part of the control subsystem to support the
communication task.
They can be classified as system internal or external interfaces.
All the communication links used by the different processing functions (RC and EC) to exchange data each
other or to read/write data from/to the controlled objects (ASICs or other devices on board the different
cards in the equipment) are defined as internal interfaces.
External interfaces are defined as the communication links provided by the control subsystem towards
external devices used for Operation and Maintenance functions or system debug activities.
Internal interfaces are reported in Fig. 167. with the association of the units supporting these interfaces.
IDUREG
IDUEPS
SAM
EC
ASIC
ISSB
SPI
Mem.
Inv.
RC
ESCON
uP
SERV
SERV
IDU
CAN
Mem.
Inv.
Mem.
Inv.
RMD
uP
LOGIC
EPS
uP
uP
SPI
SPI
SPI
ASIC
ASIC
ASIC
EPSn
LOGIC
RMDn
Mem.
Inv.
SPI
RT
uP
Mem.
Inv.
ODU
n= 0 to 3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RTn
Fig. 167. UHRN communication interfaces
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
267 / 458
External Interfaces
The control subsystem provides the following external communication interfaces:
QB3 interface
F interface
Qecc interface
DBG interface
HK/RA interface
QAUX interface
All the above interfaces are supported, at the NE level, by the EC processor, as part of its MCF and
VMMF.
The QB, F, Qecc, Qaux interfaces are available as communication links between the NE
and external control equipments, as required by the TMN environment.
The QB3 protocol stack requires a 10BASE2 (or 10BASET) physical layer and IEEE 802.2 / 802.3
for the data link layer. Through this interface the NE is connected to a LAN for message exchange
with the OS station.
The F interface is a local communication port provided to connect the NE to a local Craft Terminal
station (PC or WS); this interface is implemented as a low speed RS232 port (bit rate is 38,4 Kbit/s
max). Remote CT functionality is performed by routing CT messages to DCCs and viceversa.
The Qecc interface is defined as a TMN related communication interface based on the use of the
Embedded Communication Channels, available in the SOH portion of the SDH frame, as physical
layer. Through the Qecc interface the NE can exchange management messages with a remote OS
(or Craft Terminal) station.
Qecc interface is implemented as a TDM serial link between the EC function and the ASICs on board
of port units. The TDM channel is terminated by the MHDLC, providing for the selection of the
channels to terminate and performing the standard HDLC functions. This interface uses the LAPD
(ITUT Q.921) as data link layer protocol, this protocol is performed by the MCF inside the EC
function.
The Qaux interface is provided as an additional TMN communication interface for message
exchange between the NE and a remote OS station, based on the use of a 2 Mbit/s proprietary
channel.
The DBG interface is a proprietary interface available for software debug activities. A local
communication port for debug is required for each processor (EC and RC) on board the System
Controller. The local debug ports are a low speed RS232 UART based interface, available for VT100
or equivalent debug console.
An equipment network interface for debug activities should be provided as well, implemented as a
10BASE2 Ethernet channel. The EC function should provide a router function between this port and
the internal ISSB bus to allow the use of this port for debugging of RC processor too.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A set of traditional parallel I/O interfaces for local signaling of alarm presence, such as rack lamps,
front panel LEDs and so on are provided by the EC processor.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
268 / 458


Internal Interfaces
The control subsystem provides the following internal communication interfaces:
ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus) interface
CAN interface
SPI interface
The ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus) interface is basically an equipmentinternal Local Area Network
for communications among the different microprocessors in the same shelf: the EC processor and
the RC processor and other possible processors. It is a multimaster HDLCbased backplane serial
bus.
The CAN interface allows to connect the RC processor to the microprocessor on board the units.
It is a serial broadcast bus, each node connected to the bus receives all the messages sent by the
other ones. A local filtering mechanism on each node permit to manage only the messages related
to the node. The maximum speed is 1 Mbit/s up to 40 meters length.
Fig. 168. herebelow shows the physical implementation of UHRN communication interfaces.
(RJ11)
Resistive load
or
Subrack EPS
CAN BUS
RRA/MODEM 3
HCO8HCO8
SPI
REMOTE
REMOTE
ALIENASICELLEN
CERBERO
ASIC
ASIC
INVENTORY
INVENT.
(RJ11)
RRA/MODEM 2
HCO8HCO8
SPI
ESCONX
DBG_L RC
REMOTE
REMOTE
ALIENASICELLEN
CERBERO
ASIC
ASIC
INVENTORY
INVENT.
F (SUB 9 pins)
MPC860
MPC860
EN
EN
ISSB
(RJ11)
RRA/MODEM 1
HCO8
QB3
SPI
ASIC
ASIC
ASIC
REMOTE
INVENT.
EC
(RJ11)
RRA/MODEM 0
10base T R(J45)
10base 2 (BNC)
DBG_L EC
Local bus
HCO8
Uart
SPI
ASIC
ASIC
ASIC
SPIL
REMOTE
INVENT.
EXP
ALARM
DCCR
6.48 Mb
HCO8
Alarms Battery
OR PSU0,1,2,3 and
PSU1/2 subrack EPS
SPRI
SIGNAL
PROCESSING
REMOTE
INVENTORY
ASIC
P I O/HK (SCSI 40pins)
ANDOR
Router
TR0 and TR1
SPI
SPRI
HDB3 cable 0
HDB3 cable 1
HCO8
ASIC
SPRI
HDB3 cable 2
HDB3 cable 3
HCO8
ASIC
Router
TR2 and TR3
SAM 3+1
CAN BUS
HC 08
SPIL
SPI
FPGA
Logic UNIT
Remote inventory
PSU0/1 subrack EPS
and FANS 1
REMOTE
INVENTORY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 168. Physical implementation of UHRN communication interfaces
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
269 / 458
ODU 0
RT 01
RT
0
RT
1
RT
0
ODU 1
RT 23
RT
1
SPRI
SPRI
Logic Unit
Remote RT 0/1/2/3
By Channel 0,l
SPRI
Router
Micro
Router
ESCON
The Firmware
adds number 2
to RT 0 and 3 to
RT 1
SPI
SAM 3+1
Can BUS
LOGIC UNIT
EPS 0
SAM 3+1
EPS 1
RMD0
EPS 2
RMD1
RMD3
RMD2
Can Bus resistive

load or EPS
subrack
EPS 3
Fig. 169. Detail of Routers

As the transceiver in ODU cabinet can be identified by HW as 0 or 1 only, it is necessary that router
managing ODU2 assigns the identifications 2 and 3 .
N.B.
The router on SAM 3+1 is able to detect a cable mismatch between cable 0 and cable 1 of ODU 1
and the same operation is made by router on Logic Unit for cable 0 and cable 1 of ODU 2.
Cables mismatches are detected also in case of cables cross between RT0 and RT1 contained in
different ODU .
Since cable cross between RT0/(RT1) and RT0/(RT1) contained in different ODU is not detected,
careful must be taken in installation phase to avoid misfunctioning.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 170. on page 271 details the logical signal interconnection between IDU/REG and IDU/EPS shelves,
obtained through the cable described in para.5.4.2.1 on page 212.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
270 / 458

Fig. 169. herebelow details additional routing functions performed by LOGIC unit for ODU 1 transceivers:
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
PSU0
PSU1
Fast serial Bus
Remote Inventory
SAM
Agent
HC08
SAM 3+1
Unit
Alarmsand
Three wires
Battery alarms
Two Wires
Can Bus
Psu Alarms and Missing
Four wires
EPS Command Switches
Remote Inv. and Alarms
interface
interface
interface
interface
Parallel alarms RRA/MODEM
IfElectrical
unit
RRA/Modem 3
If Electrical
unit
RRA/Modem 2
Battery alarms
Psu Alarms & missing

PSU1
Can BUS
PSU0
Can BUS
IfElectrical
unit
RRA/Modem 1
Fast serial Bus
KEPS0/1/2/3+Kocc. .
KEPS1
KEPS2
KEPS3
IfElectrical
unit
RRA/Modem 0
Optical
Interface
EPS line 0
Optical
Interface
EPS 1
Optical
Interface
REG Subrack
EPS
Subrack
Parallel Alarms
for Logic Switch
EPS
EPS2
Optical
Interface
EPS 3
Fan unit 1
HC08
LOGIC UNIT
EPS command Switches
and alarms
Remote inv.
PSU3
Fan unit 2
PSU2
Missing and Card fail EPS0/1/2/3
EPS
Logic
SUB D25 pins female
Resistive Load Can

or Subrack EPS
LOGIC
Unit
Agent
EEPROM
(KEPS0/1/2/3+Kocc.) + ECHO
Ten wires:
Data,Sync,Clock
Three wires:
gnd
Missing
+3.3V
Enable
Clock
Data input
Data output

Battery alarms
ED
Psu Alarms
and Missing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 170. Logical signal interconnection between IDU/REG and IDU/EPS shelves
01
271 / 458
6.2.3 Control Subsystem Software Architecture
Functional Decomposition
Module Decomposition
on page 272
on page 273
6.2.3.1 Functional Decomposition
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The software implemented functions can be divided into the following groups:
Message Routing Function (MRF)

It represents all the functions necessary to set up a management network intermediate system
(intermediate system communication function):
QB3 protocol stack (layer 1 thru 3)
Qecc protocol stack (layer 1 thru 3)
F protocol stack (layer 1 thru 7)
Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF)

It represents all the functions necessary to set up a management network end system (end system
communication function) and to control and manage the virtual machine. No strict real time is
required.
QB3 protocol stack (layer 4 thru 7)
Qecc protocol stack (layer 4 thru 7)
NER
MAF
EMF fault management:
enable/disable alarm reporting
alarm severity assignment
EMF performance monitoring
Configuration and provisioning (virtual machine)
Persistent database management
Software download and management
Security
Physical Machine Management Function (PMMF)

It represents all the functions necessary to control and manage the physical machine. No strict real
time is required.
EMF fault management
EMF performance monitoring
Configuration and provisioning (physical machine)
Basic Function (BF)

It represents all the strict real time signal processing functions that can be performed without
accessing the ASICs
card fail alarm generation: this alarm is an OR of different equipment alarm primitives
alarms correlation between equipment and transmission alarms (transmission alarms are
masked by equipment alarms)
standby cards alarms inhibition (transmission alarms of EPS and RPS standby cards)
alarms time stamping, according to the time at which the alarm status change has been read
from ASIC
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
272 / 458

This paragraph describes the software architecture of the equipment control subsystem.

6.2.3.2 Module Decomposition

According to the functional decomposition described in the previous para.6.2.3.1 on page 272, the
partitioning of the software into the main design entities, the function and the purpose of each of them are
described hereafter.
a)
Virtual Machine Manager

The Virtual Machine Manager is composed of two main parts (see Fig. 171. on page 274):
Common Software (CSW)

CSW provides two different services:
External Communication Service (ECS)

It manages the protocols for the communication with the manager OS and IMCT.
Network Element Function Application (NEFA)

This component provides a representation of the network element by means of an
information model. This information model describes the equipment from the
management point of view as a collection of managed objects, which can be manipulated
by a management system.
NEFA component is composed by a common part (NEFAC) independent from the
physical resources of the network element that represents only the functionalities
performed in terms of functional managed objects, and a specific part (NEFAS)
dependent from the physical resources that implements the equipment managed objects.
Virtual Hardware Machine (VHM)

VHM manages the communication with the RC function both in terms of application data (it
sends to the RC the provisioning data and receives status and alarms) and in terms of
communication driver. The messages exchanged between EC and RC are logical messages
(information model oriented).
This component stores to persistent memory the data configuration coming from the
management systems.
b)
Physical Machine Manager
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Physical Machine Manager provides a proprietary representation of the managed system in terms
of transmission resources and physical resources. It implements the PMM functions and generally
provides the conversion between the data how they are known from the physical machine and the
info model representation based on managed objects.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
273 / 458

External Communication Service

(ECS)
Common
Software
(CSW)
NEFA Common (NEFAC)
NEFA Specific
(NEFAS)
NEFA
dataBase Handler (dBH)

Physical Machine Manager (PMM)
VHM
EC/RC Interface Handler
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 171. VMM module decomposition
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
274 / 458
6.2.4 Signal Management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

This paragraph describes the signal management performed by 9600USY/UHRN equipment.

STM1 frame characteristics
on page 276
STM1 frame structure and WST mapping
on page 276
WST channel structure
on page 277
RFCOH channels structure
on page 278
Multiplexing method (as described in ITUT Rec. G.707)
on page 279
SOH Management
on page 284
SOH handling in normal operation condition
on page 288
DCCR Management
on page 289
Alarms detected in RST section
on page 291
Regenerator Section trace management
J0 management
Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) detector
K0 management

on page 295
on page 296
on page 297
ATPC Management
on page 298
MC management on RX terminal
on page 300
N+1 Repeater configuration
on page 301
MC management on Repeater configuration
on page 302
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
275 / 458
6.2.4.1 STM1 frame characteristics
Signal
n.
columns
WST
Code
redundancy
Symbol
rate
[Mbit/s]
Channel
spacing
[MHz]
STM1
280
7.69%
24.812
40
30.0
29.65
29.0
28.0
STM1
272
7.69%
24.103
28.0
f/Sr
Reuse
operation
1.612
1.209
1.195
1.168
1.128
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1.161
Yes
The STM1 signal with 0 WST channel is used only for special application (e.g. frequency reuse
operation in 28 channel spacing).
6.2.4.2 STM1 frame structure and WST mapping

A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
B1
MD
D1
MD
MD
E1
MD
D2
A2
J0
NU
NU
MD
F1
NU
NU
MD
D3
ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT OVERHEAD

B2
K1
K2
D4
B2
B2
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
S1
D12
M1
E2
NU
NU
1xWST channels
(4 columns)
RFCOH channels
(2 columns)
MD: Media dependent bytes

NU: Bytes reserved for national use
WST is mapped on columns: 23, 92, 160.229
SERVICE CHANNELS are mapped on columns: 57, 195
MSOH bytes are in bypass condition
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 172. STM1 frame structure and WST mapping
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
276 / 458

The characteristics of the frame are resumed in the following table:
6.2.4.3 WST channel structure

A single WST channel (2.048 Kbit/s) is composed by 36 bytes as described in the following:
Information (1 byte)
1st byte
WST_POH (1 byte)
Information (8 bytes)
P_WST
Sg_stn
Sg_stp
P_WST
Sg_stn
Sg_stp
stn
stp
Sg_stn
Sg_stp
Information (7 bits)
36th byte
WST (2.048 Kbit/s)

WST_POH:
P_WST:
Sg_stn:
Sg_stp:
Information:
global SDH plus WST parity (BIP8 operation)

dedicated WST parity (BIP2 operation)
negative stuffing opportunity
positive stuffing opportunity
32 bytes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 173. WST channel structure
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
277 / 458
6.2.4.4 RFCOH channels structure

The structure of SERVICE CHANNELS inside the RFCOH area is the following:
RFCOH
column xx
column yy
DSI
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
ATPC
1.9
1.10
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
D1
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
D2
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
4.1
4.2
D3
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
E1
5.1
5.2
K0
F1
reserved for service channel
Monitoring channel management:

1.X EWL alarm
2.X EWH alarm
3.X HBER alarm
4.X ATL alarm
[X=1 to 4 number of channel]
5.1 FAIL service 0 (ATL_rfcoh1)
5.2 FAIL service 1 (ATL_rfcoh2)
The decision to select the MC signal coming from ch_ 0 or ch_1 is implemented according to the local DEM
alarms (and BIP4 parity code).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 174. RFCOH channels structure
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
278 / 458
6.2.4.5 Multiplexing method (as described in ITUT Rec. G.707)

a)
Multiplexing of Administrative Unit Groups (AUGs) into STMN

The arrangement of N AUGs multiplexed into the STMN is shown in Fig. 175. :
The AUG is a structure of 9 rows by 261 columns plus 9 bytes in row 4 (for the AUn pointers).
The STMN consists of an SOH as described in para.6.2.4.6 on page 284 and a structure of
9 rows by N 261 columns with N 9 bytes in row 4 (for the AUn pointers).
The N AUGs are onebyte interleaved into this structure and have a fixed phase relationship
with respect to the STMN.
1
261
1
1
261
#1
#N
AUG
AUG
123...N123...N
RSOH
123...N123...N
MSOH
123 ... N
N9
N 261
STMN
T151805095
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 175. Multiplexing of Administrative Unit Groups (AUGs) into STMN
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
279 / 458
b)
Multiplexing of an AU4 via AUG
The 9 bytes at the beginning of row 4 are allocated to the AU4 pointer.
The remaining 9 rows by 261 columns is allocated to the Virtual Container4 (VC4).
The phase of the VC4 is not fixed with respect to the AU4.
The location of the first byte of the VC4 with respect to the AU4 pointer is given by the pointer
value.
The AU4 is placed directly in the AUG.
261
J1
B3
C2
G1
F2
H4
F3
K3
N1
VC4
Floating
phase
VC4 POH
H1 Y Y H2 1* 1* H3 H3 H3
AU4
Fixed
phase
AUG
T151806095
1* All 1s byte
Y 1001 SS11 (S bits are unspecified)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 176. Multiplexing of an AU4 via AUG
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
280 / 458

The multiplexing arrangement of a single AU4 via the AUG is depicted in Fig. 176. :
c)
Multiplexing of AU3s via AUG (only for SONET standard / not applicable in European SDH
signal format).

The multiplexing arrangement of three AU3s via the AUG is depicted in Fig. 177. :
The 3 bytes at the beginning of row 4 are allocated to the AU3 pointer.
The remaining 9 rows by 87 columns is allocated to the VC3 and two columns of fixed stuff.
The byte in each row of the two columns of fixed stuff of each AU3 shall be the same.
The phase of the VC3 and the two columns of fixed stuff is not fixed with respect to the AU3.
The location of the first byte of the VC3 with respect to the AU3 pointer is given by the pointer
value.
The three AU3s are onebyte interleaved in the AUG.
29 30 31 58 59 60 87
H1 H2 H3
H4
F3
K3
N1
Floating
phase
Floating
phase
VC3 POH
H1 H2 H3
29 30 31 58 59 60 87
J1
B3
C2
G1
F2
H4
F3
K3
N1
VC3 POH
J1
B3
C2
G1
F2
29 30 31 58 59 60 87
J1
B3
C2
G1
F2
VC3 plus
2 columns of
fixed stuff
H4
F3
K3
N1
Floating
phase
VC3 POH
H1 H2 H3
Three AU3
Onebyte
interleaved
fixed phase
A
A B C A B C A B C
A
B
A
B
B
C
AUG
T151807095
NOTE The byte in each row of the two columns of fixed stuff of each AU3 shall be the same.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 177. Multiplexing of AU3s via AUG
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
281 / 458
d)
Multiplexing of Tributary Unit Group3s (TUG3s) into a VC4
The TUG3 is a 9row by 86column structure.
The VC4 consists of one column of VC4 POH, two columns of fixed stuff and a 258column
payload structure.
The three TUG3s are single byte interleaved into the 9row by 258column VC4 payload
structure and have a fixed phase with respect to the VC4.
As described in Fig. 175. on page 279, the phase of the VC4 with respect to the AU4 is given by
the AU4 pointer.
TUG3
(B)
TUG3
(A)
86
TUG3
(C)
86
86
A B C A B C A ....
A B C A B C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
261
T151808095
FIXED STUFF
VC4 POH
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 178. Multiplexing of Tributary Unit Group3s (TUG3s) into a VC4
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
282 / 458

The arrangement of three TUG3s multiplexed in the VC4 is shown in Figure 74.:
e)
Multiplexing of a TU3 via TUG3

The multiplexing of a single TU3 via the TUG3 is depicted in Fig. 179. :
The TU3 consists of the VC3 with a 9byte VC3 POH and the TU3 pointer.
The first column of the 9row by 86column TUG3 is allocated to the TU3 pointer (bytes H1,
H2, H3) and fixed stuff.
The phase of the VC3 with respect to the TUG3 is indicated by the TU3 pointer.
86 Columns
H1
TUG3
85 Columns
H3
J1
Fixed stuff
H2
C2
VC3
B3
G1
F2
Container3
H4
F3
K3
N1
T151809095
VC3 POH
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 179. Multiplexing of a TU3 via TUG3
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
283 / 458
6.2.4.6 SOH Management
the SOH_BUS (1.728 Mb/s) thats used to transport the RSOH bytes information from all the lineside
channels (0,1,2, , N) towards AUX board.
the RFCOH_BUS towards channel_0 and channel_1 (radioside)
Available bytes with standard interface (NxG.703) and with RS385 interface (NxV11).
CH_0
CH_1
Crossconnection matrix
RFCOH
CH_0
CH_2
CH_1
BYPASS FUNCTION
CH N
SOH BUS
E1
F1
1.8
1.9
2.2
2.3
2.5
2.6
2.8
2.9
3.2
3.3
3.5
3.6
3.8
3.9
ATPC
DSI
MC
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3
CH1 (#)
CH2 (#)
CH3 (#)
CH4 (#)
CH5 (#)
EXTERNAL INTERFACES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 180. SOH management
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
284 / 458

This block diagram of Fig. 180. herebelow shows some connections for SOH bytes management:

In case of RRA application, the access to SOH bytes is provided by RRA itself; in case of WADM and WLT
application, the access to SOH bytes is concentrated in the baseband part implementing WADM/WLT
functionality.
Each RSOH_byte, if terminated, must be terminated and accessible both at radioside and lineside. The
managed bytes (lineside) are the following:
E1
F1
#1.8, #1.9,
#2.2, #2.3, #2.5, #2.6, #2.8, #2.9,
#3.2. #3.3, #3.5, #3.6, #3.8, #3.9
E1 and F1 are always connected (radioside) to specific RFCOH channels.
The other ones can be connected (radioside) to 5 available interfaces.
In terminaltoterminal application the passthrough mode for each RSOH_byte is provided.
In WADM/WLT terminal application with radio repeater, when a specific service channel must be dropped
in the regenerator, the interested RSOH byte is rerouted in the RFCOH area according with the service
channel columns format (1152 Kbit/s stream):
Column 2
Column 1
DSI
MC
ATPC
MC
D1
MC
D2
MC
D3
MC
E1
FAIL serv + K0
F1
Channel #3
Channel #1
Channel #4
Channel #2
Channel #5
The selection of byte rerouting is performed by ECT/OS, according to this example:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Rerouting selection
Channel #1
Channel #2
Channel #3
Channel #4
Channel #5
ED
#1.8
#1.9
#2.2
#2.3
#2.5
#2.6
#2.8
#2.9
#3.2
#3.3
#3.5
#3.6
#3.8
#3.9
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
285 / 458
RST

RSOH standard_bytes
passthrough function
RFCOH
RSOH termination
E1
USER INTERFACES
F1
D1, D2, D3
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CROSS CONNECTION
MATRIX FOR
SERVICE CHANNELS
ATPC
DSI
MC
RSOH termination
RST
RFCOH
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RSOH standard_bytes
passthrough function
Fig. 181. Service channels functional block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
286 / 458

The line side SOH bytes can be managed on the four RST sections available in the maximum system
configuration ( 4+0 or 3+1 ).
SOH bytes handling:
Byte
Handling type
Access type
User interface
E1
terminated
Voice channel DTMF or 64 Kbit/s
G.703 or V.11
F1
terminated
64 Kbit/s
G.703 or V.11
MSU_RSOH
terminated
64 Kbit/s
G.703 or V.11
N.U._RSOH
terminated
64 Kbit/s
G.703 or V.11
D1:D3
terminated
192 Kbit/s
Internal towards SC
J0
terminated
64 Kbit/s
Internal towards SC
MSOH
bypassed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Inside the RRA unit the passthrough function of RSOH bytes is provided, in order to transmit
channels coming from ADM line equipment in transparent mode through the radio system.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
287 / 458
6.2.4.7 SOH handling in normal operation condition
SOH BYTES
TX SIDE
RX SIDE
A1 A2
Refresh
Refresh
B1
Refresh
Refresh
E1
insert
insert
F1
insert
insert
D1 D2 D3
insert
insert
J0
insert
character or
multiframe
insert
character or
multiframe
M.S.U.
insert
insert
NU_RSOH
insert
insert
MSOH
Bypass
Bypass
NOTE
All the RSOH bytes are managed one by one
All the MSOH bytes are in a fixed bypass

condition without any possibility to be
managed.
This operation is involved in Radio Section Termination area (RST) as in the following block diagram:
TX_SIDE SIGNAL FLOW
Line side
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RSPI
RRA
Radio side
RADIO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RX_SIDE SIGNAL FLOW
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
288 / 458

SOH handling in normal operation condition according to the default hardware configuration:

6.2.4.8 DCCR Management

The DCCR are managed by EC both in lineside and radioside.
The DCCR towards lineside are provided by the connection for all the channelunits, but are managed
by EC only the streams towards CH_0 and CH_1 on radioside, where they are inserted inside the RFCOH
bytes.
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_0
Radioside
Lineside
CK+SYNC REF
EPLD
CK+SYNC
DCCR extraction
lineside
& mapping in
6.48 Mb BUS
DCCR
extraction
RSOH
insertion
LOGIC
CK+SYNC
from RFCOH
radioside
CK+SYNC
EPLD
RST SECTION
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
RFCOH SECTION
CH_1
CH_4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 182. DCCR management (ADM towards RADIO)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
289 / 458
RST SECTION
RFCOH SECTION

CK+SYNC
CH_0
Radioside
Lineside
EPLD
DCCR extraction
DCCR
mapping
CK+SYNC REF
DCCR demapping
from 6.48 Mb BUS
& insertion line side
EPLD
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_1
CK+SYNC
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 183. DCCR management (RADIO towards ADM)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
290 / 458
6.2.4.9 Alarms detected in RST section

Alarm
Consequent action
LOS (loss of signal)
MSAIS
LOF (loss of frame)
MSAIS
TIM (trace identifier mismatch)
MSAIS
OOF (out of frame)
OFS count
MSAIS (multiplex section AIS)

MSRDI (multiplex section remote defect indication)
TIM:
when J0 byte, extracted from SDH stream received, is different from the data written in
J0_register by microprocessor interface (according to the regenerator section trace
algorithm), Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) alarm is detected and the AIS condition is
activated.
MSRDI:
the Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication is used to return an indication to the
transmit end that the received end has detected an incoming section defect or is receiving
MSAIS.
MSRDI is generated by inserting a 110 code in positions 6, 7 and 8 of the K2 byte before
scrambling.
MSAIS:
the Multiplex Section AIS indication detect an incoming AIS signal.

MSAIS is generated by inserting a 111 code in positions 6, 7 and 8 of the K2 byte before
scrambling.
N.B.
the Out of Frame Second (OFS) is declared when the STM1 frame alignment process is in the
OOF state.
This parameter is used as additional performance parameter.
The proprietary management of K0 channel (Radio Channel Identification) inside the RFCOH section is
the same of J0 in RST section. The detected alarm is the following:
Alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RCIM (Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch)
ED
Consequent action
MSAIS
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
291 / 458
LOS
LOF
SPI
TX_LOS
TX_FAIL
MOD_LOS
MOD_FAIL
TIM (JO)
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RSPI
MOD + TX
RRA channel
RADIOSIDE
LINESIDE
TX FAIL (#)
LOS
LOF
RCIM (K0)
TX DEGRADED (#)
TIM (JO)
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RX_LOS
RX_FAIL
DEM_LOS
DEM_FAIL
RSPI
RX + DEM
RRA channel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(#) referred to optical interface.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
292 / 458

In the following diagram is indicated the functional representation of the system with the alarms indication
as reported to ECT/OS:

In the following diagram is indicated the functional representation of the system with the primitives for the
performance monitoring as reported to ECT/OS.
OOF
TL
EB (B1)
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RSPI
RRA channel
MOD + TX
RADIOSIDE
LINESIDE
EB (B1)
SPI
RST
RST
RL
PSA
PSR
RPS
OOF
FEC
RFCOH
RSPI
RRA channel
RX + DEM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Legend:
EB:
Errored Block
OOF:
Out of Frame
TL:
Transmitted level, is the level of the estimated transmitter power at the transmitter output.
The parameter is represented by two values:
an integer fixed value expressed in [dBm] defining the transmitted power value;
an integer offset value expressed in [dB] representing the variation with respect to the
nominal value.
RL:
Received level, is the level of the estimated received power at the input of the receiver. In 2
release both value will be reported. The parameter unit shall be expressed in [dBm] and
represented by the rounded nearest integer.
PSA:
Protection Switch Actual, represents any actual switch from a protected (working) channel to
a protecting (standby) channel
PSR:
Protection Switch Request, represents any activation of a switch initiation criteria which may
lead to automatic switches from a working channel to a standby channel and viceversa.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
293 / 458
K0 expected
(radio side)
J0 expected
(line side)
J0 transmitted
(line side)
K0 transmitted
(radio side)
J0 transmitted
(radio side)
RST
sink
RST
source
RPS
J0 expected
(radio side)
RFCOH
source
RRA channel (TX side)
Action to P:
J0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame)
J0 received value
RFCOH
source
RPS
RST
sink
RST
source
RRA channel (RX side)
Action to P:
K0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame)
K0 received value
J0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame)
J0 received value
NOTES:
J0 is represented by an integer of 15 digits (multiframe mode9 or one byte (insert character mode).
The default value for J0 is 0000 0001 (unspecified Regenerator Section Trace).
The methodology of J0 management is described in the following para.6.2.4.10.1 on page 295.
K0 is represented by 6 bits (inside a RFCOH byte).
K0_mismatch alarm is detected after 3 consecutive frame of erroneous K0 received, and it is used as
channel switching criteria.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In the system without protection, J0 only is managed.

K0 transmitted and K0 expected are fixed to the default value (K0 = 000000).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
294 / 458

6.2.4.10 Regenerator Section trace management

6.2.4.10.1 J0 management
The J0 byte located at # (1, 7) byte in an STM1 is allocated to a Regenerator Section Trace. This byte
is used to transmit repetitively a Section Access Point Identifier so that a section receiver can verify its
continued connection to the intended transmitter. Within a national network, or within the domain of a
single operator, this Section Access Point Identifier may use either a single byte (containing the code
0255) or the Access Point Identifier format as defined in clause 3/G.831. At international boundaries, or
at the boundaries between the networks of different operators, the format defined in clause 3/G.831 shall
be used unless otherwise mutually agreed by the operators providing the transport.
A 16byte frame is defined for the transmission of Section Access Point Identifiers where these conform
to the definition contained in clause 3/G.831. The first byte of the string is a frame start marker and includes
the result of a CRC7 calculation over the previous frame. The following 15 bytes are used for the transport
of 15 T.50 characters (international Reference Version) required for the Section Access Point Identifier.
The 16byte frame description is given in Table 4/G.707 below:
TABLE 4/G.707
16byte frame for Trail APId
Value (bit 1, 2, ,8)
Byte #
1
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
16
:
X
NOTES
1
C1C2C3C4C5C6C7 is the result of the CRC7 calculation over the
previous frame. C1is the MSB.
2
0XXXXXXX represents a T.50 character.
In the case of interworking of equipment implementing the STM identifier functionality (see N.B.) and
equipment employing the Regenerator Section Trace function, the latter shall interpret the pattern
0000001 in J0 as Regenerator Section Trace unspecified. This unspecified Regenerator Section
Trace can also be used if no use of the Regenerator Section Trace is made.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
STM identifier: C1
In earlier versions of the Recommendation, the content of bytes located at S (1, 7, 1) or [1,
6N+1] to S (1, 7, N) or [1, 7N] was defined as a unique identifier indicating the binary value of
the multicolumn, interleave depth coordinate, c. It may have been used to assist in frame
alignment.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
295 / 458
The Trail Trace Identifier is a 16_BYTE or 1_BYTE string used in SDH to detect misconnections inside
a communication network. A receiver has to validate the received string, in order to be sure that it has not
been corrupted by line errors, and compare it with an expected value, in order to verify that it is connected
with the right transmitter. If this is not the case, the receiver has to declare a TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)
alarm.
The 1_BYTE string is made by a single byte (containing the code 0255), while the 16_BYTE frame is
structured as previously described.
In the following, the algorithm to detect the TIM condition is described: this algorithm is applied at all SDH
layers in which Trail Trace Identifier feature is defined, so it is suitable for processing byte J0 (section trace)
and bytes J1, J2 (VCi path trace).
The algorithm behavior is shown in the following Fig. 184. :
DATA
16_BYTE
t, f, d
COMB
t, f, d
TIM1/16 machine
TIM 1/16
alarm
t, f, d
1_BYTE
1/16
t = true
f = false
d = dontcare
TIM
valid CRC7
TIMX machine
TIMX
alarm
valid CONST
Fig. 184. TIM algorithm

Incoming data are at the same time checked in order to find the standard 16_BYTE string with multiframe
alignment word and CRC7, or a fixed 16 times repeating 1_BYTE string. The preset 16/1 is needed to
tell the system if a 16_BYTE or a 1_BYTE string is expected. After validation process (correct CRC7 and
multiframe for the 16_BYTE string, same value 16 times for the 1_BYTE string), the received string is
compared with the expected one. If the preset 16/1 is set to 16, the comparison with 1 is always false;
if the preset 16/1 is set to 1, the comparison with 16 is always false.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each output (that can assume three possible values: false, true, dontcare if the received string has
not been validated) of the two comparisons is sent, through a COMB function, to a state machine (the
TIM1/16 machine) with four states: alarm, not alarm, and two intermediate states. False causes the state
machine moving towards the alarm state, true causes the state machine moving towards the not alarm
state, dontcare leaves the machine in the state it is.
In parallel, further control is performed by the TIMX machine, in such a way that if for 8x16 times neither
a fixed string nor a correct multiframe alignment word plus CRC7 can be found, the TIM alarm is anyway
declared (this feature is not required by standards at now).
The TIM algorithm described is fully compliant with the standard promptness requests about maximum
detection time and is able to detect all possible crossmisconnections:
expected 1_BYTE string, with a different 1_BYTE or a 16_BYTE string received;
expected 16_BYTE string, with a different 16_BYTE or a 1_BYTE string received;
expected 1_BYTE or 16_BYTE string, with a random string received.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
296 / 458

6.2.4.10.2 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) detector
Here below, TIM algorithm is described in more details:

a)
16_BYTE DETECTOR
As it can be seen in the following Fig. 185. , the 16_BYTE detector internally consists of four
functions:
a multiframe aligner in order to synchronize the machine itself to the 16_BYTE frame;
a CRC7 extractor, in order to calculate the CRC7 from the received frame;
a mismatch detector, in order to determine whether a received 16_BYTE frame is different from
the expected string;
a command generator, which drives the TIM1/16 machine, depending on the outputs of the
preceding two functions.
valid CRC7
CRC7 detector
8
DATA
sync
Multiframe Aligner
Command Generator
t, f, d
match
Mismatch detector
8
1/16
DATA EXP
Fig. 185. The 16_BYTE machine

b)
1_BYTE DETECTOR
The 1_BYTE detector internally consists of four functions:
a mod 16 counter, in order to generate an independent sync;
a 16 byte integrator, which detects whether the received bytes are of the 1_BYTE type;
a mismatch detector, in order to determine whether a received 1_BYTE is different from the
expected one;
a command generator, which drives the TIM1/16 machine, depending on the outputs of the
preceding two functions.
8
valid const
16 byte integrator
DATA
MOD 16 counter
sync
Command Generator
Mismatch detector
t, f, d
match
8
DATA EXP
1/16
Fig. 186. The 1_BYTE machine
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
6.2.4.10.3 K0 management
The K0 bits were defined in RFCOH section to perform a proprietary regenerator section trace internally
to the switching section.
K0 is represented by 6 bits (inside a RFCOH byte).
K0_mismatch alarm is detected after 3 consecutive frame of erroneous K0 received, and it is used as
channel switching criteria.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
297 / 458
6.2.4.11 ATPC Management
received power (absolute digital value to transmit towards the remote station in order to move the
Tx output power)
Rx failure (for remote Tx inhibition with reused system configuration)
ID_channel + ID_direction (for identification of ATPC channel in order to avoid the repeater bypass
of information and the exactly indication of transmission direction in case of N+0 eastwest
configuration)
They can be organized in registers of the CAN_BUS where the PRx and ID_ch information are transmitted
with higher priority than Rx fail.
They can be sent to the remote station by means 64Kb/s channel 1+1 protected. The information for each
channel received in remote station is sent to the relevant transmitter where the PRx information received
is compared to the thresholds set and it is decided to send up or down or hold commands to the RF
transmitter.
The Rx failure received in the Tx remote station is used to switch off the relevant modulator. It will be
switched on after Rx failure removal. Of course the Rx failure alarm is not comprehensive of propagation
alarms.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The ATPC management is performed between two RFCOH sections. That means that in a repeater is
present an ATPC management EAST side and an ATPC management WEST side that work independent
way. The block diagram represented in the following is valid for terminal configuration but can be
considered valid also for repeater configuration EAST (or WEST) side if RRA unit indication is substituted
with DROP_INSERT unit indication.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
298 / 458

The information regarding the ATPC functionality can be resumed in the following (for each channel):
RRA1 unit

RX1 unit
RX0 unit
RRA0 unit
Rx failure
PRX DETECTION
From AGC VOLTAGE
RFCOH EXTRACTION
MICROPROCESSOR
CAN_BUS
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
SERVICE
UNIT/ATPC
64 Kb/s
TX1 unit
RFCOH INSERTION
TX0 unit
MOD
On/off
MICROPROCESSOR
Rx failure
CAN BUS
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
SERVICE
UNIT/ATPC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 187. ATPC management
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
299 / 458
6.2.4.12 MC management on RX terminal

RRA 1
RRA 0
RFCOH
DEMUX 0
HITLESS SW
DEMUX 1
SWITCH
ATL_RFCOH1 ATL_RFCOH0
DEM 0
DEM 1
OR local + remote
OR local + remote
LOGIC
DEM 2
DEM 3
OR local + remote
OR local + remote
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 188. MC management on RX terminal
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
300 / 458
6.2.4.13 N+1 Repeater configuration

0, 1 channels
DEMODULATOR
ALIGNER
DROP / INSERT
MODULATOR
RFCOH management:
E1, F1, K0, DCCR, ATPC, DSI, MC,
CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5
NxWST management
2, 3 channels
DEMODULATOR
ALIGNER
DROP / INSERT
MODULATOR
RFCOH management:
E1, F1, K0, DCCR, ATPC, DSI, MC,
CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5
NxWST management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Optional: necessary in case of

WST dropinsert only, or in case
of K0 application requirement
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
301 / 458
6.2.4.14 MC management on Repeater configuration

DROP 1 WE
DROP 0 WE
OR operation on local
EWL and EWH alarms
DEMUX 0
DEMUX 1
SWITCH
MUX 0
MUX 1
SPLIT
DEM 0
DEM 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DEM 3
ED
Remote modem
alarms
Local modem alarms
ATL_rem RFCOH 0
ATL_rem RFCOH 1
ATL_loc RFCOH 0
ATL_loc RFCOH 1
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
302 / 458
6.2.5 Remote Inventory subsystem

See Fig. 167. on page 267, Fig. 168. on page 269 and Fig. 170. on page 271.
The Remote Inventory function permits the operator to retrieve information about any card or module
present on the equipment.
The available information, written in a 64x16 bit EEPROM on board (RI device), is: construction date, code
number, maker name, Cardtype, etc. (see details in the Operator Handbook).
The Remote Inventory function is present in all the cards.
The RI can be also present on some submodules assembled on the board (such as optical modules,
microcontrollers and so on).
The relevant data are transported by the CAN bus and are managed by the System Controller unit, which,
besides the information retrieved from the units RI device, add the slot identifier (ID) information.
The System Controller unit can also manage the visual indications of the board (LEDs) and some I/O
parallel commands/contacts/alarms that can eventually be transferred by means of the CAN bus.
The agent microcontroller on each unit manages the Remote Inventory, with the exception of Power
Supply Units and FANS units, that are supported by ESC Agent.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Remote Inventory of units submodules (Electrical/Optical module, XPIC board) are supported by the
respective Agent Unit.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
303 / 458
6.2.6 SAM 3+1 unit description
Refer to para.4.3.2.1 on page 118 for the unit physical views and operative information.
The physical dimensions are width 318 mm, depth 220mm and height 25 mm.
The assembly is composed by:
the FRONT PLATE, the MAIN BOARD and the ESCON daughter board; these parts, as a whole,
must be considered a single block from the maintenance point of view;
the FLASH CARD, that is supplied separately and is managed separately (see para.6.2.7 on page
307).
The information in the following should be meant as summary: the detailed description of most of these
functions has been given in previous subparagraph of main para.6.2.
Refer also to the UHRN block diagrams (Fig. 190. on page 312 and Fig. 191. on page 313) for main
interfaces between SAM 3+1 and the other boards of the system.
6.2.6.2 Assembly parts functions
[1]
Front plate
Fig. 45. on page 119 shows the front plate.
The following interfaces are available on the front plate:
Input/output Service Channel (26 pins SCSI);

Input /Output 2 Mbit WST (75 ohm unbalanced);
EOW telephone jack;
Alarm, house keeping, and Prx analog measure (40 pins SCSI);
QB3 (10base2) BNC and 10Base T RJ45;
F (RS232 cannon 9 pins).
Eight LEDs on the left of the unit (see Fig. 46. on page 120) indicate:
C.F. SAM card Fail or service fail and SC fail;

EOW line busy;
EOW line free;
MAJOR;
MINOR;
IND (Indicative);
ATTD (Attended);
ABN (Abnormal).
The ABN led indicates that a special operation has been performed through CT (for instance
a loopback) or that a SW download is in progress.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The IND led shows that the equipment is working in a particular state (for instance in protection
mode).
The ATTD led lights on after alarms memorization and lights off when the normal condition has
resumed.
Three push buttons are available on the unit used for Lamp test, Alarm cut off and reset.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
304 / 458

6.2.6.1 General
[2]
ESCON

The subunit ESCON performs the main functions:
Equipment controller
Radio controller
DCCR management
Remote Inventory management
Station alarms management
Summarizing alarms management
Housekeeping alarms management
The functions of Equipment Controller and Radio controller are described in para.6.2.2 on page 265.
The functions for the Remote Inventory management are described in para.6.2.5 on page 303.
[3]
MAIN BOARD
The main board performs the following main functions:
DCCR Mux /demux

Management of RSOH/RFCOH bytes;
I/O service channels and system telephone services;
Management of DSI, ATPC, MC bytes;
I/O 2 Mbit/s WST channel;
Switch and SW logic for 2 Mbit/s WST signal;
Power supply ANDOR function;
Digital Communication Channel (DCCR) management;
Multiplexing and demultiplexing of data communication channel for IDU/ODU information
swapping.
Alarm expansion
I/0 Housekeeping /Station alarms/ Summarizing alarms with relays to Fans Unit
Management of CANBUSes of IDU/REG shelf and IDU/EPS shelf
Management of parallel missing card alarms
Drivers and connectors for Equipment controller and Radio controller I/O circuits
Management of Power Supply and Battery alarms
Routering of SPRI register with a dedicate microcontroller.
Switch control logic for 1+1 HST (used in UHR/UHRC configurations, not used in UHRN
configuration);
Switch control logic for EPS protection in 1+1 System (used in UHR/UHRC configurations,
not used in UHRN configuration);
The RSOH switching criteria are shown in Tab. 56. herebelow.
This Sw logic is active in all configurations except 1+0.
All these alarms are duplicate for Regenerator 0 and Regenerator 1
Tab. 56. RSOH switching criteria alarms
SWITCH CRITERIA
MEANING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Regenerator Card Fail
ED
Los RRA
Loss of signal NRZ input RRA
MIRL
Internal clock loss
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
305 / 458

The RFCOH switching criteria are shown in Tab. 57. herebelow.

This Sw logic is active in all configurations except 1+0.
All these alarm are duplicate for Regenerator 0 and Regenerator 1.
Tab. 57. RFCOH switching criteria alarms
SWITCH CRITERIA
MEANING
DEM card fail

DEM fail
Function DEM fault
Regenerator missing
Unit modem missing
ATL
Internal clock loss
RRA card fail
RRA/Modem to replace
MIRR
Internal clock loss
HBER
High BER is activated by BER 105 103
EW
Early Warning is activated by BER in the range 1011 109
6.2.6.3 2Mbit/s WST

The processing circuit 2Mbit/s WST is present on the SAM main board.
At the input the 2 Mbit/s HDB3 WST signal is converted in the NRZ signal, and is split into two 2 Mbit/s
digital streams.
One 2 Mbit/s stream is inserted/ extracted to/from the RRA/Modem board 0 and another to/from the
Regenerator board 1 . On the RX side a switch selects the best of the two signals.
The WST protection function can be excluded.
6.2.6.4 Unit power supply
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to point [1] in para.6.4.3 on page 330.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
306 / 458
6.2.7 Flash Card description

The FLASH CARD contains, after the system SW loading and system configuration carried out through
the Craft Terminal:
1)
the whole Equipment software programs (susceptible to be downloaded toward the Supervisory
Units);
2)
the system configuration data. This configuration data set is named MIB and can be saved as
a file in the Craft Terminal (or OS) environment, as well as can be restored in the Flash Card
retrieving this file from the Craft Terminal (or OS);
3)
the routing configuration data (N.B.):
Local Configuration
OS Configuration
NTP Server Configuration
LAPD Configuration
Ethernet Configuration
RAP Configuration
MESA Configuration.
This configuration data set cannot be saved together with MIB data.
The presence of the FLASH CARD as individual part simplifies the maintenance procedure in case of
failure of the SAM 3+1 board, as explained in para.8.7.4.2 on page 394 and para.8.7.4.3 on page 395.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
This list is merely for general information only. Refer to the C.T. Operators Handbook for a more
precise list.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
307 / 458
6.2.8 LOGIC unit description
The physical dimensions are: width 300 mm, depth 240mm, and height 25 mm.
The information in the following should be meant as summary: the detailed description of of most of these
functions has been given in previous subparagraph of main para.6.2.
Refer also to the UHRN block diagrams (Fig. 190. on page 312 thru Fig. 193. on page 315) for main
interfaces between LOGIC and the other boards of the system.
Fig. 189. on page 310 shows the block diagram of the LOGIC unit.
[1]
Main functions
This unit performs the following main functions:
Tx and RX distributor
RPS Switch logic 3+1 ( with or without occasional traffic )
EPS Switch logic 3+1 ( with or without occasional traffic ), if EPS shelf equipped
Router for channels 2 and 3 and communications with EC
Insertion/extraction of data stream from/to IDU/ODU cables 2 and 3
Analog input/output phone channel party line
Two Output PRX analog measures for RX2 and RX3

The agent microcontroller manages the following parallel alarms and remote inventory data:
[2]
Missing:
RMD 2 and 3
PSU 2 and 3
Fans unit 1 ( located in slot 8)
PSU 0 and 1 of the subrack EPS, if equipped
EPS units 0,1, 2 and 3, if equipped
Card fail:
PSU 2 and 3
Fan 1, 2 and 3 of the Fans unit 1
EPS units 0,1, 2 and 3, if equipped
Remote inventory:
Fans unit 1
Front plate
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
On the front of unit (see Fig. 48. on page 123) there are:
two displays to indicate the number of the channel protected ( 1, 2 or 3; 0 if Channel 0 is

working as occasional traffic) at TX and RX sides;
one red led to indicate the Logic unit card failure;
one yellow Led indicating manual operation in progress at Rx side of LOGIC switch;
one 9 poles connector ( analog voltage PRX2 and PRX3)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
308 / 458


[3]
TX side
On FPGA is implemented a Mux to select the transmit channel to be paralleled to the standby path.
The Mux chooses, by KT command, one of four TX streams (38.88Mbit/s) from RRA/MODEM 0 to
3.
The KT command selects the TX channel on stby by Switch logic inside FPGA.
Delay cells are placed in TX side streams to compensate the static delay resulting from the different
cable length of the four STM1 signals. The delay can be set with one bitstep in the range 0 to 256
bits.
[4]
RX side
The nibble signal (38.88 Mhz) from RMD 0 (standby demodulator) is splitted and sent to the RMD 1/2/3.
[5]
Cable interface RT2 and RT3

The FPGA incorporates the block that manages data communications from/to cable 2 and cable 3
between ODU2 and IDUs RMD2/3.
When UHRN system is used in 1+1 expandable configuration, the unused alarms associated to
channels 2 and 3 are disabled.
[6]
Switch logic 3+1 RPS

The Switch logic is designed on cabled logic in order to have a fast switch, and all the criteria alarms
run on parallel wires. The switch logic 3+1 performs the following functions:
gets the switching controls from the normal and standby channels
determines the weights of different channels: priorities and simulations
protects and releases the channels in N+1 configuration
performs the lookout and incoming inhibit
manages the freezing operations
manages the manual forcing at Rx side and Tx side.

To perform the Rx hitless switch, the propagation alarms (carried from demodulator) are processed
by LOGIC. To exploit parallel function at TX side before the RX hitless switching, an information
exchange is necessary between TX and RX sections located in different station. That is obtained by
means of a DSI channel (64Kbit) inserted/extracted in specific bytes.
A CRC protection on DSI channel must is used to protect the message.
[7]
Switch logic 3+1 EPS

Please refer, for detailed description, to para.6.2.1.5.4 on page 255.
[8]
Unit power supply
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to point [1] in para.6.4.3 on page 330.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
309 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 189. LOGIC unit block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
310 / 458
To Agent
SAM 3+1
LED
Logic UNIT missing
Logic UNIT card fail
PSU 2/3 card fail & missing
RRAModem 2/3 missing
Fan 0/1/2 alarms

and Fan 1 missing
HC08
Logic
Unit
Agent
SPRI
NIBBLE
From RMD 1
To RMD 3
To RMD 2
To RMD 1
DELAY
256bit
DELAY
256bit
DELAY
256bit
NIBBLE
From RMD 2
From RMD 0
DELAY
256bit
NIBBLE
From RMD 3
NIBBLE
MIR_TXn
Prx2
D
A
Prx3
D
A
FPGA
SPRI
CANBUS
HC08
Router
RT2RT3
All card fail and missing EPSj
SPIL
KOP
NIBBLE
To RMD 0
To RRA/Modem 1/3
From RMD 0
MUX
Card fail and missing

PSU 0/1 of
Subrack EPS
Splitter
K display TX
ASIC
64kb/s RT3
D
A
data
Fast serial Bus
RMD 3
Cable 3 to/from
RMD 2
Cable 2 to/from
Alarms To EPS
subrack
.
KEPSj + Kocc.
Ck sync
RZ/HDB3
To/From party line SAM 3+1
D
A
64kb/s RT2
Mux/Demux
Switch
Logic
EPS
Switch commands
from RMD 1/2/3
and RMD 0

SPRI
to Agent Logic UNIT
Logic
RPS
Switch
Los Stby n
K_OPMAN
All card fail and missing EPSj
Yellow
led
K display RX
Test Point
KRPSn
Korifn
Krra
DSI 64 kb/s
to/from SAM3+1

6.3 Baseband subsystem

6.3.1 General and interconnection block diagrams
The baseband subsystem is composed by:
the SAM 3+1 unit, for the baseband functions explained in para.6.2.6 on page 304
the LOGIC unit, for the baseband functions explained in para.6.2.8 on page 308
and by the following types of units, whose operation is explained in the following:
the RMD unit type
the XPIC unit type
the Electrical/Optical modules
the EPS unit type
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The baseband interconnection block diagrams respectively at Tx side and Rx side are shown:
in Fig. 190. on page 312 and Fig. 191. on page 313, when EPS shelf is not equipped
in Fig. 192. on page 314 and Fig. 193. on page 315, when EPS shelf is equipped
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
311 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.363 W
STM1
ch 0
or occasional
STM1
ch 1
STM1
ch 2
STM1
ch 3
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
Elec/Opt
KOP
RST
RST
RST
RST
KEPS
RRA/MD 0
Logic UNIT
delay
delay
delay
delay
Elec/Opt
RRA/MD 1
Elec/Opt
RRA/MD 2
Elec/Opt
RRA/MD 3
Switch
Logic
EPS
RPS
Switch
Logic
Alarms
DSI
Alarms
RFCOH
DCCR
F
QB3
PIO
DCCR
SC
RFCOH
RFCOH
RFCOH
IF 1
IF2
IF 3
Fig. 190. UHRN Block diagram Up to 3+1 terminal configuration, without EPS, Tx side
01
312 / 458
2Mb/s

IF 0
To/from Switch logic
DSI
AUX
EOW
S.A.M. 3+1
SERVICE
MOD
5.1 Mb
DCCR
5.1 Mb
MOD
MOD
MOD
This switch is blocked by firmware in A position for 3+1 config. and B position for 4+0 config.
CMI
CMI
CMI
CMI
On RRA/MODEM 1,2,3
this switch is blocked by firmware
BLOCK DIAGRAM WITHOUT EPS, Tx SIDE
955.203.363 W
2Mb/s
IF0
IF1
IF2
IF3
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
SC
5.1 Mb
RRA/MD 0
RFCOH
SERVICE
5.1Mb
DCCR
DCCR
RRA/MD 1
RFCOH
RRA/MD 2
RFCOH
RRA/MD 3
RFCOH
This switch is blocked by firmware
DEM
SAM 3+1
DSI
AUX
EOW
DEM
DEM
DEM
PIO
QB3
delay
delay
delay
delay
delay
delay
RSOH
RSOH
RSOH
Krra
Ais forcing
RST
KRPS1
KRPS2
KRPS3
RSOH
Elec/Opt.
Elec/Opt.
Elec/Opt.
Elec/Opt.
KRPSn
SWITCH
LOGIC
RPS
Krra
CMI
CMI
CMI
CMI
To/From SAM
Alarms
ED
DSI
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SWITCH
LOGIC
EPS
STM1
ch 0 or
occasional
Logic UNIT
STM1
ch 1
STM1
ch 2
STM1
ch 3

BLOCK DIAGRAM WITHOUT EPS, Rx SIDE
Fig. 191. UHRN Block diagram Up to 3+1 terminal configuration, without EPS, Rx side
01
313 / 458
955.203.363 W
STM1
OCC
STM1
ch 1
STM1
ch 2
STM1
ch 3
Op or El
EPS3
Op or El
Op or El
Op or El
NRZ +CK
ED
EPS0
EPS1
EPS2
KEPSj
NRZ +CK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CMI
Delay
Delay
Delay
Delay
Elect.
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
Elect.
RRA/MD 0
RST
RST
RST
KOP
Switch
Logic
EPS
Switch
Logic
RPS
Alarms
DSI
Alarms
DCCR
SC
RFCOH
PIO
F
QB3
DCCR
RFCOH
RFCOH
RFCOH
5.1 Mb
SERVICE
MOD
5.1 Mb
DCCR
MOD
MOD
MOD
DSI
AUX
EOW
IF 1
SAM
IF 0
To/from Switch logic
IF2
IF 3
2Mb/s

This switch is blocked by firmware in A position for N+1 systems and in B position in N+0 systems
RST
KEPS
RRA/MD 1
Elec.
RRA/MD 2
Elec.
RRA/MD 3
LOGIC
CMI
CMI
CMI
On RRA/MODEM 1,2,3 this switch is blocked by firmware
BLOCK DIAGRAM WITH EPS, Tx SIDE
Fig. 192. UHRN block diagram Up to 3+1 terminal configuration, with EPS, Tx side
01
314 / 458
2Mb/s
IF0
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
RRA/MD 0
RFCOH
5.1Mb
SC
DCCR
DCCR
This switch is blocked by firmware
DEM
SAM
DSI
AUX
5.1Mb
RRA/MD 1
RFCOH
RRA/MD 2
RFCOH
RRA/MD 3
RFCOH
SERVICE
DEM
IF1
EOW
DEM
DEM
IF2
IF3
KRPS 1
KRPS 2
KRPS 3
RSOH
CMI
Elec.
CMI
Elec.
CMI
LOGIC
Elec.
CMI
RSOH
RSOH
RSOH
Krra
Ais forcing
RST
PIO
QB3
delay
delay
delay
delay
delay
delay
KRPSn
SWITCH
LOGIC
RPS
Krra
CMI
CMI
CMI
To/from
SAM
Alarms
955.203.363 W
DSI
ED
SWITCH
LOGIC
EPS
KEPS1
KEPS3
MSAIS
Generator
KEPSj
KEPS2
EPS line 0
Alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Kocc.
STM1
ch 1
ch 2
STM1
STM1
ch 3
Op or El
STM1 OCC
Op or El
EPS1
Op or El
EPS2
Op or El
EPS3

BLOCK DIAGRAM WITH EPS, Rx SIDE
Fig. 193. UHRN block diagram Up to 3+1 terminal configuration, with EPS, Rx side
01
315 / 458
6.3.2 RMD unit description
[1]

The physical dimensions are : width 318 mm, depth 220mm , height 30 mm.
Types and functions
As specified in Tab. 25. on page 114, the RMD unit is available in three different types:
128 QAM STM1 +1WST;
32 QAM STM1 +1WST (switchable STM0 without WST);
16 QAM STM1/STM0 +1WST.

in UHRN environment this board can be used only in STM1 modality
The RRA/MODEM board performs the following main functions:
Extraction /Insertion RSOH line side to/ from Service Board;
Hitless Switch (for 1+1 operation);

this function is not used in UHRN environment
Insertion/extraction RFCOH radio side to/from Service Board;
Modem QAM;
Radio cable interface;
Cross polar interference canceller with additional XPIC circuit.

[2]
Front plate
The RMD board front plate is shown in Fig. 50. on page 125 and Fig. 52. on page 126.
The following interfaces are available on the front plate:
IF In/Out Cable (Connector N 50 Ohm) towards lightning discharger;
a slot to house a STM1 electrical or optical module;
IF input for XPIC (the connector is not available when XPIC is not used);
IF output for XPIC (this output can be used like IF monitoring point when XPIC is not used);
the interface for the VIManager application (not used in Rel.2.0).

Two red LEDs are also present to indicate:
RT fail;
Regenerator fail.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[3]
RRA section description

According to the block diagram of Fig. 194. on page 317, the main functions performed are described
in the following:
Extraction /Insertion RSOH line side to/from SAM Board
Insertion/extraction RFCOH radio side to/from SAM Board
Hitless Switch not used in UHRN environment

The ASIC is a single chip implementation of Input/Output RRA Section (Regeneration Termination
Multiplexing according to G783), insertion/extraction of RFCOH bytes and Hitless switch not used
in UHRN environment. All these functions are bidirectional).
Functions not used in UHRN environment:
Hitless Switch performs, protection switching RPS in RX side and the line protection in Tx side.
Two delay cells, placed in rx and tx sides, compensate the static delays resulting from the
different paths of the two signals.
The delay can be set with one bit step in the range 0 to 256 bits.
In the RX side whenever both paths are aligned the phase comparator generates an OK
command, indicating that a switching operation can be performed.
The Switch command comes from logic switch placed on the service board.
Inside the ASIC there are the loopback connections (Line, RRA and RFCOH loopback).
The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is managed by the ASIC.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
316 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 194. RMD block diagram (RRA section)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
317 / 458
From
section
modem
NRZ
CK
SPLITTER
48/60
From
Power
supply
HDB3
HDB3
TX
RX
TX
155.520
Mhz
TCXO
RX
RST
2048Kb
To/from SAM
2048Kb
Micro S.U
RRA/modem
Descram
ALARMS
SPI
RRCan
ODU fail
RRA/MODEM fail
To section Modem
Rra/modem missing
RRA fail
Rra/modem card fail
RFCOH
5.1Mb
TX
5.1Mb
RFCOH
Loopback
only local
RX
RFCOH
2Mbit WST
39.744
vcxo
vcxo
RFCOH
2Mbit WST
39.744Mhz
Delay
0256
To
service
To RRA 1
ok
68HC08
From elastic
mem chan.1
38.880mhz
vcxo
Phase
comparator
Elastic .
mem
20bit
To RRA/Modem 1
From
RRA 1
Delay
Scramb .
0256 bits
ASIC
RST
TCXO
38.800
Mhz
RSOH DCC
scramb.
P/S
A.L.S
descramb.
NRZ
l
o
o
p
b
a
c
k
S/P
dcc RSOH
CK
TX fail/degrade
only optical
version
To RRA Protection
MODULE
EL/OPT
LOS
input
CMI ,from RRA EPS

(only electrical
version )
leds
CK
NRZ
39,744 or13,248 Mb
To/from Modem
NRZ

Electrical/Optical interfaces
The unit is a plugin type, inserted on the RMD board (see Fig. 49. on page 125); it performs the
STM1 electrical/optical bidirectional interface and is interfaced to RMD unit as shown in Fig. 194. on
page 317.
The physical dimensions are width 80mm, depth 80 mm, and height 15 mm.
The Input/Output STM1 signal with electrical or optical connector are accessed on the unit front panel
(see para.4.3.2.4 on page 128).
[5]
Electrical bidirectional interface

For further information refer to:
para.6.3.3 on page 322 (STM1 Electrical module description)
para.4.6.1.1 on page 156 (SDH interface characteristicselectrical)
Optical bidirectional interface

This interface can be used only if EPS shelf is not equipped.
para.6.3.4 on page 323 (STM1 Optical module description)
para.4.6.1.2 on page 156 (SDH interface characteristicsoptical)
128/32/16 QAM Modem description

Refer to the block diagram of Fig. 195. on page 320.
The input interface, composed by four parallel streams (data and CK signal) it is an internal interface
without access possibility from the outside.
In the single ASIC 1 the modulator functions are implemented: MLC code Mapping 16 or 128 QAM,
Digital filter.
In the ASIC 2 the demodulator functions are implemented: Digital filter, BSE, FSE XPIC and MLC
decoder.
MLC code error

128 QAM uses the MLC 6,292/7 coding, 32 QAM uses 4,625/5 coding, and the 16QAM uses
3.5/4 coding.
The scheme employs a set of binary codes of decreasing Hamming distance combined with
nested signal constellations of increasing Euclidean distance. Each code selects one of the two
subsets into which the corresponding constellation level is partioned. In this way a more efficient
use of redundancy is possible, since more powerful codes protect points a low Euclidean
distance, while less powerful codes are used for points at larger Euclidean distance. The coding
scheme uses both convolutional and blocks code.
The convolutional codes are the powerful ones in the scheme, while the block codes is a simple
parity check.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For 128 QAM:
the first level code/decoder convolutional is obtained by Viterbi decoder for the code 1/2
the second level code /decoder convolutional works with an other Viterbi for the code 5/6
the third level has a Wagner decoder for code 24,23.

For 32 QAM:
the second level has a Wagner decoder for code 24,23.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
318 / 458

[4]

For 16 QAM:
the second level code /decoder convolutional works with an other Viterbi for the code 7/8
the third level has a Wagner decoder for code 24,23.

To reduce the effects of burst errors due to the convolutional code, a suitable interleaving
technique has been implemented. The structure of the interleaving is based on the introduction
of distinct delay chains on the parallel signal stream.
The two signals, the in phase channel and the quadrature channel, after MLC code QAM
mapping, are sent at 1/T frequency to a 36 taps digital shaping filter. The two filtered signals
come out from the ASIC at 2/T frequency.
ASIC output signals are converted into analog signals by two D/A converters (10 bits) and, then,
a Butterworth filter (poles number 9, cutoff frequency : fco=0,53*Fs for 128QAM, fco=0,57*Fs
for 32QAM, fco=0,60*Fs for 16QAM).
BB/IF Modulation side

Two IF (420 MHz) inquadrature carriers are modulated by the two filtered signals by means
of two balanced mixers. Then, modulated carriers are summed in order to generate a QAM
modulated signal.
It is possible to squelch the modulator output in case of internal alarm or external command (the
least in case of remote RX failure in frequency reuse application).
It is possible to inhibit the modulation and to transmit only the carrier for maintenance purposes,
by means of HW presetting.
IF/BB Demodulation side

IF (1080 MHz) signal (from ODU) is BB converted by means of two mixers controlled by a carrier
recovery circuit.
Converted signal is then filtered by two Butterworth analog filters that have to guarantee proper
NFD for different modulation formats (poles number 9, cutoff frequency: fco=0,53*Fs for
128QAM, fco=0,57*Fs for 32QAM, fco=0,60*Fs for 16QAM).
Two A/D converters sample filters out coming signals.
Clock recovery
A Gardner synchronizer that controls a VCXO, which provides a sampling signal at 2/T
frequency, performs clock recovery.
Gardner algorithm is implemented in ASIC 2
Equalizer (FSE)
In ASIC 2 are implemented a synchronous equalizer (BSE Baud Spaced Equalizer), and a
Fractionally Spaced Equalizer (FSE).
FSE consists of a dual structure FIR filter and two mixers. Filtering section is 4D structured, (i.e.
it consists of four 19 taps filters), in order to implement phase and amplitude adaptive
compensation on BB signals; mixers perform gain adaptive recovery.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This table report the VCXO frequency in MHz referred at Modem Block diagram:
ED
VCXO A & B
VCXO C
128 QAM
50,5328
39,744
32 QAM
68,75
39,744
16 QAM
90,8434
39,744
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
319 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 195. RMD block diagram (MODEM section)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
320 / 458
IF Inp 1080 MHz

52 to 2 dBm
IFout=420 MHz
Pout=5 dBm
From section
RRA
DEM
loss
IF output/monitoring
To section
RRA
CK
NRZ
From IF
out Mod
39.744 or 13,248 Mb/s
IFinput
90
vco
1080Mhz
STM1/STM0
ck
STM1/STM0
to xpic
A/D
VCXO
A/D
VCXO
A
/3
D/A
Fail ASIC
function
To section RRA
VCXO
/3
STM1/STM0
CK
NRZ
420Mhz
TCXO
90
Inibit xpic
XPIC fail
EW
LBER
HBER
DEM card fail
DEM fail
MOD card fail
MOD fail
Unmodulated carrier
H/V
IF out
Mod

Spi
Spi /
Jtag
MLC
mem. interf.
Decoder Elastic Out
ASIC 2
Fail ASIC
function
D/A
STM1/STM0
To section RRA
FIR Q
FIR I
decision
All Xpic
Error I,Q
equalizer
gardner
/3
equalizer
ASIC 1
Spi
Spi /
Jtag
Nibble Elastic Rate interleaver,

encoderMLC,
delay store adapter mapper
+5.2V
5.2V
+3.5V
[6]
IDU/ODU Cable interface

On the RRA/MODEM board are installed the cable interfacing circuits, see Fig. 196. herebelow.
Through the IF cable the radio interface receives / transmits the signals from/to the outdoor unit.
The main functions are: Cable interfaces lightning protections and signals combiner/splitter.
The connection between ODU and IDU is realized through a coaxial cable with N type 50 Ohm
connectors,
The primary lightning protection is external to the IDU unit.
On the same coaxial cable interface the following signals are present: IF TX (420 MHz), IF RX (1080
MHz), 1024 Kbit service signal operating in a bidirectional way, DC voltage.
The signals are distributed over four paths through filters. Each filter selects the wanted signals.
The secondary lightning protections are realized with suppressor diodes and are meant as additional
protections for the outdoor unit against lightning discharges.
The diodes are installed as close as possible to the in/out connectors.
To receive/ transmit information and speech channel from/to ODU, two serial data streams are used.
On the same cable is present a 1024 Kbit/s HDB3 coded bidirectional signal. These signals are
converted into NRZ and CK codes for processing in the SAM unit.
IDU
BATTERY
HDB3
RZ
TO/FROM
SERVICES
RZ
HDB3
CABLE
420 MHz
1080 MHz
IF Tx
IF Rx
Fig. 196. IDU/ODU Cable interface

[7]
Unit power supply

For RMD0/1 refer to point [1] in para.6.4.3 on page 330.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For RMD2/3 refer to point [2] in para.6.4.3 on page 330.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
321 / 458
See Fig. 53. on page 128 (physical view) and Fig. 197. on page 322 (block diagram).
The electrical module can be housed in the RMD units, implementing the line interface for the electrical
STM1 (155.522 Mb/s).
One module can be housed in each card.
The module contains :
a CMI interface (CMI/NRZ decoder and NRZ/CMI encoder)

the clock recovery circuit
a Remote Inventory
[1]
CMI interface
[2]
RX side : the CMI electrical signal STM1 at 155.52 Mb/s coming from the line is NRZ decoded
(clock + data). The LOS alarm is revealed.
TX side : the NRZ signal coming from the port (data + clock) is CMI coded to be sent to the
line .
Remote inventory
The Remote inventory is implemented on an E2PROM. Inventory data as code, serial number,
construction date are stored inside the E2PROM and can be red through the CAN bus.
LOS
RX side
Coax Input
DATA RX
CMI/NRZ
DECODER
CLOCK RX
DATA TX
TX side
Coax output
NRZ/CMI
CLOCK TX
ENCODER
Remote
Rinv
TO CAN BUS
Inventory
ELECTRICAL MODULE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 197. STM1 electrical module
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
322 / 458

6.3.3 STM1 Electrical module description

6.3.4 STM1 Optical module description

See Fig. 54. on page 128 (physical view) and Fig. 198. on page 323 (block diagram).
The STM1 optical module is the optical physical interface for the RMD cards or EPS cards. Two types
are available according to the connector type. One module can be housed in each card.
Each module contains two optical components (Tx and Rx), two level adapters, the remote inventory and
the ALSrestart pushbutton.
[1]
Rx
The RX optical component converts the 155.52Mb/s STM1 optical signal into electrical, recoveries
the clock, detects the LOS alarm.
[2]
Tx
The TX optical component converts the electrical signal (data & clock) into optical, detects the
Laserfailure and Laserdegrade alarms. It receives the Lasershutdown command from the
controller and the ALSrestart command from a front pushbutton.
[3]
Remote inventory
The Remote inventory is implemented on an E2PROM. Inventory data as code, serial number,
construction date are stored inside the E2PROM and can be red through the CAN bus.
OPTICAL
INPUT
EDR
DATA RX
Level
Rx Opt. Module
ECKR
Adapter
CLOCK RX
LOS
EDT
ECT
DATA TX
Level
CLOCK TX
Adapter
OPTICAL
Tx Opt. Module
OUTPUT
Laser Fail
Laser deg.
Laser
Shutdown
ALSRestart
o
o
Remote
GND
Rinv
Inventory
TO CAN BUS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
OPTICAL MODULE
Fig. 198. STM1 optical module block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
323 / 458
6.3.5 XPIC board description
For a general description of Frequency Reuse working principle, please refer to para.3.4.5 on page 78.
The processing operated by RMD demodulator section+ XPIC board is, according to the XPIC board
block diagram depicted in Fig. 199. herebelow:
the IF signal is baseband converted, filtered and sampled by A/D converters at 2/T frequency
samples taken at t=KT are distinguished from those taken at t=(KT+T/2) by XPIC S/P converters by
means of 1/T frequency clock signal
XPIC is adapted by means of error signals coming from an internal equalizer and its central coefficient
is left spare for phase error recovering
XPIC output signal is sent to the internal equalizer way adder
XPIC way ASIC receives algorithm switch control signal and deep fading reset signal from equalizer
way ASIC.
STM1
ck
IF Inp 1080Mhz
A/D
15dBm
+
ASIC
Equalizer T/2
vco
/3
1080Mhz
STM1
Data and error I&Q
ck
Remote
90
inventory
Equalizer T/2
A/D
Spi
/ Jtag
50,53 Mhz
XPIC alarm
+5.2V
5.2V
+3.5 V
Xpic missing
Xpic card fail
IF Xpic loss
to RRA/Modem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 199. XPIC board block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
324 / 458


6.3.6 EPS board description

The physical dimensions are : width 300 mm, depth 240mm, and height 25 mm.
On the EPS units it is possible to insert by connector the optical interface unit (with automatic exclusion
of electrical interface alarms). The electrical lineside interface is fixed on the board and cannot be
extracted.
This unit performs the following main functions:
Bidirectional Lineside Optical or electrical STM1 input/output

CMI NRZ and NRZCMI conversion
NRZ side Tx and side Rx distributor
EPS switch
Please refer to para.6.2.1.5.4 on page 255 for the detailed description of EPS functionality.
There is no hardware difference between units used as EPS0 and EPS1,2,3: they are interchangeable
and the different way of working is defined by the unit position in the shelf:
Fig. 200. on page 327 depicts the way of working of unit used as EPS0
Fig. 201. on page 328 depicts the way of working of unit used as EPS1,2,3
According to such EPS block diagrams the main functions performed are described in the following:
TX side
An electrical CMI /NRZ conversion is performed with LOS input alarm generation. Complementary
operations are performed in the receive section.
From Logic Unit, EPS0 receives the Kepsj command that selects, by MUX, the transmit line to
be paralleled to the line 0 (one of four streams NRZ at155.520Mb/s from EPS0 to EPS3)
RX side
The EPS0 receive a 155Mb/s from standby demodulator and send by splitter to the respective EPS
1,2,3 unit.
From Logic Unit EPS 1,2,3 receive the respective KEPSn command.
When occasional channel is used and EPS is active, a framed STM1 generator is started to avoid
alarms propagation (only on EPS0 unit)
The frame of this generator is very simple. Every byte of the frame contain all 1 bits except the word
alignment (first 6 bytes A1A2).
STM1 Frame length is 19440 bits with frame frequency of 8KHz. The frame is 270 X 9 bytes:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
The Switch logic is located on the Logic Unit and is designed on cabled logic in order to allow a fast
switch.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
325 / 458
Electrical/Optical interfaces
Electrical bidirectional interfaces

The unit has two embedded STM1 electrical interfaces, one to be connected to the Electrical
module housed on the corresponding RRA/MODEM board in the IDU/REG shelf, the other to
be used as STM1 lineside interface.
For the description and characteristics of these interfaces refer to:
para.6.3.3 on page 322 (STM1 Electrical module description)
para.4.6.1.1 on page 156 (SDH interface characteristicselectrical)
Lineside Optical bidirectional interface

Equipping the suitable module, this interface can be used in alternative to the embedded
STM1 electrical interface for lineside use
para.6.3.4 on page 323 (STM1 Optical module description)
para.4.6.1.2 on page 156 (SDH interface characteristicsoptical)
Unit power supply

Refer to para.6.4.5 on page 333.
Alarms
In order to reduce the number of wire connection between EPS subrack and REG subrack, all alarms
are sent by serial fast bus inside the EPS0.
The following figure shows the architecture:
EPS 1
Parallel alarms
DATA
SYNC
CK
Fast serial Bus
To REG subrack
EPS 0
EPS 2
Parallel alarms
EPS3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When EPS0 is faulty or removed, the automatic switch logic EPS is disabled.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
326 / 458

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 200. Block diagram of EPS unit used as EPS0
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
327 / 458
Missing
STM 1
Interface
Optical
Switch Optical
Signal input
Equalizer
CMI/NRZ
To EPS3
To EPS1
To EPS2
Kocc
Splitter
155.52 MHz
Los input STM1

Mir 0
Laser RX
TX laser degraded
TX laser Fail
Card fail EPS0
Missing EPS0
FPGA
Parallel/serial
Kocc
KEPSj
j=4
AGENT
EPS line 0
HC08
EPS Command
Switches
RED LED
Card fail
Remote inventory
PSU0 and PSU1
Sync
Ck
data
Parallel alarms from EPS3
Can Bus
Fast serial Bus to

EPS Switch Logic.
(Logic Unit)
From RRAMODEM 0
CMI
Parallel Alarms EPS line 0
CMI/NRZ
Missing Optical
Interface
Remote inventory
EPS line 0
Remote inventory
Optical interface
All alarms ,command EPS line 0

for SPRI register
RRID
TCXO
Mir 0
270x9
Time Base
MSAIS generator
Al.Word
Insertion
Line side
Tx
To RRAMODEM 0
Scrambler
From EPS1
From EPS2
From EPS3
NRZ+CK
NRZ+CK
NRZ/CMI
CMI/NRZ
A.L.S
FPGA
Remote
inventory
MUX
KEPSj
The optical interfaces and SPRI alarms and remote inventory are managed by EPS0 Agent.
All EPS alarms include card fail/missing alarms and are managed by LOGIC unit.
PSU0 and PSU1 of EPS shelf remote inventories are managed by EPS0 Agent.
Line side
Rx
STM1 Occ
Output
Los RX
TX fail
TX degrade
Optical
STM1
Occ
Missing
Optical interface
STM1Occ
input
Los Inp

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 201. Block diagram of EPS unit used as EPS1,2,3
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
328 / 458
STM1n
Output
Los RX
TX fail
TX degrade
STM 1
Interface
Optical
Switch Optical
Signal input
Equalizer
CMI/NRZ
A.L.S
FPGA
Remote
inventory
CMI/NRZ
NRZ+CK
NRZ/ CMI
CMI
KEPSn
NRZ+CK
CMI/NRZ
Mir
Enable
Clock
Data input
Data output
+3.3V
gnd
Missing
NRZ+CK
To EPS0
EPS0
Parallel wire alarms to
Can Bus

Mir EPSn
From RRA/MODEMn
CMI
KEPSn
AGENT
EPSn
HC08
Los input STM1n

Mir n
Mir EPSn
Laser RXn
TX laser degraded n
TX laser fail n
Card fail EPSn
Missing EPSn
n=3
Missing Optical
Interface
Remote inventory
EPSn
Remote inventory
Opticalinterface
All alarms for RRID
RRAMODEM n
EEPROM
From EPS line
To RRA/MODEMn
The Optical interfaces SPRI alarms and remote inventory are managed by EPSn Agent.
All parallel alarms include cards fail and missing and are sent to EPS0
Missing
Optical
STM1
Missing
Optical interface
input
STM1n
Los Inp
Card fail
RED LED

6.4 Power supply subsystem

6.4.1 General
The power supply subsystem is designed to distribute both batteries BATT.A and BATT.B voltages to each
user circuits and to provide distribution redundancy to assure power supply in case of failure of a single
Power Supply Unit, with the exception of the single RT in ODU assembly and the associated MODEM part
in IDU/REG shelf.
6.4.2 Power Supply Unit description

Fig. 202. herebelow shows the unit block diagram.
Vbat out
BATT.A
+ Battery 1
GND
Battery 1
BATT.B
OR battery 1 and 2
Power
Supply
+5.2 V
+3.5 V
+ Battery 2
GND
5.2 V
Battery 2
Fail Supply Fail Battery
Fig. 202. Power supply unit block diagram

[1]
Input
The input battery is duplicated for redundancy protection (BATT.A and BATT.B).
Input power supply from batteries is provided through two 2x3pin subD connectors located on unit
front panel (see Fig. 55. on page 129 and Tab. 47. on page 162).
The input section comprises the protection circuits against battery voltage polarity reversal and the
inrush current control circuits to limit the inrush current when switching on.
A lowpass EMI filter follows, which prevent the harmonics generated by the power stage and
rectifier circuits from being fed back to the battery.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[2]
Output
The Power Supply Unit converts the battery voltage into the +5,2V; 5,2V; +3,5V and into the output
voltage for the ODU powering (one RT only).
Each output voltage has a separated decoupled output for parallel operation.
Output voltages are sent to shelfs backpanel, where they are distributed to the user circuits.
The output voltage for the ODU powering has the same value of the input voltage reduced by the
parallel diode voltage drop.
The power stage circuit converts the battery voltage into a rectangular signal featuring a constant
period and a dutycycle that varies as a function of the signal received from the power stage control
circuit. The output voltages are stabilized by pickingup a part of the output voltage and comparing
it to a reference voltage in a comparator circuit. The error signal thus obtained controls the voltage
stability via the power stage control circuit.
The power supply circuit comprises overvoltage, downvoltage and overload protection.
A power supply fault sets the PSU alarm and switchesoff the correct operation green LED indicator.
A battery fail sets the battery alarm.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
329 / 458
[3]
Power Supply Unit Technical Specification
Input Voltage
48 to 60 V dc accepted 40.5 to 72 V dc)
Maximum Output Power
98 W
Secondary power supply voltages
+ 5.2 V and +5.2 V (diode)

5.2 V and 5.2 V (diode)
+3.5 V and +3.5 V (diode)
Output to ODU
Input battery voltage with reduction of 2V

(The ODU is powered by the parallel battery voltage)
6.4.3 Power supply distribution in IDU/REG shelf

With reference to PSU and RMD numbering in IDU/REG shelf, please refer to Fig. 42. on page 111.
[1]
Distribution from PSU0/1 and service battery input for SAM 3+1
Fig. 203. on page 331 shows power supply distribution carried out through PSU0 and PSU1.
As shown, PSU0 and PSU1 give power supply:
with a redundant distribution scheme to:
SAM 3+1 unit (and its daughter board ESCON)
LOGIC unit
FANS0 unit
the RRA part of RMD0 and RMD1 units (and their STM1 Electrical/Optical modules,
if equipped) (N.B.)
without a redundant distribution scheme to:
the MODEM and IF parts of RMD0 and RMD1 units (and their daughter boards XPIC,
if equipped) (N.B.)
The same Fig. 203. shows also the optional service battery input for SAM 3+1 unit. The
corresponding input is physically present on FANS0 Rack Lamp connector (see Fig. 57. on page
130 and Tab. 48. on page 164).
[2]
Distribution from PSU2/3

Fig. 204. on page 332 shows power supply distribution carried out through PSU2 and PSU3.
As shown, PSU2 and PSU3 give power supply:
with a redundant distribution scheme to:
FANS1 unit
the RRA part of RMD2 and RMD3 units (and their STM1 Electrical/Optical modules,
if equipped) (N.B.)
without a redundant distribution scheme to:
the MODEM and IF parts of RMD2 and RMD3 units (and their daughter boards XPIC,
if equipped) (N.B.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
When a PSU switch is off (or in case of failure of the PSU):
the voltage toward the corresponding RT is switched off
the MODEM part of the corresponding RMD board is switched off
the RRA part of the corresponding RMD board is powered by the twin PSU board (twin
PSU boards are PSU0/1 and PSU2/3 according to Fig. 42. on page 111).
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
330 / 458

Tab. 58. Power Supply Unit specifications
Logic UNIT
48/60 V
OR battery 1 and 2
+ Battery 1
GND
to RT0
+5.2V
48/60 V
Battery 1
+3.5V
Power
Supply 0
+ Battery 2
GND
IF
interface
RT0
RMD0
5.2V
XPIC
MODEM
48/60 V
Battery 2
RRA
E/O
interface
Fail Supply Fail Battery
+5V
S.A.M 3+1
ESCON
5V
+ Battery 1
GND
Battery 1
48/60 V
RRA
Power
Supply 1
+ Battery 2
+5.2V
+3.5V
48/60 V
GND
Battery 2
E/O
interface
5.2V
MODEM
RT1
IF
interface
48/60 V
OR battery 1 and 2
Fail Supply
to RT1
Fail battery
XPIC
RMD1
Fans
Unit 0
Rack Lamp
Connector
optional
Service Battery
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 203. UHRN IDU/REG shelf Power distribution Block diagram for PSU 0 and 1
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
331 / 458
RMD2
to RT2
+ Battery 1
GND
48/60 V
Battery 1
Power
Supply 2
+ Battery 2
GND
IF
interface
+5.2V
RT2
+3.5V
5.2V
XPIC
MODEM
48/60 V
RRA
Battery 2
E/O
interface
Fail Supply
Fail Battery
+5V
Fans Unit 1
+ Battery 1
48/60 V
GND
Battery 1
Power
Supply 3
+ Battery 2
48/60 V
GND
Battery 2
+5.2V
E/O
interface
RRA
MODEM
+3.5V
XPIC
5.2V
48/60 V
OR battery 1 and 2
IF
interface
RT3
RMD3
to RT3
Fail Supply
Fail battery
Fig. 204. UHRN IDU/REG shelf Power distribution Block diagram for PSU 2 and 3
6.4.4 Power supply distribution in ODU assembly
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to point [6] on page 339.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
332 / 458

48/60 V
OR battery 1 and 2
6.4.5 Power supply distribution in IDU/EPS shelf

With reference to PSU and EPS numbering in IDU/EPS shelf, please refer to Fig. 59. on page 132.
Fig. 205. herebelow shows power supply distribution carried out through PSU0 and PSU1 of EPS shelf.
EPS shelf power supply is completely independent from that of REG shelf, and uses the same types of
PSU units, described in para.6.4.2 on page 329.
As shown in Fig. 205. , PSU0 and PSU1 give power supply to all equipped EPS units with a full
redundant distribution scheme (one PSU is able to give power supply to a fully equipped EPS shelf,
nevertheless two PSU units are necessary for reliability reasons).
+ Battery1
EPS 0
+5.2V
GND
Optical
interface
Battery1
+3.5 V
Power
Supply 0
+ Battery 2
GND
Battery2
5.2V
EPS 1
48/60 V
Optical
interface
Fail Supply
Fail Battery
EPS 2
+5v
Optical
interface
5v
EPS 3
+ Battery1
Optical
interface
GND
Battery1
Power
Supply 1
+ Battery 2
+5.2V
48/60 V
GND
Battery2
+3.5 V
5.2V
Fail Supply
Fail battery
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 205. UHRN IDU/EPS shelf Power distribution Block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
333 / 458
6.5 FANS Subsystem
Fig. 206. herebelow shows the unit block diagram.

In order to obtain high reliability three fans have been used with separate alarms.
The following hardware priority alarm levels are given:
two fans not working
MAJOR alarm
one fan not working
MINOR alarm
N.B.
From the software point of view, there is no discrimination between fans MAJOR and MINOR
alarms.
Pins of Station Alarms connector placed on the units front are connected, via the backpanel, with
Housekeeping/Remote Alarms interface of SAM 3+1 board (see Fig. 168. on page 269).
Refer to para.4.6.9 on page 164 for connector pinout.
Lamp group connections
To/From
SAM
Fan Al. 1
Gen. Al.
60 sec
delay
OR
Fan Al. 2
Remote
Inventory
Fan Al. 3
Loss
transition
detector
5V
Loss
transition
detector
5V
Loss
transition
detector
5V
fan 1
Al.
fan 2
Al.
Front panel Lamp

cannon connector
9 pin
fan 3
Al.
Gen. Al.
RIBUS
Fan 1 Al.
RIBUS
Interface
Fan 2 Al.
To/From
SAM
Fan 3 Al.
Backplane connectors
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 206. Fans unit block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
334 / 458


6.6 ODU Subsystem

6.6.1 Introduction
Please refer to para.4.5 on pages 140 thru 155 for the ODU assembly composition, equipping rules and
physical views.
The ODU transceiver operates from 6L up to 38 GHz. The mechanical structure, consists of an outdoor
waterresistant cabinet (according to IP55 specification) suitable for outdoor installation.
The mechanical solution is unique in the whole 18 to 38 GHz frequency band, with minor changes in the
6 up to 15 GHz band.
Two cabinet types are available: the first type contains a single RT, the second type contains a couple of
RT.
The 1+1/2+0 cabinet features one output port with one or two waveguides. This characteristics will permit
to use the same cabinet (with two distinct parts numbers) for all configurations with one embedded single
or dual polar antenna and with a remote antenna.
Fig. 207. on page 336 shows the ODU Radio block diagram.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each Radio Transceiver (ODU) is equipped with the following main components:
Transceiver unit
description starting on page 337
Local Oscillator
Branching
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
335 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 207. ODU Radio block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
336 / 458
1 or 2 HST
Factory Test
UART
cable
Connection to
phone and service unit
Alc
Vpout
LO
Local Loop

Local
Loop
6.6.2 Transceiver unit description

The Transceiver unit consists of:
RF Rx and RF Tx circuits
IF Tx and IF Rx circuits
Service unit
DC/DC Converter power supply
and, as independent module:
Local Oscillator
These components are shown in the following figures:
Fig. 76. on page 155 shows the Transceiver + Local Oscillator Assembly
Fig. 74. on page 154 shows the Transceiver Assembly (RF Rx and RF Tx circuits, IF Tx and IF Rx
circuits, Service unit, DC/DC Converter)
Fig. 75. on page 155 shows the Local Oscillator Assembly.
[1]
IDUODU connection
The Transceiver inside the ODU module is connected to the IDU side (RMD) through a IDUODU
interconnecting coaxial cable (see point [6] on page 321). The interconnecting coaxial cable
transports two IF Tx and Rx signals along with the service signal and the RT modules remote power
supply.
[2]
IF Tx and RF Tx circuits
The 420 MHz IF Tx signal is extracted from the cable interface circuit, it is amplified and forwarded
to the IF Converter which will convert it to a higher IF signal. This new IF frequency is further
converted to the RF channel frequency.
Finally, the RF Converter will convert the IF signal to the required RF channel frequency.
The RF signal is filtered through the RF Tx filter and sent to the antenna port on the channel circulator
related to the RF Branching circuit.
[3]
RF Rx and IF Rx circuits
The RF Rx signal inputting from the antenna is first filtered through the RF Branching filter and then
amplified through a low noise figure preamplifier. The RF signal is sent to the down converter where
it will be converted to the IF frequency of 1080 MHz which is necessary for the demodulation function.
The service circuit sends the IF Rx signal to the Demodulator inside the IDU module.
[4]
ATPC function
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The 9600USY Transmitter is fitted with the ATPC whose function is illustrated in para.3.4.3 on page
75.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
337 / 458
[5]
Radio Service Interface
The main functions are:
Filtering to separate the four incoming signals

Cable interface and lightning protections
Management of data communications, control signals and speech channel
HST switch control (x2), not used in UHRN environment
Alarms
Power Supply conversion and distribution
A driver controller, inside the EPLD, allows fullduplex serial communication with the IDU unit, at 1024
Kbit/s HDB3 coded data rates.
The alarms, commands and all other information regarding the functionality of the ODU unit are arranged
in the registers of the EPLD, connected to the SPRIBUS (see .Fig. 208. ). Each register can take a
maximum of 64 bits.
The Portable Service Unit can be connected to the RS232 interface (LEMO connector) and is used for
maintenance and RF signals check (see para.8.3.3 on page 376).
The Fig. 208. shows the block diagram of Radio Service Interface circuit.
to IF and RF UNITS
ALARMS,
CONTROL
+ 48/60 V
To dc/dc
converter
SPRI
HST Control (x2)

To Local Oscillator
SPI
UART
HDB3
RS232
EPLD
SPLITTER
Connection
to portable
service unit
Phone
IF IN/OUT
CABLE
HDB3
420 MHz to IF TX unit
1080 MHz from IF RX unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 208. Service Block Diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
338 / 458

Through the IF cable the Radio Service Interface receives and sends service signals to the IDU RMD unit.
[6]
Power supply distribution in ODU assembly

The ODU power distribution scheme for a single RT is summarized in Fig. 209. herebelow
_
3,3/5/6/12 Volt
Service
LO
48/60 V
3,3/6/12 Volt
IF
Tx
5/6/5 Volt
RF
48/60 V
12/+6 V
Tx
12 V
RF
switch
3,3/6/12 Volt
IF Rx
DC/DC Converter
RF
switch
5/5 Volt
RF Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 209. ODU Power distribution (single RT)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
339 / 458
The local oscillator unit performs the following functions:
Supply the TX and RX Local oscillator to the subharmonic converter
Supply the Local oscillator for Local Loop (maintenance operations)
Supply the first conversion Local oscillator in order to generate the IF transmission signal.
The various output signals are obtained by multiplying a proper number of times the signal coming from
a synthesized VCO controlled by a13 MHz TCXO.
Due to subharmonic converters being utilized, the local oscillator for Tx and RX operates at a frequency
that is one half of the final frequency conversion.
The same LO unit also contains an oscillator used for the first frequency conversion needed in the
transmission chain, and an oscillator at fixed frequency for the RF local loop maintenance operations.
The local loop oscillator generates a frequency shift between Tx and Rx.
The L.O. block diagram is shown in Fig. 210.
LO LOCAL LOOP
:N
LO TX
Bus
TCXO
Xn
:N
Multiplier
Remote
Inventory
Bus
Bias
LO FIRST CONVERSION
~
Bus
Data
Clock
LE
Unlock
All.
LO RX
IF LO
IF TX
:N
IF (420 MHz)
Bus
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 210. L.O. block diagram
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
340 / 458

6.6.3 Local Oscillator description
6.6.4 RF Branching description

The RF branching, inside the waterresistant housing, feature various different configurations.
All branchings terminate, via waveguides, onto an antenna circulator, which separates the transmit section
from the receive section, thus allowing their connection to the antenna.
N.B.
The following descriptions and Figures are relevant to 18 GHz ODU configurations.
The RF branchings available in UHRN configuration are:

[1]
1+0 Compact branching

See Fig. 211. herebelow. The RF signal coming from the transmitter is connected to the antenna via
point (1) of the Tx filter. Likewise, on the receive side the RF signal inputs the receiver via point (2)
of the Rx filter.
[2]
1+1/2+0 Homopolar frequency diversity branching

See Fig. 212. on page 342. The frequency diversity RF signal coming from the transmitters input the
antenna via points (1) and (2) of the respective Tx filters. Likewise, on the receive side the RF signal
input the receivers via point (3) and (4) of their respective RX filters.
[3]
1+1/2+0 Crosspolar / Frequency Diversity / Frequency Reuse 1 cabinet branching

See Fig. 213. on page 342. Heteropolar branching is divided in two independent parts, each with
individual antenna connections.
The RF signal coming from the transmitter Tx1 is connected to the antenna via point (2) of the Tx
filter. Likewise, on the receive side the RF signal input the receiver via point (1) of the Rx1 filter.
The RF signal coming from the transmitter Tx0 is connected to the antenna via point (4) of the Tx
filter. Likewise, on the receive side the RF signal input the receiver via point (3) of the Rx0 filter.
TX
RX
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 211. 1+0 not ext. branching assembly
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
341 / 458
TX1
TX0

RX1
RX0
Fig. 212. 1+1/2+0 Homopolar frequency diversity branching assembly
RX1
TX1
RX0
TX0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 213. 1+1/2+0 Crosspolar Freq. Diversity / Freq. Reuse 1 cabinet branching assembly
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
342 / 458
7 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

7.1 Introduction
Data indicated in the handbook must be considered as standard values
Data indicated in the contract must be considered as guaranteed values
This chapter describes the technical characteristics of the 9600USY in the configurations: UHRC, UHR,
UHRN and WMSN.
Please remind that in UHRN configuration:
STM0 signal is not supported
1+1 HST configuration is not envisaged.

The paragraph regarding Optical Safety applies to UHRN and UHR/UHRC configurations only.
General Characteristics
on page 344
Transceiver Characteristics
on page 349
Characteristics of IF and RF connections
IDUODU interconnection
Integrated antenna characteristics
ODU to external antenna connection
Modem characteristics
on page 350
Regenerator characteristics
on page 352
Protection characteristics
on page 353
Power supply characteristics
on page 354
Mechanical characteristics
on page 354
Environmental characteristics
General characteristics
Mechanically active substances for IDU
ETS 300019 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations
ETS 300019 Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations
Storage
Transportation
Optical Safety
on page 355
on page 355
on page 356
on page 358
on page 360
on page 362
on page 363
In the following tables, points A A and C C are according to what defined in the relevant ETSI
specification:
A
TX
A
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RX
RF TX
FILTER
B
RF RX
FILTER
TX
BRANCHING
RX
BRANCHING
TX
FEEDER
RX
FEEDER
Fig. 214. ETSI Reference points
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
343 / 458
6L GHz
13 GHz
15 GHz
18 GHz
Version
6U GHz
23 GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
11 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
SPLIT MOUNT (IDU+ODU)
Station type
Regenerator Terminal Wireless Multiservice Node (One side or Two sides)
Configuration
1+0
Compact / 1+0 Exp./1+1 HST/1+1/2+0/2+1/3+0/3+1/4+0 F.D.
Space diversity
YES (hitless switch) only for 1+1 HST
6L GHz
Transmission
capacity
From 1xSTM1 H or V to
13 GHz
15 GHz
18 GHz
6U GHz
4xSTM1 H & V
23 GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
11 GHz
From 1xSTM1 H
From
or V
1xSTM1
to 4xSTM1 H & V
H or V
or
to
From 1xSTM0 H or 4xSTM1
V to
H&V
2xSTM0 H & V
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
From 1 x STM1 H or V to 4 x STM1 H & V or 1xSTM0 H or V to 2xSTM0 H & V
6L GHz
13 GHz
User interfaces
15 GHz
18 GHz
6U GHz
23 GHz
155.520 Mb/s (STM1)

139.264 Mb/s (PDH)
3 x 34.368 / 3 x 44.736 Mbit/s
21 x 2.048 Mbit/s
Service channels
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
11 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
Optical ITUT Rec. G.957 G.958
1x2 Mbit/s WST in RFCOH (STM1 only)

Omnibus voice channel (E1) DTMF (Q.23)
2x64 Kb/s G.703 codirection
1x64 Kb/s V11 contradirectional
1x9.6 Kb/s RS232
TMN channel (D1D3, D4 D12)
UHR System
transit time:
128 QAM STM1
128 QAM STM0
16 QAM STM1
16 QAM STM0
ED
8 GHz
Electrical ITUT Rec. G.703
155.520 Mb/s (STM1)

Auxiliary channels
7 GHz
56 sec.
168 sec.
25 sec.
75 sec.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
344 / 458

7.2 General Characteristics
6L GHz
6U GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
11 GHz
128
128
128
128
128
5.96.4
(F383)
5.676.17
OIRT
6.47.1
(F384)
7.17.9
(F385)
ANNEX
1,3L,3H,4
REC1L,1M,1H
7.7 8.3
8.275 8.5
7.9 8.4 (OIRT)
(F386) ANNEX
1,3,4
10.711.7
(F387)
+24
+24
+22
+22
+24
+22
+22
+22
+22
+22
103 BER TH 128 QAM (A)

(Received power) dBm STM1
73.5 typ.
72.5 gua.
73.5 typ.
72.5 gua.
73.0 typ.
72.0 gua.
73.0 typ.
72.0 gua.
73.0 typ.
72.0 gua.

N.A.
N.A.
77.5 typ.
76.5 gua.
77.5 typ.
76.5 gua.
N.A.

72.0 typ.
70.5 gua.
72.0 typ.
70.5 gua.
71.5 typ.
70.0 gua.
71.5 typ.
70.0 gua.
71.5 typ.
70.0 gua.

N.A.
N.A.
76.0 typ.
74.5 gua.
76.0 typ.
74.5 gua.
N.A.
15/18
15/18
15/18
15/18
15/18
1012
1012
1012
1012
1012

MODULATION: QAM STATES
RF CHANNEL (GHz)
TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER
(STANDARD W ATPC) dBm (A) *

TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER
(STAND. W/O ATPC dBm (A) *
MAX INPUT POWER at antenna

port (Received dBm)
dBm 103/1010BER
BACKGROUND BER
at nom. PRX

May support both STM1 and STM0 transmission

the following bands are supported for STM0/STM1: Rec 1L, Rec 1M, Rec 1H, ANNEX4
*Tolerance: 0.5 dB at ambient temperature; 1.5 dB in temperature range 33C +50C ODU
5C 50C IDU
Within F385
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
Points A A and C C according to what defined in the relevant ETSI specification
A.P. Alternate Polar
NBF Narrow Band Filters
WBF Wide Band Filters
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
345 / 458
15 GHz
18 GHz
23 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
128
128
128/16
128/16
128/16
128/16
16
12.75
13.25
(F497)
RF CHANNEL
(GHz)
14.415.35 17.719.7 21.223.6 24.526.5 27.529.5 37.039.5

(F595)
(F748)
(F748)
14.515.35
2223.6
38.640
(F636)
(F637)
(F749)
ANNEX15
TRANSMITTER OUTPUT
POWER (STANDARD WATPC)
128 QAM dBm (A) *
+22
+22
+20
+20
+20
+19
N.A.
TRANSMITTER OUTPUT
POWER (STAND. W/O ATPC)
128 QAM dBm (A) *
+20
+20
+18
+18
+18
+18
N.A.
TRANSMITTER OUTPUT
POWER (STANDARD W ATPC)
16 QAM dBm (A) *
N.A.
N.A.
+21
+21
+21
+20
+18
TRANSMITTER OUTPUT
POWER (STAND. W/O ATPC)
16 QAM dBm (A) *
N.A.
N.A.
+19
+19
+19
+19
+18

71.5 typ
70.5 gua
71.5 typ
70.5 gua
72.0 typ
71.5 typ
71.5 typ 71.0 typ
71.0 gua 70.5 gua 70.5 gua 70.0 gua
N.A.

76.0 typ
75.0 gua
76.0 typ
75.0 gua
76.5 typ 76.0 typ 76.0 typ 75.5 typ

75.5 gua 75.0 gua 75.0 gua 74.5 gua
N.A.

N.A.
N.A.
78.5 typ 78.0 typ 78.0 typ 77.5 typ 76.5 typ
77.5 gua 77.0 gua 77.0 gua 76.5 gua 75.5 gua

N.A.
N.A.
83.0 typ
82.0gua

70.0 typ
68.5 gua
70.0 typ
68.5 gua
70.5 typ 70.0 typ 70.0 typ 69.5 typ

69.0 gua 68.5 gua 68.5 gua 68.0 gua
N.A.

74.5 typ
73.0 gua
74.5 typ
73.0 gua
75.0 typ 74.5 typ 74.5 typ 74.0 typ

73.5 gua 73.0 gua 73.0 gua 72.5 gua
N.A.

N.A.
N.A.

N.A.
N.A.
15/18
15/18
15/18
15/18
15/18
15/18
15/18
1012
1012
1012
1012
1012
1012
1012
MAX INPUT POWER received

at antenna port (dBm)
103/1010BER
BACKGROUND BER at nom.
PRx
82.5 typ 82.5 typ 82.0 typ 81.0 typ

81.5 gua 81.5 gua 81.0 gua 80.0 gua
* Tolerance: 0.5 dB at ambient temperature; 1.5 dB in temperature range 33 C +50 C ODU

5 C 50 C IDU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
Points A A and C C according to what defined in the relevant ETSI specification

WBF Wide Band Filter
NBF Narrow Band Filter
A.P. Alternate Polar
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
346 / 458

MODULATION: QAM STATES
13 GHz
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

13 GHz
15 GHz
6L GHz
6U GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
11 GHz
18 GHz
23 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
Frequency reuse
128 QAM (XPIC)
YES
XPIC improvement
at 104 dB
t.b.d.
XPIC improvement
at 106 dB
16 for symmetrical degradation

(3 dB less for unbalanced degradation)
XPD antenna for

cochannel
application dB
XPIC filters
38 (6 to 11 GHz)
30 (13 to 28 GHz)
19 taps
XPI ratio lock in dB
=7
XPI ratio lock out dB
=4
frequency reuse not applicable for 38 GHz
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
347 / 458
6U GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
11 GHz
C/I dB for 1 dB threshold

degradation @ 10E3
128 QAM:
cochannel STM1&STM0
adj. Chan. Mono lateral STM1
adj. Chan. Mono lateral STM0
31
6.5
N.A.
31
12.0
N.A.
31
6.5
3.5
31
6.5
3.5
31
12.0
N.A.

degradation @ 10E6
128 QAM:
cochannel STM1&STM0
adj. chan. mono lateral STM1
adj. chan. mono lateral STM0
33
5
N.A.
33
10
N.A.
33
5
2
33
5
2
33
10
N.A.
C/I dB for Error Free

128/16 QAM STM1&STM0 dB
BER Curve:
STM1 128 QAM
= 32 / N.A.
Fig. 218.
pg.365
Fig. 218.
pg.365
Fig. 218.
pg.365
Fig. 218.
pg.365
Fig. 218.
pg.365
N.A.
N.A.
Fig. 218.
pg.365
Fig. 218.
pg.365
N.A.
STM0 128 QAM

degradation @ 10E3 128/16
QAM:
cochannel STM1&STM0
adj.chan.mono lateral STM1
degradation @ 10E6 128/16
QAM:
cochannel STM1&STM0
13 GHz
15 GHz
18 GHz
23 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
31
6.5
31
6.5
3.5
31/22
4.5/11
3.5/9
31/22
6.5/12
3.5/9
31/22
6.5/12
3.5/9
31/22
6.5/12
3.5/9
N.A./22
N.A./12
N.A./9
33/N.A.
5/N.A.
2
33/25
3/8
2/6
33/25
5/9
2/6
33/25
5/9
2/6
33/25
3/9
2/6
N.A./25
N.A./9
N.A./6
3.5
33/N.A.
5/N.A.
2
C/I dB for error free 128/16 QAM

cochannel STM1&STM0dB
BER curve:
STM1 128 QAM
STM0 128 QAM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM1 16 QAM
STM0 16 QAM
ED
= 32/25
Fig. 218.
Fig. 218.
Fig. 218.
Fig. 218.
Fig. 218.
Fig. 218.
pg.365
pg.365
pg.365
pg.365
pg.365
pg.365
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
Fig. 219.
pg. 366
Fig. 219.
pg. 366
Fig. 219.
pg. 366
Fig. 219.
pg. 366
Fig. 219.
pg. 366
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
348 / 458

6L GHz
7.3 Transceiver Characteristics

Please refer to the ODU TECHNICAL HANDBOOK (REF.[A]on page 412).
7.4 Characteristics of IF and RF connections

7.4.1 IDUODU interconnection
6L GHz
13 GHz
Type of cable
(1 for Transceiver)
15 GHz
18 GHz
23 GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
11 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
Filotex ET390998 for length up to 220 m

Cellflex for length up to 250 m
Cellflex 3/8 for length up to 350 m
IDU/ODU Connectors
Lightning protection
6U GHz
N type 50 ohm
Discharger 5KV 10/700 sec. CCITT K17
7.4.2 Integrated antenna characteristics

7.4.3 ODU to external antenna connection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
349 / 458
MODEM
13 GHz
Coding MLC
128 QAM
16 QAM
18 GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
11 GHz
23 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
1/2
2/3
Error corrector
128 QAM
16 QAM
Coding Gain 103 dB
Radio Scrambler
/Descrambler
5/6 2423
7/8 2423
MLC 6,292/7 (redundancy 11.26%)

MLC 3.5/4 (redundancy 14.29%)
3.5
27.31
Equivalent roll off factor

128 QAM
16 QAM
0.2
0.2
Gross rate Mbit/s

STM1 128/16 QAM
STM0 128/16 QAM
176.87 / 181.69
58.96 / 60.56
Gross symbol rate

Msymbols/s
STM1 128/16 QAM
STM0 128/16 QAM
25.27 / 45.42
8.42 / 15.14
IF Nominal input/ output level

(dBm)
2 to 52 / 4 2
TX digital filter
36 taps
Demodulation
coherent
Adaptive equalizer
19 taps
Post demodulation filter 128

QAM STM1/STM0
Butterworth (9 poles)
Post demodulation filter

16 QAM STM1/STM0
Butterworth (9 poles)
Demodulator bandwidth
recovery (KHz)
Gross symbol rate clock
recovery time after RF
interruption (msec.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
15 GHz
6L GHz 6U GHz
ED
800
1
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
350 / 458

7.5 Modem characteristics

MODEM
13 GHz
18 GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
11 GHz
23 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
Signature 128 QAM 6.3 nsec

STM1 BER =1*10E4
STM1 BER =1*10E6
STM0 BER =1*10E4
STM0 BER =1*10E6
Kn gua. = 0.79 ; Kn typ.= 0.47

Kn gua. = 1.1 ; Kn typ.= 0.55
Kn gua. = 1.3 ; Kn typ.= 0.55
Kn gua. = 1.5 ; Kn typ.= 0.60
Signature 16 QAM 6.3 nsec.

STM1 BER =1*10E4
STM1 BER =1*10E6
STM0 BER =1*10E4
STM0 BER =1*10E6
Kn gua. = 0.45 ; Kn typ.= 0.24

Kn gua. = 0.55 ; Kn typ.= 0.27
Kn gua. = 0.70 ; Kn typ.= 0.30
Kn gua. = 0.80 ; Kn typ.= 0.35
C/N 128 QAM STM1

/STM0 dB
BER =1*10E3
BER =1*10E4
BER =1*10E6
24 (typical 23)
24.7 (typical 23.6)
26 (typical 24.7)
C/N 16 QAM STM1

/STM0 dB
BER =1*10E3
BER =1*10E4
BER =1*10E6
15.3 (typical 14.3)

16.1 (typical 15)
17.8 (typical 16.5)
Interleave block length

128 QAM
16 QAM
120 symbols
120 symbols
Carrier recovery (after RF

interruption) sec.
1 (STM1)
2 (STM0)
Monitoring channel in
RFCOH
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
15 GHz
6L GHz 6U GHz
ED
FAIL Service 0, FAIL Service 1
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
351 / 458
6L GHz
REGENERATOR
13 GHz
18 GHz
23 GHz
Line Scrambler/
Descrambler
11 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
2141 / 212.71
User interface
Electrical Optical
Input /output signal

electrical interface
Code
Impedance
Signal level
Return loss
Input cable equalizer
ITUT G.703
(Siemens 1.0/2.3 connector)
CMI
75 ohm unbal.
1 Vpp
15 dB from 8 to 240 MHz
12.7 dB at 78 MHz as vf
Max. input jitter
ITUT G.825
Max. output jitter
ITUT G.958
Jitter transfer function
ITUT G.958

optical interface
Operating wavelength
Min. Sensitivity dBm
Min. overload dBm
Output mean launched
power dBm
ITUT G.957
(S1.1 type FCPC and SC connectors)
12601360 nm
28
8
8 (max.) ; 15 (min.)
Max. input jitter
ITUT G.825
Max. output jitter
ITUT G.958
Jitter transfer function
ITUT G.958
DCCr (D1 to D3)

bit rate Kbit/s
interface
192
Managed internally by the Shelf Controller
DCCm (D4 to D12)

bit rate Kbit/s
interface
The entire MSOH is not managed and passedthrough

576
Not managed by pass condition
MSAIS (Contains a valid RSOH and an all1 pattern on MSOH and payload in case
of LOS,LOF)
64 Kbit/s channels
Tx/Rx
Alarms detection/
removal msec.
ATPC channel
ED
8 GHz
271
Radio Scrambler/
Descrambler
STM1/ STM0
AIS management
Regenerator
Tx and/or Rx side
7 GHz
155.520 4.6 p.p.m. (standard payload)

155.520 20 p.p.m. (AIS payload)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
15 GHz
6U GHz
All 1
Loss Of Frame : 3/1 (24 frames/8 frames)
Loss Of Signal : 0.625/0.250 (5 frames/2 frames)
Out Of Frame Detection : >1000 ones or zero s consecutively
64 Kbit/s channel in RFCOH 1+1 protected
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
352 / 458

7.6 Regenerator characteristics

7.7 Protection characteristics
PROTECTION
Radio Protection Switching
(RPS) type
15 GHz
18 GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
11 GHz
23 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
N+1
RPS Switching Method
Hitless revertive and not revertive
RPS Switching Criteria

(msec.)
RRA/MODEM Failure
HBER (detection t.b.d. restore t.b.d.
EWH (detection t.b.d. restore t.b.d.
EWL (detection t.b.d. restore t.b.d.
RPS Switching time msec.

Tx/Rx Static delay
equalization bits
Max. dynamic recoverable
delay bits
Regenerator user
interface protection
(RUSP)
1+0 Compact
1+1HST/HET
2+0 HET
RUSP type
)
)
1 (from alarm detection)

256 (in 1 bit steps)
10
No
Yes Electrical
No
RUSP Switching Method
Not hitless not revertive
RUSP Switching Criteria
RRA/MODEM Failure
Signal failure
RRA/MODEM missing
50
RUSP Transfer time
< 1 bit
WMSN user interface

protection
Not available
ED
N+1
RUSP Switching Time

msec.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
13 GHz
6L GHz 6U GHz
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
353 / 458
6L GHz
6U GHz
Input battery source
7 GHz
48 to 60 Vdc
POWER CONSUMPTION (W)

1+1 HST Regenerator
1+1/2+0 HET Regenerator
1+1 HST WMSN OS
1+1/2+0 HET WMSN OS
3+1 HET Regenerator
11 GHz
(or 24 Vdc t.b.c.)

140
137
180
177
200
13 GHz
15 GHz
Input battery source
18 GHz
23 GHz
48 to 60 Vdc
POWER CONSUMPTION (W)

128/16 QAM
1+0 Compact Regenerator
1+1 HST Regenerator
1+1/2+0 HET Regenerator
1+0 Compact WMSN OS
1+1 HST WMSN OS
1+1/2+0 HET WMSN OS
3+1 HET Regenerator
8 GHz
75/N.A.
138/N.A.
135/N.A.
115/N.A.
178/N.A.
175/N.A.
200
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
(or 24 Vdc t.b.c.)
70/75
125/135
122/132
110/115
165/175
162/172
200
75/80
138/148
135/145
115/120
178/188
175/185
200
7.9 Mechanical characteristics

6L GHz
13 GHz
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Dimensions and weight

1+0 Regen. IDU
1+1 Regen. IDU
3+1 Regen. IDU
Multiplex
1+0 ODU
1+1 ODU
ED
15 GHz
18 GHz
23 GHz
6U GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
11 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
(l x d x h)
445 x 258 x 44.45 (1U) mm
5 Kg
445 x 258 x 88.9 (2U) mm
10 Kg
445 x 258 x 221.5 (5U) mm
13 Kg
445 x 258 x 88.9 (2U) mm
10 Kg
260 x 342 x 90 mm
6 Kg
268 x 277 x 250 mm
15 Kg
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
354 / 458

7.8 Power supply characteristics

7.10 Environmental characteristics

7.10.1 General characteristics
6L GHz
13 GHz
Environment:
EMIEMC
Safety
Temperature:
IDU
ODU
Transportation
Storage
Cabinet degree
protection
15 GHz
18 GHz
23 GHz
6U GHz
7 GHz
8 GHz
11 GHz
25 GHz
28 GHz
38 GHz
Compliant with ETS 300385 EN55022 Class A

Compliant with IEC 60950 add. IV and IEC 215
Compliant with ETS 300 019 class 3.1 ; 3.2 (5/+45 C)
compliant with ETS 300 019 class 4.1 (33/+40C) NB, NB1
compliant with ETS 300 019 class 2.3
compliant with ETS 300 019 class 1.2
compliant with IEC 529 or equivalent IEC 68218 IP 45
NB
In any case a wider ranges of operating temperatures can be guaranteed to meet specific
customer requirements:
IDU
5/+50C with fans 5 to 95 % humidity
ODU
33/+50C 8 to100% humidity
NB1
a start up of the equipment at this temperature requires a proper warm up time
7.10.2 Mechanically active substances for IDU

ETS 300 019 Class 3.1 recommends the following environmental parameters:
Environmental Parameter
Value
a) Sand
30 mg/m3
b) Dust (suspension)
0.2 mg/m3
c) Dust (sedimentation)
1.5 mg/ (m2 h)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Overcoming these values could affect Fans Unit operation. For further information, see para.8.6.2
on page 387.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
355 / 458
7.10.3 ETS 300019 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations
This applies to locations:
where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and heat radiation. They may also be
exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings, e.g. through open
windows. They may be subjected to dew and to presence of water from sources other than rain and
icing. They are not subjected to precipitations;
where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered
over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;
In close proximity to sources of sand or dust;
with vibration of low significance, e.g. for products fastened to light supporting structures subjected
to hardly perceptible vibrations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The conditions of this class may be found in :
entrances and staircases of buildings;
garages;
cellars;
certain workshops;
buildings in factories and industrial process plants;
unattended equipment stations;
certain telecommunication buildings;
ordinary storage rooms for frost resistant products and farm buildings, etc.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
356 / 458

See climatogram on Fig. 215. on page 357
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 215. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
357 / 458

7.10.4 ETS 300019 Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations
This class applies to a permanently temperature controlled closed location. Humidity is usually not
controlled. The climatogram is shown in Fig. 216.
50
45
40
AIR TEMPERATURE 0C
35
30
20
10
5
0
5
25
20
10
1.5
1.0
20
ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY g/m3
60
30
40
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
85
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %
Exceptional climatic limits.
Normal climatic limits: Values outside these limits

have a probability of occurrence of less than 1%
Values outside this field have a probability of occurrence of less than 10%(see IEC standard
72130 [2], Class 4)
NOTE: Exceptional conditions may occur following the failure of the temperature controlling system
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 216. Climatogram for Class 3.1: Temperaturecontrolled locations

Heating, cooling, forced ventilation and humidification are used to necessarily maintain the required
conditions especially where there is a great difference between room environment and external high or
low temperatures.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
358 / 458

This class is a combination of classes 3K3/3Z2/3Z4/3B1/3C2(3C1)/3S2/3M1 in IEC standard 72133 [3].
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

This class applies to locations:
where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and to heat radiation. It may also be
exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings. They are not subjected
to dew, precipitation, water from source other than rain or icing;
without particular risks of biological attacks. This includes protective measures, e.g. special product
design, or installations at locations of such construction that mould growth and attacks by animals,
etc. are not likely to occur;
over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;
without special precautions to minimize the presence of sand or dust, but which are not situated in
close proximity to sources of sand or dust;
with insignificant vibration and shock.
The conditions of this class may be found in :
normal living or working areas, e.g. living rooms, rooms for general use (theatres, restaurants);
offices;
shops;
workshops for electronic assemblies and other electrotechnical products;
telecommunication centers;
storage rooms for valuable and sensitive products.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
359 / 458
7.10.5 Storage
ETS 300 019, class 1.2

Class 1.2
weatherproofed, not temperaturecontrolled storage location.
This class applies to weatherproofed storage having neither temperature nor humidity control. The
location may have openings directly to the open air, i.e., it may be only partly weatherproofed. The
climatogram is shown on Fig. 217. on page 361.
This class applies to storage locations:
where equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and temporarily to heat radiation: They may also
be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts, e.g. through doors, windows or
other openings. They may be subjected to dew, dripping water and to icing. They may also be
subjected to limited winddriven precipitation including snow;
where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
over the whole area, ad/or with heavy traffic;
in areas with sources of sand or dust, including urban areas;
with vibration of low significance and insignificant shock.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The conditions of this class may occur in:
unattended buildings;
some entrances of buildings;
some garages and shacks.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
360 / 458

The equipment meet the following requirements vs. storage:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 217. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
361 / 458

7.10.6 Transportation
The equipment meets the following requirements vs. transportation:
ETS 300 01911 : 1992, class 2.2
Class 2.2
Careful transportation.
This class applies to transportation where special care has been taken e.g. with respect to low temperature
and handling.
Class 2.2 covers the condition of class 2.1. In addition class 2.2 includes transportation in all types of lorries
and trailers in areas with welldeveloped road system.
It also includes transportation by ship and by train with specially designed, shockreducing buffers.
Manual loading and unloading of up to 20 Kg is included.
Extreme low temperature protection during transportation is permitted for equipment in its standard
packing:
At 40 C for 72 Hours maximum
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
without damaging the Optical interfaces.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
362 / 458

Compliant with ETS 300 019 Class 2.3
7.11 Optical Safety

This description is relevant to UHRN and UHR/UHRC configurations only.
7.11.1 Related Units

The Optical Safety characteristics and related precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser
radiation given herein, are relevant to the optical modules that can be housed on the equipment units with
STM1 interfaces:
RRA/MODEM units.
7.11.2 Hazard Level classification

The HAZARD LEVEL classification of the different optical interfaces of LHR system is given in Tab. 59.
on page 363.
The hazard level was assigned in accordance with the requirements of IEC 608251 (1993) and IEC
608252 (1993).
Tab. 59. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces
UNIT/PORT
STM1
OPTICAL INTERFACE
HAZARD LEVEL
S1.1 (short haul)
7.11.3 Incorporated laser sources characteristics
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Output optical interfaces data: the wavelength and the maximum optical power at the output connector
of incorporated laser sources is given in Tab. 42. on page 157.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
363 / 458
The labels reproduced below are affixed during factory settings, except those (explanatory) concerning
the STM1 ports. In this case the labels are placed in a plastic bag and provided together with the optical
module. The customer shall affix the label on the fibre protection cover of the involved card, depending
on the particular interface of the module (STM1 port). In the following description it is specified when the
label shall be affixed by the customer.
[1]
Standard label for all modules
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
The label is put on the fibre protection cover of all the involved card (see para.7.11.1 on page 363).
[2]
Multilanguage Label Kit

The multilanguage label kit, for STM1 ports, is placed in the same plastic bag provided together with
the module where explanatory labels (in English language), above mentioned, are put.
The multilanguage label kit contains a set of label that reproduce the same (explanatory) above
depicted in the following languages:
Italian
Francaise
Spanish
German
The customer, to its own discretion, may stick the labels with appropriate language upon the
preexisting ones or, in case of STM1 ports, directly on the fibre protection cover of the involved
card (see para.7.11.1 on page 363)
7.11.5 Aperture and fiber connectors

The locations of apertures and fibre connectors are reported on topographical drawings of units front view
and access cards front view:
in Fig. 49. on page 125 (RRA/MODEM assembly view)
in Fig. 54. on page 128 (view of STM1 optical module)
7.11.6 Engineering design features

In normal operating conditions, unless intentional manumission, the laser radiation is never accessible.
The laser beam is launched in optical fibre through an appropriate connector that totally shuts up the laser
radiation. Moreover a plastic cover is fitted upon optical connectors by means of screws.
In case of cable fibre break, to minimize exposure times, ALS procedure according to ITUT G.958 Rec.
is implemented either on STM1 ports.
ALS timing are not longer than maximum specified in G.958.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
7.11.7 Safety instruction

The safety instructions for proper assembly, maintenance, and safe use including clear warning
concerning precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser radiation, are reported in para.10.3
on page 428.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
364 / 458

7.11.4 Labelling
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
For the X value please refer to BER 10E6 thresholds
Fig. 218. 128QAM BER curves
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
365 / 458

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
For the X value please refer to BER 10E6 thresholds
Fig. 219. 16QAM BER curves
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
366 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MAINTENANCE
SECTION CONTENT
ED
955.203.363 W
PAGE
Chapter 8 Maintenance
369
01
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
367 / 458

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
368 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

8 MAINTENANCE
8.1 Introduction
Maintenance consists of a set of operations which maintain or bring back the assembly to optimum
operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational availability.
Maintenance is classified as:
ROUTINE (preventive)
CORRECTIVE (troubleshooting and repair)
This chapter describes the routine and corrective maintenance of 9600USY equipment in the UHRN
configuration, and and is organized as follows:
Warnings
EMC norms
Safety rules
Maintenance Personnel skill
on page 371
Instruments and accessories

Software tools
on page 371
Maintenance Tool Kit

on page 372
Portable Service Kit (ODU maintenance) on page 376
Alarm Description
Centralized Equipment Alarms

on page 379
Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SAM 3+1)

on page 381
Alarm visual indications on units

on page 381
Station Alarms
on page 381

on page 381
Set of spare parts

Types of Spare Parts

on page 382
Number of Spare Parts

on page 384
General rules on spare parts management

on page 385
Spare Flash Card management

on page 385
Routine Maintenance
Routine Maintenance every year
Routine Maintenance for Fans Unit
Corrective Maintenance
General flowchart
on page 388
Alarm acknowledgment and attending

on page 389
TroubleShooting
on page 390
Unit replacement in IDU/REG shelf

on page 393
Unit replacement in IDU/EPS shelf

on page 398
ODU Repair
on page 402
Faulty unit repair and Repair Form
ED

on page 386
on page 387
on page 405
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
369 / 458
8.2.1 EMC norms
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
10.4.3 ON PAGE 437
8.2.2 Safety rules

The Safety Rules stated in para.10.3 on page 428 thru 434 describe the operations and/or precautions
to observe to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment
safety.
Please read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipments.
SAFETY RULES
General
Carefully observe the frontpanel warning labels prior to working on optical
connections while the equipment is inservice.
Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed
to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream
(rack or station distribution frame)
Electrical safety
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by
48/60 V dc.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage,
low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns
and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input
terminals.
Optical safety
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the
rules pointed out in para.10.3.4.2 on page 432.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
370 / 458

8.2 Warnings
8.2.3 Maintenance Personnel skill

8.2.3.1 General
Maintenance Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on telecommunications.
Experience in maintenance activities is a must.
In particular, Maintenance Personnel must be familiar:
with the equipment this handbook refers to
and with the use of the Craft Terminal applications of the equipment this handbook refers to.
Without these prerequisites, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para.9.2
on page 410 is usually not enough to properly maintain equipment.
8.2.3.2 Operator skills for ODU repair
In general, it should be avoided that Local Oscillator and/or Transceiver replacing as individual parts are
carried out by personnel who has never done it. When unskilled personnel is in charge of ODU
maintenance, it is suggested that repair policy is restricted to the following operations:
ODU 1+0 COMPACT

replacement of the whole faulty ODU assembly with a spare ODU assembly already assembled and
pretested at the correct operating frequency: please refer to point a ) on page 403 for the
replacement procedure.
ODU 1+0 EXP./1+1/2+0

replacement of the whole assembly TR + LO + adapter kits with a spare assembly TR + LO +
adapter kits already assembled and pretested at the correct operating frequency, as described
in the ODU TECHNICAL HANDBOOK (REF.[A] on page 412).
8.3 Instruments and accessories

8.3.1 Software tools
There is a local terminal (PC) which permits to display all the alarms and manages the Equipment.
The relative processing is described in the relevant Craft Terminal Operators Handbook (REF.[H] on page
413).
When a TMN is implemented, an Operation System will display alarms and manage all the connected
Equipment of the network. Refer to the relevant handbooks.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
With reference to Fig. 45. on page 119:
connection with the PC is achieved through connector (9) available on the SAM 3+1 unit;
through connectors (2) and (4), the same unit can be connected to an Operations System associated
to the Transmission Management Network in order to execute operations similar to those carried out
by the PC.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
371 / 458
For Maintenance Tool Kit P/N please see REF.[27] in Tab. 19. on page 105.
The following Tab. 60. lists the items contained in the Maintenance Tool Kit. Drawings and descriptions
are given for special items.
Tab. 60. Maintenance Tool Kit
ITEMS
FACTORY P/N
NOTES
BAGS
Tool bag
810.704.305
Maintenance Tool bag
870.704.306
STANDARD TOOLS & MISCELLANEOUS
Fixed spanner 8 x 10
870.952.110
870.952.129
870.952.131
Screwdriver 3 x 100
870.959.130
Screwdriver 3.5 x 100
870.959.140
Screwdriver 5.5 x 200
870.959.166
Crosshead Screwdriver 3 x 60
870.959.530
Crosshead Screwdriver 4.5 x 80
870.959.540
Crosshead Screwdriver 4.5 x 250
870.959.565
Polygon spanner 17
870.952.417
Polygon tube spanner 5
870.952.705
Polygon tube spanner 6
870.952.706
Torque wrench
870.952.302
Special fixed spanner 5.5 mm
879.010.249
Special fixed spanner 7 mm
879.010.250
COMPONENTS OF ANTISTATIC WRISTBAND

Antistatic wristband
041.172.011
Antistatic applications cord
041.911.001
Plug with crocodile pliers
041.172.010
Female button termination
248.501.099
see para.10.5
on page 438
SPECIAL EXTRACTORS
Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor
245.701.842
Electrical/Optical module extractor
241.901.305
see Fig. 220.

on page 373
SPECIAL LEVERS
Lever for ODU opening/closing
210.902.006
see Fig. 222.

on page 374
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SPECIAL CABLES AND ACCESSORIES

Coaxial cable N RG223 N 900 RG223
041.962.665
Coaxial cable N RG223 BNC M 50 Ohm (x2)
041.962.683
Coaxial cable Male1.6/5.6 Male1.0/2.3 (x4)
041.962.264
PCTR cord
041.992.604
Plug (on Transceiver 0 only) for TR0/TR1 address

distinction (x 4)
041.992.590
ED
see Fig. 223.

on page 375
see Fig. 221.
on page 373
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
372 / 458

8.3.2 Maintenance Tool Kit

Electrical/Optical module extractor
Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor

Fig. 220. Special extractors
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 221. Plug (on Transceiver 0 only) for TR0/TR1 address distinction
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
373 / 458

When, in ODU 1+1/2+0 configuration, you must open and then close the ODU cover for
maintenance purposes, the following operations:
OPEN
One at a time, unblock the cover blocking levers (B) and (C) pushing up the restraint spring
(D) and, contemporarily, turning down the lever (E).
CLOSE
Block cover, setting both levers as in detail (C)
may produce vibrations that could cause synch loss or other electrical disturbances to the
transceiver still working.
A
E
Using the special lever:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
allows to do the same open/close operations without producing vibrations.

The following photographs should clarify the correct lever handling and usage.
Fig. 222. Lever for ODU opening/closing
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
374 / 458

IDU SIDE
ODU SIDE
Coaxial cable N RG223 N 900 RG223

Used to connect locally IDU and ODU in indoor premises
TR CONNECTOR
SIDE
IDU SIDE
Coaxial cable N RG223 BNC M 50 Ohm

Used to connect locally IDU and ODU (directly on TR connector)
in indoor premises
1.0/2.3
CONNECTOR
SIDE
MEASUREMENT
INSTRUMENT
SIDE
Coaxial cable Male1.6/5.6 Male1.0/2.3

Used to connect a measurement instrument to any 1.0/2.3 connector
(e.g. 155 Mbit/s electric, 2 Mbit/s, etc.)
PC SIDE
TR CONNECTOR
SIDE
PCTR cord
Used for operating directly on TR registers for special procedures
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 223. Special cables for maintenance
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
375 / 458
8.3.3 Portable Service Kit (ODU maintenance)
The output port (LEMO Connector) present on the Radio Interface unit ODU (see Fig. 69. on page 148)
allows the connection of a Portable Service Kit (PSK) to the transceiver unit for maintenance purposes.
The following information is given in this paragraph:
PSK Hardware presettings
PSK General description
PSK User instructions
8.3.3.1 PSK Hardware presettings

The following settings are possible:
COMM. ID
DESCRIPTION
CM1
First digit for EOW phone number
CM2
Second digit where 0 must be set as A
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Please refer to MSZZQ document relative to the Portable Service Kit (PSK) unit for the TC and
DipSwitch physical position on the board (see Tab. 80. on page 456).
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
376 / 458

For P/N please see REF.[28] in Tab. 19. on page 105.

8.3.3.2 PSK General description

The Portable Service Kit unit consists of:
2 line Display
UART Interface (RS232)
Keyboard
Telephone interface
ODU interface connector

The Portable Service Kit unit function are:
PTx/PRx tests
APC, set max PTx (ATPCoff)
RST, alarm reset
ENG, turn on EOW line
Communication between local IDU and remote IDU/ODU
the call from the local IDU can be made towards the service kit
the call from the service kit can be made towards the local IDU
the call from the remote IDU/ODU can be made towards the service kit
the call from the service kit can be made towards the remote IDU/ODU
The ECT displays a manual operation alarm when the Portable Service Kit is connected.
The ECT displays an alarm state of the ATPC function if the switch ATPC Max is in the ON position.
Two line
Display
(PRx & PTx)
Headphone
interface
Keyboard
UART
interface
(RS232)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 224. Portable Service Kit
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
377 / 458
At the powerup the PSK displays HAND CONTROL V x.x.x for 10 seconds, then displays its telephone
number (set in factory) for other 10 seconds, then it behaves as described in the following points:
It displays the Tx and Rx power (normal operation).
PTx in dBm
in digital format with 0.1 dB of definition
PRx in dBm
in digital format (with 1.0 dB of definition) and in analogical format (dBm +/ 1.5 dB), as shown
in following example:
TX 20.5dBm
RX
RX48dBm
The values are updated with a frequency of one second.
Pushing the APC button forces the PTx nominal value. In this condition an F character is displayed.
Pushing again the APC button cancels this forcing condition.
When errors are present on the RT unit theepsilon letter is displayed. Pushing the F button forces
the PSK to display the revealed errors (two seconds each). The errors may be:
OUTPUT POWER LEVEL ALARM
LOW GAIN ALARM
FIRST CONVERSION LO UNLOCKED
RF LO UNLOCKED
UNLOCKED LOCAL LOOP
DB DECREASE LEVEL RF LO
TX LOSS IF ALARM
CARD FAIL RX
THRESHOLD RX ALARM
SPRI FRAME ALARM
HDB3 LEVEL ALARM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
After that the normal operation is automatically restored.

WARNING:
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
378 / 458

8.3.3.3 PSK User instructions

8.4 Alarm Description

8.4.1 Centralized Equipment Alarms
8.4.1.1 Leds on SAM 3+1 unit
All the alarms detected on the units are collected and processed by the SAM 3+1 unit in IDU/REG shelf
which gives centralized optical indications by means of LEDs on its front coverplate.
Specifically (see Fig. 225. herebelow):
Red LED URG: detection of an URGENT alarm
Red LED NURG: detection of a NOT URGENT alarm
Yellow LED ATTD: alarm condition ATTENDED (see para.8.4.1.2 on page 380)
Yellow LED ABN: detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition.
Yellow LED IND: detection of an INDICATIVE alarm
IND
YELLOW
RED
CARD FAIL
(6) Alarm attending
ABN
NURG
YELLOW
RED
YELLOW
RED
ATTD
URG
(10) Lamp test
(11) Reset
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 225. Leds and pushbuttons on SAM unit for maintenance purposes
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
379 / 458
On the Craft Terminal (C.T.) and on the Operation System (O.S). application the URGENT
(URG), NOT URGENT (NURG) and INDICATIVE alarm are named in a different way; the
relationship between this two terminologies is explained in Tab. 61. herebelow.
Tab. 61. Relationship between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity
terminology used for the System Controller unit remote alarm connector pins.
Alarm severity terminology on C.T. and O.S.
Alarm severity terminology used for SYSTEM

CONTROLLER UNIT remote alarm connector
pins
CRITICAL or MAJOR
URG , T*URG, T*RURG,
MINOR
NURG, T*NURG, T*RNURG
WARNING
INDICATIVE
INDETERMINATE (not used)
8.4.1.2 Alarm Attending

See Fig. 225. on page 379:
the detected alarm condition can be stored through pushbutton (6) (Alarm attending button) on the
SAM 3+1 unit.
This operation will turn OFF the LEDs URG/NURG and will light up the yellow LED ATTD on the SAM
3+1 unit (Attended). The local Operator could also attend the alarm via the craft terminal.
a possible new alarm condition (following the Attending) will turn on the LEDs URG/NURG.
when the fault has been repaired, the yellow lamp (if the alarm had been attended) or the red ones
(if the alarm had not been attended and no further alarms had occurred in the mean time) will turn
off.
8.4.1.3 Relationship between Alarms and their severity (Urgent / Not Urgent)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
See Tab. 51. on page 170.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
380 / 458

N.B.

8.4.2 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SAM 3+1)

All details of the alarms for each card and relevant indications are included in the Alarm status procedure
in the Operators Handbook .
8.4.3 Alarm visual indications on units

Besides the LEDs of Centralized Equipment Alarms described in para.8.4.1 on page 379, some other
equipment units are provided with specific alarm LED on their front coverplate, indicating the failure of
the unit.
Tab. 67. on page 390 lists such LEDs and indicate their normal status (alarm absence).
8.4.4 Station Alarms

Some equipment alarms processed by the SAM 3+1 unit are available for Customer applications on
FANS0 units connector (see para.4.3.2.6 on page 130) in order to switch on/off the alarm lamps of the
Top Rack Unit or similar device.
Their management is as follows (see Tab. 48. on page 164):
The RURG signal (should drive a red lamp) is activated in case of urgent (URG) alarm and a relevant
telealarm is released (this last function is excludible).
The RNURG signal (should drive a red lamp) is activated in case of non urgent (minor) alarm and
a relevant telealarm is released (this last function is excludible).
The RATTD signal (should drive a yellow lamp) is lighted up in case of manual storing of alarm events
(see para.8.4.1.2 on page 380). In this case the signals RURG and RNURG are switched off to be
ready to other new alarm indications. This signal is raised in case of ABNORMAL condition, together
with led ATTD of SAM 3+1 unit (see para.8.4.1 on page 379).
The CH signal (should drive a green lamp) is activated by the buzzer input. By presetting, it is
possible to change this alarm criteria and to drive the activation with the presence of the service
voltage.
8.4.5 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Summarizing and Housekeeping alarms, processed by the SAM3+1 unit, are made available to Customer
by means of relay contacts whose management and interface access are described in para.4.6.10 on
page 164.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
381 / 458
8.5.1 Types of Spare Parts

8.5.1.1 Spares for IDU assembly
The set of spare parts for IDU assembly is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of
replaceable plugin units.
The suggested spare parts should be at least those containing electronic parts (i.e. plugin boards and
electrical/optical modules), as detailed in following Tab. 62. thru Tab. 66.
N.B.
The unit replacement procedures described in paragraph Corrective Maintenance in this

chapter presume that the units present in the sparepart stock correspond exactly to the plugin
replaceable units that are equipped in the system, i.e.:
with the same Part Numbers
and including the same front plates (with the exception of the FANS unit) and, if equipped,
the same babyboards (with the same Part Numbers) 1.
with the aim of speedingup the corrective maintenance and to avoid complex unit manipulation (front
plates and baby board mounting/dismounting on/from the main board) which could result in unit and/or
babyboard damage.
The following Tab. 62. thru Tab. 66. sum up the suggested spare part definition and P/Ns.
Tab. 62. Spare parts list for all UHRN configurations
ITEM DRAWING
P/N (REF in
Tab. 19. page 105)
SAM (N.B.1)
[7] + [8]
FLASH CARD
(see para.8.5.4 page 385)
(N.B.1)
[9] or [10] in alternative
ELECTRICAL/OPTICAL
MODULE (N.B.2)
Fig. 53. and Fig. 54. on page 128
[21] and/or [23]

and/or [24]
PSU
[2]
FANS
[4]
ITEM
Tab. 63. Additional spare parts list for N+1 configurations or N+0 with N > 2 configurations
ITEM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LOGIC
ITEM DRAWING
P/N (REF in
Tab. 19. page 105)
[11]
1. a policy is under study to supply Customers with spare units already equipped with front plates and
baby boards, according to Customers System configuration.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
382 / 458

8.5 Set of spare parts
Tab. 64. Additional spare parts list for configurations without XPIC option

N.B.
in alternative to Tab. 65.

ITEM
RMD (N.B.2)
ITEM DRAWING
P/N (REF in
Tab. 19. page 105)
[13] or [14] or [15]

+ [18]
Tab. 65. Additional spare parts list for configurations with XPIC option
N.B.

ITEM
RMD + XPIC (N.B.2)
P/N (REF in
Tab. 19. page 105)
ITEM DRAWING
[13] +[16] + [17]+
[19]
Tab. 66. Additional spare parts list for configurations with EPS shelf
N.B.

ITEM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
EPS MODULE (N.B.3)
ITEM DRAWING
P/N (REF in
Tab. 21. page 110)
[30]
N.B.1
As spare part, SAM is shipped from factory always with its subunit ESCON already mounted.
Customer is never allowed to dismount it from the main board. Conversely, the SAM spare part
is usually shipped from factory without the Flash Card, that is available as individual item.
N.B.2
Having the Electrical/Optical module already mounted on the spare RMD is not a must;
procedures in the following explains how to replace these modules as independent items.
N.B.3
Having the optional Optical module already mounted on the spare EPS unit is not a must;
procedures in the following explains how to replace this module as independent item.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
383 / 458
8.5.1.2 Spares for ODU assembly
IN GENERAL
1)
the spare parts usually required for the ODU assembly repair are:
the Transceivers
the Local Oscillators
the Branching Adapter Kits (only for the configurations 1+1 / 2+0 / 1+0 EXP)
For further information, please refer to para.4.5.5 on page 153.
Changing a Transceiver and/or a Local Oscillator as individual parts requires the ODU opening
and a work that usually cannot be done directly on the antenna pole.
ODU 1+0 COMPACT

2)
in the ODU configuration 1+0 Compact (that is used also in the Double Cabinet Station
Configurations) it is suggested to have, as spare part, a complete ODU cabinet, fully equipped
and pretested at the correct operating frequency. This will allow a very fast system restore in
service in case of ODU fault, as the 1+0 Compact cabinet light weight should not imply problems
with this kind of replacement; the repair of the removed faulty cabinet can be done in a second
time and more comfortably in an authorized repair center.
ODU 1+0 EXTENDIBLE / 1+1 / 2+0

3)
in the ODU configurations 1+1 / 2+0 , changing completely the ODU cabinet is generally not
acceptable, as that would affect the operation of the channel still working.
4)
in the ODU configuration 1+0 Extendible, the solution described in above point 2 ) could be
adopted, but considerations about the cabinet weight can exclude it.
For the configurations 3 ) and 4 ) , the best solution to speed up the replacement procedure and to
minimize the outofservice time is to have an assembly TR + LO + adapter kits already
assembled and pretested at the correct operating frequency (see Fig. 76. on page 155) 2.. In this
way the replacement of the assembly as a whole can be done directly on the antenna pole; the repair
of the removed faulty assembly can be made in a second time and more comfortably in an authorized
repair center.
The P/Ns of Transceivers, Local Oscillator modules and Adapter Kits for the various frequencies are
given in the ODU TECHNICAL HANDBOOK (REF.[A] on page 412).
8.5.2 Number of spare parts
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the average
amount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF but also during MTTR;
the latter depending on the amount of spare parts available.
2. a policy is under study to supply Customers with TR + LO + adapter kits spares already
assembled and pretested at the correct operating frequency, according to Customers System
configuration.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
384 / 458

With regard to ODU equipment, the following considerations can be done:

8.5.3 General rules on spare parts management

Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating
equipment.
It is suggested to periodically check those spare units that have not been utilized for over a year.
If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare parts
are placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp.
Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges.
If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site,
make sure that the following is observed:
the spare parts must be wrapped in antistatic and padded envelopes;
the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them (e.g. gas);
if during transportation the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept,
make sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal
shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.
Suggestion: before storing spare parts, perform hardware presetting with the same
configuration of the units in service.
8.5.4 Spare Flash Card management

Please refer to para.6.2.7 on page 307 for the Flash Card description.
The Flash Card supplied as spare part is empty (i.e. without SW) and must be left as it is for its possible
use as spare part.
ATTENTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Do not use a Flash Card already loaded with SW as spare part, unless you use the specific
instructions given in the Operators Handbook (that include the Flash Card reset and the SW
download through SIBDL application).
You must be aware that if a Flash Card with a SWP (different from that running in the system) is
inserted as it is in the System Controller (and the System Controller is inserted in its shelfs slot),
the software download will be automatically carried out from the Flash Card toward the Systems EC,
RC and SUs, thus causing a complete system crash.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
385 / 458
Routine maintenance is a periodic set of measurements and checks. This maintenance discovers those
devices whose function has deteriorated with time and therefore need adjustment or replacement.
Typically, digital equipment requires no routine maintenance.
The equipment allows to assess the quality of the connection links or counting the errored events and
obtaining performance data.
The Performance Monitoring Application, described in the Operators Handbook, allows this function.
8.6.1 Routine Maintenance every year

It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:
[1]
Mechanical checks
Check that:
the power supply units,
the cables,
the mounting fixtures

are connected correctly.
[2]
Grounding check
Check that the racks, subracks, and modules are grounded.
[3]
Power cables check
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by
48 V dc.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

terminals.
Make these operations:
Check that the power cable is perfectly safety grounded.
Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack with screws, to guarantee
grounding (the rack is connected to the station ground).
[4]
IDU Operative checks
Visual check:
During the normal operation, check the led normal condition, as specified in Tab. 67. on
page 390
During the normal operation, perform system lamp test (see para.4.3.2.1.4 on page 121).
Check of the following functions:
Automatic switches
Alarms
[5]
Software checks
Use the Craft Terminal to check the system status (see the Operator Handbook). Access the
reference Network Element, select HISTORY DISPLAY, read the alarm history memory, the statuses,
and forcings.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
386 / 458

8.6 Routine Maintenance
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

8.6.2 Routine Maintenance for Fans Unit

The MTBF of the Fans Unit is over 30 years, provided that Environmental Conditions regarding sand and
dust are in the limits specified by Recc. ETS 300 019 Class 3.1 (see para.7.10.2 on page 355). Even
though the operating environment is compliant with these limits, it is suggested to carry out the following
operation every three years:
pull out Fans Unit and clean fans removing dust and sand.
In the case of worse environmental conditions, perform this operation more frequently.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
387 / 458
8.7 Corrective Maintenance

8.7.1 General flowchart

START
Alarm acknowledgment and attending
(para.8.7.2 page 389)
TroubleShooting starting with visual indications

(para.8.7.3.1 page 390)
Other measures
TroubleShooting starting via Craft Terminal

(para.8.7.3.1 page 390).
Identification of a unit to be replaced.
Unit replacement in IDU/REG shelf

(para.8.7.4 page 393)
or in IDU/EPS shelf
(para.8.7.5 page 398)
ODU repair
(para.8.7.7 page 402).
System check via Craft Terminal

try again with
another unit
Fault repaired ?
Y
If possible, restore replaced unit in the system
and perform system check via Craft Terminal,
to verify that is really faulty
possible intermittent
failure
N
fixed fault ?
Y
Restore spare part in the system and perform
system check via Craft Terminal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Send back faulty unit to Repair Centre together

with Repair Form compiled (para.8.8 page 405)
END
Fig. 226. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
388 / 458
8.7.2 Alarm acknowledgment and attending
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The need for Operator intervention is notified:
locally (in front of the equipment or in the station):
when the URG/NURG/IND/ABN LED alarm on SAM3+1 unit lights up (see para.8.4.1.1 on page
379)
or the same alarms, propagated through the Station Alarms cable, operate the TRU lamps or
similar remote device
and/or when the alarm LEDs listed in Tab. 67. on page 390 are not in normal status.
remotely (in a TMN maintenance center) when the OS acknowledges the presence of problems in
the station.
When the local Operator decides to manage the problem, he should carry out the alarm attending
operation (see para.8.4.1.2 on page 380). This operation has the scope to notify locally in the station and
remotely to the TMN maintenance center that a local operator is attending the problem.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
389 / 458
8.7.3 TroubleShooting
Some problems may be localized looking the LEDs indicated in following Tab. 67. In any case, the
inspection through the Craft Terminal is recommended before any unit replacement.
Tab. 67. Normal condition (no alarms) of LEDs on equipments units
Unit
FIGURE
PSU
SAM 3+1
Fig. 225. on page 379.
LOGIC
RRA/MODEM
EPS
ON if ON/OFF
switch is on
Green

or Fig. 52. on page 126
N.B.
NORMAL
STATUS
LED
CARD FAIL (Red)
OFF
(1) LOGIC unit card fail (Red)
OFF
(7) RRA/MODEM card fail (Red)
OFF
OFF or GREEN
(N.B.)
(6) RT fail (multicolor)
according to led onair management setting, see Tab. 32. and

Tab. 33. on page 127
(3) EPS unit card fail (Red)
OFF
START
Y
PSU led on ?
PSU switch on ?
perform system lamp test

(para 4.3.2.1.4 page 121)
Y
why ?
solve problem
N
OK ?
SAM card fail on ?
carry out procedure in

para.8.7.3.4 page 392
possible problems in
primary PS distribution.
Solve problem.
try login NE by Craft Terminal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
login successful ?
para.8.7.3.3 page 391

para.8.7.3.2 page 391
Fig. 227. TroubleShooting starting with visual indications
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
390 / 458

8.7.3.1 TroubleShooting starting with visual indications

8.7.3.2 TroubleShooting via Craft Terminal

The 9600USY UHRN equipment has been designed to dialog with a Personal Computer (PC) in order to
service, activate and troubleshoot the equipment.
The troubleshooting operating instructions and details of the alarms for each card and relevant
indications are included in the Alarm status procedure in the Operators Handbook (section
Maintenance).
The operating instructions make it possible to identify the faulty unit for all assemblies of the system.
Having located the suspected faulty unit/module, replace it with a spare one:
for unit replacement in IDU/REG shelf, see para.8.7.4 on page 393
for unit replacement in IDU/EPS shelf, see para.8.7.5 on page 398
with regard to ODU repair, make reference to para.8.7.7 on page 402.
8.7.3.3 Problems with the Craft Terminal

Whenever the login with the Craft Terminal does not work, proceed with the following checks:
Restart the Craft Terminal (logout and switch off/on).
With the Craft Terminal connected to the equipment Finterface, open the Alcatel Lower Layer
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Manager screen (by clicking with the mouse pointer on the Alcatel symbol
menu bar). The fields to be verified in this screen are:
Port
Physical
COM1
ON
in the MSWindows
OSI or
Logical
ON
Verify that the CT port is effectively that connected by cable to equipments F interface
If Physical is OFF, the problem can be due to:
CT physical port faulty
SAMs Finterface port faulty
the cable
If possible, verify the correct working of the Craft Terminal and of the CTF interface cable using them
with another Alcatel equipment. If the problem persists also with it, solve the problem.
Otherwise, proceed with the SAM unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.8.7.3.4 on
page 392.
If OSI/Logical is OFF, the problem can be due to:
FLASH CARD missing on SAM unit (verify) or FLASH CARD/SAM faulty
SAMs Radio Controller section faulty or in abnormal condition.

Proceed with the SAM unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.8.7.3.4 on page 392.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
391 / 458
8.7.3.4 CARD FAIL led on SAM3+1 Unit turned on
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
responds (login successful), proceed investigating the problems through the Craft Terminal
application
does not respond (login unsuccessful):
ED
1)
push the RESET button on SAM3+1 unit and wait 10 minutes; in the meantime, if the yellow LED
ABN lights on, a software download from FLASH CARD to the Equipment Controller and Radio
Controller inside the unit should be in progress;
2)
if, after 10 minutes, the Craft Terminal application responds, open the Alarm status procedure
and proceed investigating the system state;
3)
if, after 10 minutes, the Craft Terminal application does not respond, replace the SAM3+1 unit,
as described in para.8.7.4.2 on page 394;
4)
if the problem persists also after the SAM3+1 unit replacement, the failure or content corruption
of the FLASH CARD must be suspected (a very extraordinary event); proceed with its
replacement, as indicated in para.8.7.4.3 on page 395.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
392 / 458

If the red LED CARD FAIL on SAM3+1 unit is on, and the Craft Terminal application:
8.7.4 Unit replacement in IDU/REG shelf
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

8.7.4.1 Introduction
Specific instructions/cautions according to assembly/unit type are given in paragraphs listed in
Tab. 68. herebelow.
These procedures make reference, for the common parts, to the general procedure described in
para.8.7.6 on page 400.
Tab. 68. IDU/REG shelfs assembly / unit replacement procedures
ASSEMBLY / UNIT
PARAGRAPH
PAGE
SAM 3+1 assembly
8.7.4.2
394
FLASH CARD (housed on SAM unit)
8.7.4.3
395
RMD (+ optional XPIC board) assembly
8.7.4.4
395
ELECTRICAL/OPTICAL MODULE
8.7.4.5
396
PSU unit
8.7.4.6
397
FANS unit
8.7.4.7
397
LOGIC unit
8.7.6
400
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
393 / 458
8.7.4.2 SAM 3+1 replacement procedure
Instructions in addition to those given in para.8.7.6 on page 400:

1)
as steps 1 ) to 3 ) on page 400
SAFETY RULES
A TNV2 (battery) voltage could be present on R/M interface connector (cable
side); do not touch the pins when unplugged .
terminals.
2)
extract the FLASH CARD from unit SAM 3+1 (see Fig. 43. on page 118)
3)
unit hardware presetting:
accessing the section Hardware setting documentation in this handbook, get the
relevant MSZZQ documents
get the spare unit SAM 3+1 and, using the above said documents to locate switches:
a)
set the dipswitches on ESCON subunit exactly as those of the replaced unit
ATTENTION
if unproperly set, these dipswitches will reset the FLASH CARD content, and you will
loose all the software herein contained (programs and system configuration data)
b)
set the dipswitches on SAM 3+1 main board exactly as those of the replaced unit
ATTENTION
some of these dipswitches (that define the system configuration), if unproperly set, will
cause system malfunction even though hardware is not faulty. Care must also be taken
to switch defining service battery voltage
4)
reinsert the FLASH CARD into the spare unit SAM 3+1 (in case of doubts see Fig. 44. on page
118)
5)
6)
check the system status by LED visual inspection

After the unit insertion, you should wait about 10 minutes for the completion of software
download from FLASH CARD toward SAM 3+1s SC, RC and SU; this phase is notified by red
LED ABN switched on. At the end, all red LEDs on SAM3+1 unit should be off.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
connect Craft Terminal and check the system status by its Alarm application.
7)
ED
software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SC,
RC and SU, is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
394 / 458

For the assembly drawing, refer to Fig. 43. on page 118.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

8.7.4.3 FLASH CARD replacement procedure

The FLASH CARD contains all system software (see para.6.2.7 on page 307 for details). For the FLASH
CARD physical position, refer to Fig. 43. and Fig. 44. on page 118.
The need for this replacement is described in para.8.7.3.4 on page 392.
Its replacement with an empty spare FLASH CARD (see para.8.5.4 on page 385) must be done following
the specific instructions given in the C.T. Operators Handbook.
8.7.4.4 RMD (+ optional XPIC board) replacement procedure

For the assembly drawing, refer to:
Fig. 49. on page 125 (RMD without XPIC board)
Fig. 51. on page 126 (RMD with XPIC board)
ED
1)
as step 1 ) on page 400
2)
turn off (position O ) the switch on the PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 55. on page 129) of the
PSU corresponding to the RMD unit to be replaced (i.e. PSU0 for RMD0 ... PSU3 for
RMD3). This avoids to have battery voltage on the IF output toward ODU when, in the following
steps, the corresponding cable is disconnected and connected again
3)
4)
if the unit to be replaced:

a)
is equipped with Electrical/Optical module to be recovered and mounted on the spare part,
extract it and mount it on the spare part (refer to para.8.7.4.5 on page 396 for details)
b)
has no Electrical/Optical module equipped, verify that the spare part has the Masking
Plate Complete mounted (see Fig. 49. on page 125 or Fig. 51. on page 126). If not,
dismount it from the unit to be replaced and mount it on the spare unit
5)

N.B.
If the XPIC board is equipped, verify also its hardware settings
6)
7)
position again the Case EMC (see Fig. 53. on page 128) or the Protection cap (see Fig. 49. on
page 125) if the unit is equipped with Electrical/Optical module and if it was present on the
Electrical/Optical module before the unit replacement
8)
turn on (position I ) the switch on the PSU unit previously switched off
9)
as steps 9 ) to 10 ) on page 400.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
395 / 458
8.7.4.5 ELECTRICAL/OPTICAL MODULE replacement procedure (on RMD units)
N.B.
In order to replace an Electrical/Optical module without replacing the RMD unit housing it, it is
not necessary to extract the unit from the shelf or to switch off power supply.
1)
2)
if present, remove the Case EMC (see Fig. 53. on page 128) or the Protection cap (see
Fig. 49. on page 125)
3)
disconnect cables from the module. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the
cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly;
N.B.
to extract Cables 1.0/2.3, use the special extractor (see Fig. 220. on page 373)
4)
turn off the two screws fixing the module
5)
extract the module
6)
insert the spare module and fix it turning on the two screws
ATTENTION
The screw tightening torque for fixing the modules to the unit must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
ED
7)
reconnect cables to the module
8)
fix the Case EMC or the Protection cap, if it was present on the Electrical/Optical module.
9)
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
396 / 458

8.7.4.6 PSU replacement procedure


1)
2)
turn off (position O ) the switch on the PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 55. on page 129)
3)
if possible, switch off the circuit breakers that give power supply to the cables connected to the
PSU unit to be replaced. This is possible only if the primary power supply distribution system
in the station provides a pair of circuit breakers for each PSU unit independent from those used
for the other PSU units.
4)
as steps 2 ) to 3 ) and 5 ) to 8 ) on page 400
5)
if switched off in step 3 ) above, switch on the circuit breakers giving power supply to the cables
connected to the new PSU unit
6)
turn on (position I ) the switch on the PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 55. on page 129)
7)
8.7.4.7 Fans Unit replacement in case of alarm

Whenever the alarm regarding Fans Unit arises, you should be aware of the following:
the alarm is always MINOR (because traffic is not affected) and arises for the failure of one, two or
of all the three fans of the unit; in general, when the alarm arises, you can assume that one fan only
is not working;
this condition should be considered in conjunction with:
the IDUhousingroom effective environmental temperature, taking into consideration that the
loss of all fans can produce an overtemperature of about 20 0C inside IDU;
and the temperature limits specified in para.7.10.1 on page 355.
because an excessive internal temperature could decrease the equipment overall MTBF.
In conclusion, the Fans unit alarm is a minor alarm and usually does not require an immediate intervention;
nevertheless, in case of alarm, it is suggested to carry out the unit replacement without waiting a very long
time.
For the unit replacement, make reference to the general procedure (para.8.7.6 on page 400), taking into
account that you must remove the front plate (see Fig. 57. on page 130) to access the unit and restore
it after the replacement.
ATTENTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The screw tightening torque for fixing the front plate to the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
397 / 458
8.7.5 Unit replacement in IDU/EPS shelf
Specific instructions/cautions according to assembly/unit type are given in paragraphs listed in

Tab. 69. herebelow.
These procedures make reference, for the common parts, to the general procedure described in
para.8.7.6 on page 400.
Tab. 69. IDU/EPS shelfs assembly / unit replacement procedures
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ASSEMBLY / UNIT
PARAGRAPH
PAGE
EPS unit
8.7.5.2
399
OPTICAL MODULE
8.7.5.3
399
PSU unit
8.7.4.6
397
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
398 / 458

8.7.5.2 EPS unit replacement procedure

For the assembly drawings, refer to figures of para.4.4.2.1.1 on page 137.

1)
2)
if the unit to be replaced:

a)
is equipped with Optical module to be recovered and mounted on the spare part, extract
it and mount it on the spare part (refer to para.8.7.5.3 on page 399 for details)
b)
has no Optical module equipped, verify that the spare part has the Masking Plate
Complete mounted (see Fig. 61. on page 137). If not, dismount it from the unit to be
replaced and mount it on the spare unit
3)
4)
position again the Protection cap (see Fig. 62. on page 137) if the unit is equipped with Optical
module and if it was present on the Optical module before the unit replacement
5)
8.7.5.3 OPTICAL MODULE replacement procedure (on EPS unit)

N.B.
In order to replace an Optical module without replacing the EPS unit housing it, it is not
necessary to extract the unit from the shelf or to switch off power supply.
1)
2)
if present, remove Protection cap (see Fig. 62. on page 137)
3)
disconnect cables from the module. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the
cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly;
4)
turn off the two screws fixing the module
5)
extract the module
6)
insert the spare module and fix it turning on the two screws
ATTENTION
The screw tightening torque for fixing the modules to the unit must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
7)
reconnect cables to the module
8)
fix the Protection cap, if it was present on the Optical module
9)
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
399 / 458
The replacement of a suspected faulty unit/module with one taken from the spare part stock must be done
in the following way:
1)
get the spare from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the unit/module
to be replaced (see para.8.5.3 on page 385 for cautions); do not touch the electronic
components
If the unit to be replaced houses one or more babyboards, verify that the spare part does really
have the same babyboards.
N.B.
In the case of SAM3+1 unit, the P/Ns matching of the ESCON subunit is not
important.
2)
disconnect all cables (and, before, protection caps, if present on the Electrical/Optical modules)
from the front plate. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels
with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly;
N.B.
to extract Cables 1.0/2.3, use the special extractor (see Fig. 220. on page 373)
3)
to extract a plugin board:
wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 231. on page 438) and connect its
termination to a grounded structure
ATTENTION
this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges
turn off the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board
ATTENTION
this avoids the breakage of levers
4)
unit hardware presetting:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
operate the levers to extract the board
accessing the section Hardware setting documentation in this handbook, check if the
board has hardware settings:
if no hardware settings are envisaged, go to next step 5 )
if hardware settings are envisaged:
locate the position of setting switches using the appropriate MSZZQ document
set these switches on the spare part exactly as they are set on the unit to be
replaced
5)
insert the spare plugin board operating the levers
6)
now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
400 / 458

8.7.6 General replacement procedure for units in IDU/REG & IDU/EPS shelves
7)
turn on the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ATTENTION
The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

8)
reconnect all cables on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit
extraction.
9)
wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units)
N.B.
software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SU
is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
10 ) check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
401 / 458
8.7.7 ODU Repair

Please read the following paragraphs:
ODU service replaceable parts on page 153
Operator skills for ODU repair on page 371
Spares for ODU assembly on page 384
The ODU repair procedure depends on the ODU type and on the repair policy adopted.
The repair procedures described in the following are:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ODU 1+0 Compact on page 403
ODU cabinet full replacing (recommended)
LO / TR replacing with individual spare parts (discouraged for unskilled personnel)
ODU 1+0 Extendible, 1+1, 2+0 on page 404.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
402 / 458
8.7.7.2 ODU 1+0 Compact

Repair procedure depends on spare parts available:

a)
A complete ODU cabinet, fully equipped and pretested at the correct operating frequency, is
available:
ODU replacement:
1)
Switch off power supply on IDU
2)
Get the complete spare ODU cabinet

N.B.1
You must be sure that the spare ODU cabinet has (or has not) the plug for TR0/TR1
address distinction, exactly as the ODU cabinet to be replaced (see Fig. 68. on page
147). In case you must open the ODU cabinet to do this check, refer to the ODU
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK (REF.[A] on page 412) for the open/close procedures.
N.B.2
If you are not sure of the spare ODU cabinet operating frequency:
disconnect IDUODU cable at IDU side
connect the spare ODU cabinet to IDU through the Coaxial cable N RG223
N 900 RG223 (see Tab. 60. on page 372)
switch on power supply on IDU
through the Craft Terminal, verify the TR frequency and, in the case it is different
from situation before the fault, adjust it (this could be necessary in case of
Frequency Agility)
switch off power supply on IDU
connect again IDUODU cable at IDU side
3)
Carry the complete spare ODU cabinet to the antenna pole
4)
Disconnect IDUODU cable at ODU side (from faulty ODU cabinet)
5)
Dismount faulty ODU cabinet from antenna pole and ..
6)
.. mount spare ODU cabinet (see Installation Handbook)

ATTENTION
The bolt tightening torque for fixing ODU to the antenna pole must be:
80 kg x cm (8 Newton x m)
Exceeding this value may result in bolt breaking.
7)
Connect IDUODU cable at ODU side (to spare ODU cabinet)
8)
Carry faulty ODU cabinet to the maintenance center
9)
Switch on power supply on IDU
10 ) Carry out functional checks

Faulty ODU repair:
Discouraged for unskilled personnel.
Refer to the ODU TECHNICAL HANDBOOK (REF.[A] on page 412) for operative procedures.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
b)
Only Transceivers and Local Oscillators are available as spare parts:

Discouraged for unskilled personnel.
Refer to the ODU TECHNICAL HANDBOOK (REF.[A] on page 412) for operative procedures.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
403 / 458
8.7.7.3 ODU 1+0 Extendible, 1+1, 2+0
a)
a complete assembly TR + LO + adapter kits already assembled and pretested at the correct
operating frequency is available (recommended)
b)
LO & TR available as individual spare parts (discouraged for unskilled personnel)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In both cases, refer to the ODU TECHNICAL HANDBOOK (REF.[A] on page 412) for operative
procedures.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
404 / 458

Repair procedure depends on spare parts available:

8.8 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form

8.8.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center
Faulty unit repair must be done by authorized repair centers only.
According to the policy (under study) described in footnotes <1.> on page 382 and <2.> on page 384:
the faulty IDUs units or assemblies with front plates and/or babyboards (see Tab. 62. thru
Tab. 66. on pages 382 thru 383) must be sent back to the repair center together with their front plates
and babyboards, without dismounting them from the assembly;
the faulty complete ODU cabinet 1+0 COMPACT (see para.8.7.7.2 on page 403) must be sent
back to the repair center as it is (without opening it);
the faulty ODUs TR + LO + adapter kits assemblies (see para.8.7.7.3 on page 404) must be
sent back to the repair center without dismounting their components from the assembly;
8.8.2 Repair Form filling

To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Fig. 228. on
page 406.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The repair form must be filledin with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with the
faulty unit.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
405 / 458
ALCATE L
REPAIR FORM
CUSTOMER NAME
ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER
SITE
BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT
PRODUCT RELEASE
STATION/RACK
TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SENDER

Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel
EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
SUBRACK
SLOT
MNEMONIC
ALCATEL PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION
FAULT PHASE
REASON FOR REPAIR
PRESUMED CAUSE
INSTALLATION /
TURN ON
CLEAR FAULT
DROP IN PERFORMANCE
OPERATION
INTERMITTENT FAULT
UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT
INTERNAL
LIGHTNING
EXTERNAL
MAINTENANCE
AIR COND.
TEMPERATURE FAULT
OTHER
DATE
NAME OF SENDER
FAULT STILL PRESENT

AFTER REPAIR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TO BE FILLED IN BY THE REPAIR OPERATOR
COMMENTS
PROCESSING
NO FAULTS FOUND
FAULTS DETECTED
UPGRADE
A
STANDARD REPAIRING
SOLDERING /
WIRING
I
NOT REPAIRABLE
(REJECTED)
FL
MECHANICAL
M
BD
ADJUSTMENT
COMPONENT
C
PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARD
V1
P
DIRT
V1
V2
SUBSTITUTED
QUALITY ALERT
CORROSION
I
OTHER
SX
V3
NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE
COMMENTS
DATE
REPAIRING NUMBER
REPAIRING CENTRE
NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR
Fig. 228. Repair form
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
406 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
APPENDICES
SECTION CONTENT
ED
955.203.363 W
PAGE
Chapter 9 Documentation Guide

409
Chapter 10 SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling

427
01
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
407 / 458

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
408 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

9 DOCUMENTATION GUIDE
9.1 Introduction
This chapter contains all information regarding the Customer Documentation and is organized as follows:
INFORMATION REGARDING 9600USY/MDR9000s REL.2.0 CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION
Productreleaseversion handbooks
on page 410
gives the list and description of the Customer Documentation set this handbook belongs to.
INFORMATION REGARDING CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION IN GENERAL
ED
General on Alcatel Customer Documentation

including:
on page 416
CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation
on page 416
Product levels and associated Customer Documentation
on page 417
Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operators Handbooks on page 419
Documentation on paper
on page 421
Documentation on CDROM
on page 423
Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers
on page 425
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
409 / 458
9.2 Productreleaseversion handbooks
lists and briefly describes the handbooks making up the documentation set envisaged for 9600USY
& MDR9000s Rel.1.0 product release
and points out those the Operators should have, in order to carry out the required operations on the
REGENERATOR 3+1 (NE UHRN) equipment configuration.
Please refer to following para.9.3 on page 416 for a general description of Alcatel Customer
Documentation system.
The list of handbooks given here below is valid as at the issue date of this Handbook and
can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.
Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available as at the issue date of this
Handbook.
The 9600USY/MDR9600s Rel.2.0 system can be supplied in two basic versions:
9600USY for ETSI market
MDR9000s for USA market.
The system can be supplied in the following configurations:
Regenerator 1+0 or 1+1 or 2+0 (REG.), including the Network Element type UHR or UHRC
Wireless MultiService Node (WMSN), including the Network Element type UHR or UHRC (as
REG.) and the Network Element type UHM or UHMC (MUX equipment)
Regenerator 3+1 or 4+0 (REG.3+1), including the Network Element type UHRN
Regenerator/Enhanced (REG./E), including the Network Element type UHD or UHDC
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the 9600USY/MDR9600s Rel.2.0
system is modularly composed by different handbooks, each of which can be applied to a specific
version/configuration or to various versions/configurations.
Tab. 70. on page 411 lists the handbooks and indicates their use according to the versions/configurations
stated above.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The [REF] indication in Tab. 70. is relevant to the handbook brief description given in tables Tab. 71. thru
Tab. 76. in the following.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
410 / 458

This paragraph:
Tab. 70. Handbooks usage according to system configuration

CONFIGURATION
HANDBOOK
REF
REG.
REG.
+
REG.3+1
MUX
(WMSN)
REG./E
TECHNICAL HANDBOOKS
ODU Technical Handbook
[A]
UHR/UHRC Technical Handbook
[B]
UHM/UHMC Technical Handbook
[C]
UHRN Technical Handbook
[D]
UHD/UHDC Technical Handbook
[E]
X
X
X
OPERATORS HANDBOOKS
UHR/UHRC CT Operators Handbook
[F]
UHM/UHMC CT Operators Handbook
[G]
UHRN CT Operators Handbook
[H]
UHD/UHDC CT Operators Handbook
[I]
SNMP MIBs
[J]
1320CT Basic Operators Handbook
[K]
1330AS Operators Handbook
[L]
ELM Operators Handbook
[M]
X
X
X
X
INSTALLATION AND LINEUP HANDBOOKS

Interference investigation procedure
[N]
UHR/UHRC & UHD/UHDC Installation Handbook
[O]
UHR/UHRC & UHD/UHDC Lineup Guide
[P]
UHM/UHMC Installation Handbook
[Q]
UHM/UHMC Lineup Guide
[R]
UHRN Installation Handbook
[S]
UHRN Lineup Guide
[T]
DOCUMENTATION CDROM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DCP 9600USY/MDR9000s CD_ROM
ED
[U]
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
411 / 458
REF
HANDBOOK
ODU Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Technical Handbook

[A]
3DB 04163 AAAA

955.203.360 F
3DB 04163 BAAA

955.203.361 U
To be used in the 9600USY Regenerator configurations 1+0, 1+1 and 2+0.

It provides information regarding IDU/REG equipment description and composition,
IDU/REGODU station layouts, IDU/REG hardware setting documentation and IDU/REG &
ODU maintenance (together with handbook REF.[F]).
[B]
UHM/UHMC Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook
3DB 04163 CAAA

955.203.362 V
To be used in the 9600USY WMSN configurations 1+0, 1+1 and 2+0, in addition to
handbook REF.[B]
It provides information regarding IDU/MUX equipment description and composition,
IDU/MUX/REGODU station layouts, IDU/MUX hardware setting documentation and
IDU/MUX maintenance (together with handbook REF.[G]).
[C]
UHRN Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook
3DB 04163 DAAA

955.203.363 W
this handbook
To be used in the 9600USY Regenerator configurations N+0 (N v 4) and N+1 (N v 3).

It provides information regarding IDU/REG equipment description and composition,
IDU/REGODU station layouts, IDU/REG hardware setting documentation and IDU/REG &
ODU maintenance (together with handbook REF.[H]).
[D]
UHD/UHDC Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook
3DB 04163 EAAA

955.203.364 X
To be used in the 9600USY Regenerator/Enhanced configurations 1+0 & 1+1.

It provides information regarding IDU/REG/E equipment description and composition,
IDU/REG/EODU station layouts, IDU/REG/E hardware setting documentation and
IDU/REG/E & ODU maintenance (together with handbook REF.[I]).
[E]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
THIS HANDBOOK
OR NOTE
It is common to all 9600USY configurations. It provides information regarding ODU

equipment description and composition, in particular as far as frequency plans and related
dependent component P/Ns are concerned, as well as ODU repair procedures.
N.B.
Same handbook used in 9600USY & MDR9000s Rel.1.0
UHR/UHRC Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook
ED
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
412 / 458

Tab. 71. Technical Handbooks related to the specific configuration
Tab. 72. Operators Handbooks related to the specific Software Package SWP

REF
HANDBOOK
UHR/UHRC Rel.2.0
CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0
UHM/UHMC Rel.2.0
3DB 04164 AAAA

957.207.060 U
3DB 04164 BAAA

957.207.061 R
To be used, in addition to handbook REF.[F], with:
SWP UHM 9600USY R.2.0 (3DB 03621 AAAA)

Provides UHM/UHMC SWP screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW
management and maintenance.
[G]
UHRN Rel.2.0
3DB 04164 CAAA

957.207.062 J
To be used with:
SWP 3+1 REG.9600USY R.2.0 (3DB 03622 AAAA)

Provides UHRN SWP screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW management
and maintenance.
[H]
UHD/UHDC Rel.2.0
3DB 04164 DAAA

957.207.063 K
To be used with:
SWP REG.9600USY/E R.2.0 (3DB 03623 AAAA)
SWP REG.9600USY/E&MDR9000 R.2.0 (3DB 04119 AAAA)

Provides UHD/UHDC SWP screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW
[I]
SNMP MIBs SWP 2.0
3DB 04164 EAAA

957.207.064 L
To be used with:
SWP REG.9600USY&MDR9000 R.2.0 (3DB 03620 AAAA)
SWP REG.9600USY/E&MDR9000 R.2.0 (3DB 04119 AAAA)

Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Simple Network
Management Protocol software.
[J]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
THIS HANDBOOK
OR NOTE
To be used with:
SWP REG.9600USY R.2.0 (3DB 04120 AAAA)
SWP REG.9600USY&MDR9000 R.2.0 (3DB 03620 AAAA)

Provides UHR/UHRC SWP screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW
[F]
ED
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
413 / 458
REF
HANDBOOK
1320CT
Basic Operators Handbook
[K]
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
THIS HANDBOOK
OR NOTE
3AL 79186 AAAA

957.130.542 E
Ed.03 on
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT (Craft
terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements.
N.B.
1330AS Rel.5.0
Operators Handbook
[L]
3AL 71079 AAAA

957.130.442 A
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm Surveillance
software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
N.B.
ELM Rel.5.0 Operators Handbook
[M]
3AL 71081 AAAA

957.130.462 E
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log
Management software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
N.B.
Tab. 74. Handbooks common to all Alcatel Radio Transmission products

REF
HANDBOOK
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
3DB 04165 EAAA

955.203.374 Z
THIS HANDBOOK
OR NOTE
[N]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Describes the measurement procedure for the interference searching in the various RF bands
used by Alcatel Radio Transmission products.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
414 / 458

Tab. 73. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform
Tab. 75. Installation and LineUp Handbooks related to the specific configuration

The Installation Handbook provides information regarding Equipment installation, according

to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules.
The Lineup Guide provides information regarding equipment line up and commissioning,
according to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules.
REF
HANDBOOK
UHR/UHRC & UHD/UHDC Rel.2.0
Installation Handbook
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
THIS HANDBOOK
OR NOTE
3DB 04165 AAAA

955.203.370 H
[O]
To be used in the Regenerator & Regenerator/Enhanced configurations 1+0, 1+1 and
2+0.
UHR/UHRC & UHD/UHDC Rel.2.0
Lineup Guide
3DB 04165 BAAA

955.203.371 W
[P]
To be used in the Regenerator & Regenerator/Enhanced configurations 1+0, 1+1 and
2+0.
UHM/UHMC Rel.2.0
3DB 04165 CAAA

955.203.372 X
[Q]
To be used in the WMSN configurations 1+0, 1+1 and 2+0, in addition to handbook
REF.[O].
UHM/UHMC Rel.2.0
Lineup Guide
3DB 04165 DAAA

955.203.373 Y
[R]
To be used in the WMSN configurations 1+0, 1+1 and 2+0, in addition to handbook
REF.[P].
UHRN Rel.1.0 & 2.0
[S]
3DB 01532 BAAA

955.203.342 Z
To be used in the Regenerator configurations N+0 (N v 4) and N+1 (N v 3).

N.B.
UHRN Rel.1.0 & 2.0
Lineup Guide
[T]
3DB 01534 BAAA

955.203.352 T
To be used in the Regenerator configurations N+0 (N v 4) and N+1 (N v 3).

N.B.
Tab. 76. Documentation on CDROM

REF
CDROM TITLE
DCP 9600USY/MDR9000s Rel.2.0
CD_ROM EN
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
3DB 00869 BAAA
417.200.019 P
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[U]
Contains, in electronic format, all handbooks listed before (when all handbooks of a NE
type are released)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
415 / 458
This paragraph describes in general the Alcatel Customer Documentation system, details the association
between the product levels and the associated documentation, and explains Customer Documentation
characteristics as well as the policies for its delivery and updating.
This paragraph is fully applicable to the 2nd generation Radio Product families of Alcatel WTD (Wireless
Transmission Division) only.
The documentation typical contents described in para.9.3.3 on page 419, apply to handbooks issued after
February 2002.
9.3.1 CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation

a)
Definition
Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as
plantindependent and is always independent of any Customization.
Plantdependent and/or Customized documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to
commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned
N.B.
b)
Plantdependent and Customized documentation is not described here.
Aims of standard Customer Documentation

Standard system, hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel
the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating, and
maintaining the equipment according to Alcatel Laboratory design and Installation Dept. choices. In
particular:
the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation
of the manmachine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it;
maintenance is described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
No supply to Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and

production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is
envisaged.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
416 / 458

9.3 General on Alcatel Customer Documentation
9.3.2 Product levels and associated Customer Documentation

See Fig. 230. on page 418.

a)
Products
A product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole
of performances and services that it is meant for.
E.g. 9600USY is a product (STM1/0 Urban Digital Radio Link).
b)
Product-releases
A product evolves through successive product-releases, which are the real products marketed
for their delivery at a certain product-release availability date. A certain product-release performs
more functionalities than the previous one.
E.g. 9600USY Rel.1.0 and 9600USY Rel.2.0 are two successive product-releases of the same
product.
A productrelease comprehends a set of hardware components and at least one Software
Package (SWP); as a whole, they identify the possible network applications and the equipment
performances that the specific product-release has been designed, engineered, and marketed for.
c)
Configurations and Network Elements

In some cases, a product-release includes different possible configurations which are
distinguished from one another by different Network Element (NE) types and, from the
management point of view, by different SWPs.
E.g. 9600USY Rel.1.0 includes various configurations with various NE types (Regenerator
1+0/1+1/2+0 with NE types UHR/UHRC; Regenerator 3+1/4+0 with NE type UHRN; WMSN with
NE types UHR/UHRC/UHM/UHMC) each of which has its own specific SWP.
d)
SWP Releases and Versions

See Fig. 229. herebelow.
A SWP is identified by the configuration name and by the version number (tree digits).
The versions first digit corresponds to the productrelease number first digit; the second digit
identifies, together with the first, the SWP release.
The third digit of the SWP version identifies the Patch Level of the SWP Release.
SWP version
SWP Release
Product
Releases
first digit
SWP evolution for bug fixing purposes
(same SWP Release within same ProductRelease)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SWP evolution for additional features

(new SWP Release within same ProductRelease)
(N.B. see next page)
SWP evolution for additional features
(new SWP Release of a new ProductRelease)
Patch Level
1.
0.
1.
0.
1.
0.
1.
1.
1.
0.
2.
0.
Fig. 229. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
417 / 458
e)
Sometimes, different SWP Releases (within the same ProductRelease) are commercially
distinguished by different names, e.g. :
SWP version
SWPRelease commercial name
1.0.x
1.0
1.1.x
1.0B
1.2.x
1.0C
Customer Documentation
A product-release(configuration) has its own set of standard Customer Documentation, usually
formed of several handbooks, i.e., in general:
System and Hardware documentation:
one (or more) Technical Handbook(s) (see page 419 for details)
an Installation Handbook
a Commissioning Handbook or LineUp Guide
Software documentation:
a Craft Terminal Operators Handbook, associated to the specific SWPRelease (see

page 420 for details)
other Operators Handbooks (typically those associated to the SW platform embedded

in the SWP)
PRODUCT
evolution
PRODUCTRELEASE 1.0
PRODUCTRELEASE 2.0
ALTERNATIVE CONFIGURATIONS
CONFIG.A
SWP REL.1.0
PRODUCT
LEVELS
CONFIG.B
evolution
SWP REL.1.1
DOCUMENTATION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CONFIG.A
System & HW
Documentation
SWP REL.1.0
SW
Documentation
SWP REL.1.1
SW
Documentation
Fig. 230. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
418 / 458

N.B.
9.3.3 Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operators Handbooks

a)
Technical Handbook
It is usually composed by a main handbook and enclosed documents. Information is divided into
the following levels (not necessarily in this sequence):
MAIN HANDBOOK:
GENERAL INFORMATION
Documentation Guide : contains general information on the Customer Documentation

set envisaged for the equipment and detailed information regarding the specific
handbook, like handbook structure/history and abbreviation list.
SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling : describes the equipment labelling

and the norms mandatory or suggested that must be considered to avoid injuries on
persons and/or damage to the equipment.
INFORMATIVE LEVEL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
System Description : gives the firstlevel description of equipment in the specific

configuration the handbook is meant for. The information given is enough to understand
the equipment composition and operation and to read the operative level chapters.
Functional Description : gives the secondlevel description of equipment in the specific

configuration the handbook is meant for. Reading this chapter is not necessary to carry
out standard installation commissioning and maintenance activities.
Technical Specifications : it supplies in detail the equipment technical characteristics.
OPERATIVE LEVEL
Physical Configuration : gives detailed operative information regarding:
the equipments items (P/Ns, equipping rules, labels for remote inventory)
their physical and logical position in the system
the unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description
of the access points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
pinout description of connectors for Customer usage
summary and operative information on characteristics of external interfaces
Station Layouts : lists and describes the most common of all the available system
configurations envisaged for the specific configuration the handbook is meant for. For
each configuration a station layout (with cable interconnection diagram) and a simple
system block diagram are present.
Maintenance : describes the equipment routine and corrective maintenance procedures

as well as those for the unit replacement with spare parts.
Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : lists the enclosed documents having
P/N different from that of the handbook (they can be used also as annexes to other
handbooks) and describes how to use the Hardware Setting Documents enclosed.
ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS : Hardware Setting Documents and other documents for specific
purposes (typical examples: ODU repair procedures, branching detailed configurations and
drawings, etc.)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
419 / 458
Craft Terminal Operators Handbook

It is usually composed by various sections. Each section is an independent document that can evolve
independently from the others. The sections always present are:
SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION containing the following main parts (not necessarily in this
sequence):
Documentation Guide and SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling, as

Technical Handbook
SWP description : lists and describes the Software Packages the Handbook refers to.
Installation : describes in detail the operations necessary for the SWP installation and
upgrading (ECT parts and equipment parts).
ECTequipment remote connections : gives instructions to allow the remote connection

between ECT and the equipment.
SECTION 2: NE MANAGEMENT : gives the description of the menu structure and of all the NE
functionalities available in the Craft Terminal. This section is organized in several chapters
grouped according to the following general scheme:
General information
Equipment configuration management
Setting of parameters for maintenance
Events Log and Performance Monitoring management
Software management
SECTION 3: NE MAINTENANCE : gives the description of the NE troubleshooting based on

the use of the Craft Terminal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Depending on the SWP contents, other sections can be present in the handbook, to describe other
specific applications or features.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
420 / 458

b)
9.3.4 Documentation on paper

a)
Handbook format
Handbooks are supplied on A4sized papers for text and general drawings, and, when necessary,
A3sized papers for detailed drawings, in four ring solid/plasticcovered binders.
b)
Handbook languages
Handbook standard language is English. As far as handbooks supplied in other languages,
translation is relevant to the text and the drawings within the text.
With regard to Operators Handbooks containing screen prints of the software applications, the
screens included are in the language envisaged by the applicative software supplied to the Customer
(e.g. an Operators Handbook translated in Russian has the screens in English if the user interface
is not in Russian).
Engineering documentation (like selected sheets of unit schematics and component layout given
only as hardware presetting documentation) is bilingual ItalianEnglish.
c)
Handbook identification
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each handbook is identified by:
ED
the name of the product-release,
the name of the configuration, if more than one is envisaged within the product-release,
the first two digits of the SWPversion as far as Operators Handbook is concerned,
the handbook name,
the handbook part number,
the handbook edition:
first draft edition=01A
second draft edition=01B
.....
first validated edition=01
second validated edition=02
nnth validated edition=nn
the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of printing, but
to the date on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for production.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
421 / 458
Handbook updating
The documentation is maintained updated according to the technical changes of the product it refers
to, provided that these technical changes does really impact Customer Documentation (e.g.:
generally, bugfixing releases do not impact the Operators Handbook). Updating of handbooks,
when necessary, is done synchronously with the products industrial technical change, in due time
for having the new product version and the handbooks associated new edition available at the same
time.
1)
Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)

In case of handbook updating for its technical contents:
the edition, hence the date, is increased;
the sections/chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in a suitable
Handbook History Table in the Handbook Guide section;
a specific note in the same section sumsup the reasons for the change;
in the affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text
and drawings (this is done after the first officially released and validated version).
NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operators Handbooks)
are not modified unless the new SWP version distributed to Customers implies
manmachine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the
understanding of the explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the SWP
version marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent
version if the screen contents are unchanged.
2)
Changes due to a new product-release
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01. In this case,
the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
422 / 458

d)
9.3.5 Documentation on CDROM

a)
Contents
A CustomerDocumentation CDROM is conceived to contain in readonly electronic format the
handbooks of all the product-release(configurations) of one productrelease.
The first edition of a CDROM is created only when all the handbooks of the first released
product-releaseconfiguration of one productrelease have been issued as first validated editions.
If envisaged, the handbooks relevant to other product-releaseconfigurations of the same
productrelease are added in a further CDROM edition, when they are all completed and validated.
No additional information is added to each handbook, so that the documentation present in the
CDROM is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper (with the same handbook
editions).
b)
Standards
CDROMs are generated according to ISO 9660 norms.
A master CDROM is obtained as follows:
each source document is converted into .pdf format by Adobe Acrobat Distiller 4.0;
bookmarks are generated for complex documents in order to make the navigation inside the
documents easier;
some hyperlinks, which make the navigation through the various handbooks easier, are
manually added. The following hyperlinks are standard:
from the INDEX document toward each individual file contained in the CDROM
from section Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes of each Technical Handbook,
toward each specific document listed in the section itself (these documents could be
collected in a separate file).
The files processed in this way are then transferred on a PC where a master CDROM is recorded.
Suitable checks are made in order to have a virusfree product.
The CDROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments or any other environment for which
a suitable Reader has been envisaged by Adobe.
In order to open correctly the pdf files contained in the CDROM, the use of Acrobat Reader Version
4.0 at least is mandatory.
The CDROM does not contain the Acrobat Reader program. Getting it and installing it on the
Customer specific platform is on Customers charge.
c)
CDROM identification
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each CDROM is identified:
ED
1)
by the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CDROM upper
surface:
the name of the productrelease,
a writing indicating the language(s),
the CDROM P/N (Factory P/N and ANV P/N),
the CDROM edition (first edition=01)
2)
and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose
collection and processing the CDROM itself has been created.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
423 / 458
CDROM updating
The list of source handbook/document P/Nseditions indicated in previous para.c ) point 2 ), in
association with the CDROMs own P/Nedition, is also loaded in the AlcatelInformationSystem
as a structured list.
Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel archive
system, the AlcatelInformationSystem automatically rises a warning toward the Customer
Documentation department, indicating the list of CDROMs that must be updated to include the new
editions of these handbooks/documents.
This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CDROM.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Updating of CDROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks
composing the collection.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
424 / 458

d)
9.3.6 Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers

a)
Standard supply
Handbooks and CDROMs are standard commercial items and are ordered and delivered as any
other Alcatel commercial item.
Handbooks and CDROMs are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer
to.
The number of handbooks or CDROMs per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
b)
Productdocumentation consistency
Equipment description and layout are always general, i.e. they never describe the actual
composition of the equipment supplied to Customer (this task is entrusted to plantdependent
documentation).
Detailed hardware documentation concerns actually supplied units and is coherent with the
production issue of such units.
Softwareassociated handbooks are coherent with the supplied SWP release.
Copies of the handbooks regarding a specific productrelease previously delivered can be required
specifying P/N and edition.
c)
Inadvance supply
Whenever handbooks or CDROMs are delivered before the relevant equipment delivery, there is
the risk that their contents might not agree with the characteristics of the equipment which will be
delivered: the more they are in advance the less are they likely to agree.
d)
Supplying updated handbooks and CDROMs to Customers

Supplying updated handbooks or CDROMs to Customers who have already received previous
issues is subject to commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery, we mean the supply of a complete copy of a new issue of the
handbook (supplying erratacorrige sheets is not envisaged).
e)
Copyright notification
The technical information of the handbooks and CDROMs supplied to Customers is the property
of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
f)
Supply to Customers of Customer Documentation source files
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Presently not envisaged.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
425 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
426 / 458

10 SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

10.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested (see also point
d ) on page 16) that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment.
The stated norms apply both to the operations described in this manual and to those described in the
related manuals listed in para.9.2 on page 410.
Compliance with European Norms
herebelow
Safety Rules
including:
General Rules
Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command
Dangerous Electrical Voltages
Harmful Optical Signals
Risks of Explosions
Moving Mechanical Parts
Heatradiating Mechanical Parts
Microwave radiations
Specific safety rules in this handbook
on page 428
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)

including:
on page 436
on page 428
on page 429
on page 430
on page 431
on page 433
on page 433
on page 434
on page 435
on page 435
EMC General Norms Installation

EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation
EMC General Norms Maintenance
on page 436
on page 437
on page 437
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
on page 438
Suggestions, notes and cautions
on page 438
Labels affixed to the Equipment

including:
on page 439
Labels specific for 9600USY Equipment

General use labels
on page 439
on page 443
10.2 Compliance with European Norms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to chapter 7 on page 343.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
427 / 458
10.3 Safety Rules
Before carrying out any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance operations
carefully read the related Handbooks, in particular:
Installation
LineUp or Commissioning
Maintenance chapter of the Technical Handbook
Observe safety rules
When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment
parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools
In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating
this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical
assistance is meant :
personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be
aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary
measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others.
The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified
is not permitted.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give
access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong
exclusively to the service personnel.
For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any
inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings,
inscriptions ect.
It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety,
i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station
upstream (rack or station distribution frame).
The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and
statement:
SAFETY RULES
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
428 / 458

10.3.1 General Rules
10.3.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command

It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.
The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 38461984. The symbols or statements are
enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 38641984.
CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT

INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND
WHIT RED RIMBLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT)
IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUNDWHITE
SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).
CONTAINS A SYMBOL
INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW
BACKGROUNDBLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION

OR INSTRUCTION.
(YELLOW BACKGROUNDBLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standardknown
symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common
ones, specifically:
dangerous electrical voltages
harmful optical signals
risk of explosion
moving mechanical parts
heatradiating Mechanical Parts
microwave radiations
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
429 / 458

The symbols presented in para.10.3.3 through 10.3.8 are all the possible symbols that
could be present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the
equipment this handbook refers to.
10.3.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages

10.3.3.1 Electrical safety: Labelling
The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equipment
will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING !
Ground protect the equipment before
connecting it to manins
Make sure that power has been cut off
before disconnecting ground protection.
10.3.3.2 Electrical safety: general rules
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where a.c. or
d.c. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance
documents and the following general rules:
a)
Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if envisaged in the equipment). Avoid
touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
b)
Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in
burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
430 / 458
10.3.4 Harmful Optical Signals

10.3.4.1 Optical safety: Labelling

If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 608251 and 2
International Norms.
The symbol indicates the presence of a LASER beam. Danger level is stated within a rectangular label:
If the LASER is a class 1 product, the label depicting the symbol within a triangle is not compulsory.
The rectangular shaped label bears all the information needed, i.e.:
LASER class
Power emitted
Wave length
Ref. Norm
Precautionary measures taken depend on LASER class
Indications given on openings, panels and safety interlockers
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW
DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW
DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT
P.MAX=31m...... =1300mm. IEC 825 1993
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
exemple of power and lenght values
See para.7.11.4 on page 364 for further information.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
431 / 458
On handling optical equipments or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed and
that the system complies with applicable optical standards.
DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by

the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for
installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables
transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning /
maintenance documents and the following general rules:
a)
Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen,
laser radiation may be present.
b)
Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable,
unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
c)
Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser
radiation is present.
d)
All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with
protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is
disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.
e)
Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by
means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. A
magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.
f)
Never point an unterminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it is
absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
g)
Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical
links between the transmitter and the receiver.
h)
Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical
devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.
10.3.4.3 Optical safety: equipment specific data
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to para.7.11 on page 363.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
432 / 458

10.3.4.2 Optical safety: general rules
10.3.5 Risks of Explosions

10.3.5.1 Labelling and safety instructions

This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:
Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow
(batteryemitted hydrogen). A 417IEC5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the
openings must not be covered up.
10.3.6 Moving Mechanical Parts

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been
stopped.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
433 / 458
10.3.7 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts
The presence of heatradiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy
with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
As stated by IEC 950 Norm., para.1.4.7 the touchable mechanical parts are those whose temperature T
exceeds the limits established by the following formula (temperatures in C ):
(TTamb) (DTmax + 25 Tmra)

where:
T
Tamb
DTmax
Temperature of the mechanical part measured at ambient temperature Tamb.
Tmra
The maximum room ambient temperature permitted by the equipment

specification or 25C, whichever is greater.
Ambient temperature during the test.

Value defined by IEC 950 Norm, Table 16 part 2a, para.5.1, and specified in the
table below.
Tab. 77. IEC 950 Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2

Maximum overtemperature (C )
Operatoraccessible parts
Metal
Glass,
porcelain
Plastic,
rubber
Handle knob, ect., held or touched

for short periods
35
45
60
Handles, knobs, ect., regularly held
30
40
50
Outer surface of the equipment that

can be touched
45
55
70
Inner surface of the equipment that

can be touched
45
55
70
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where
heatradiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and
commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:
a)
ED
Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of
your body.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
434 / 458

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

10.3.8 Microwave radiations

Microwave radiations can endanger your health. Ensure the transmitters are switched OFF before
working close to and in front of the antennas.
No dangerous level of microwave radiations exists outside the antenna feeder. Nevertheless, body should
not be exposed to the radiation in front of the antenna ( < 0.5 m ) for a long time ( > 6 minutes ).
10.3.9 Specific safety rules in this handbook

Specific safety rules are specified in the following chapters:
ED
chapter 8, para.8.2.2 on page 370
chapter 8, para.8.6.1 on page 386
chapter 8, para.8.7.4.2 on page 394
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
435 / 458
The equipments EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,
grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic
units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).
Before starting any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to the
following Handbooks:
Installation,
LineUp or Commissioning
Maintenance chapter in this Technical Handbook
The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook
by the symbol and term:
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
10.4.1 EMC General Norms Installation
ED
All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use
only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant
Documentation, or those specified in the CustomersInstallation Norms. (or similar
documents)
Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
Install filters outside the equipment as required
Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance
Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and decrease it.
Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
436 / 458

10.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

10.4.2 EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation
Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility
Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,
ESD connector protections, etc.)
To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given
10.4.3 EMC General Norms Maintenance
ED
Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
437 / 458
Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary
measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated
the maintenance and monitoring operations.
Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning
labels have been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.
Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of:
an elasticized band worn around the wrist
a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack.
ELASTICIZED BAND
COILED CORD
Fig. 231. Antistatic protection device kit
10.6 Suggestions, notes and cautions

Suggestions and special notes in this handbook are marked by the following symbol:
Suggestion or note....
Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TITLE...
statement....
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
438 / 458

10.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges

10.7 Labels affixed to the Equipment

This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification labels affixed
to the equipment, with the exception of those already mentioned in para.10.3.2 (page 429) thru 10.5 (page
438).
The label description is grouped as follows:
Labels specific for 9600USY Equipment, starting on this page
General Use Labels, starting on page 443.
10.7.1 Labels specific for 9600USY Equipment

In the following, the position and the contents of the labels specific for 9600USY Equipment are described:
on 9600USY IDU assembly, herebelow
on 9600USY ODU assembly, 1+0 COMPACT configuration, on page 440
on 9600USY ODU assembly, 2+0 or 1+1 configuration:
Label Item Identification, on page 441
Label Polarization Type, on page 442
10.7.1.1 Label affixed on 9600USY IDU assembly
ALCATEL
9618 USY 128
12345
STATION REF.0116317
N.B.
Ref.Fig. 237. pos. (10) on page 445 for label position

SYMBOL OR WRITING
ALCATEL
9618 USY 128 (example)

12345 (example)
STATION REF.0116317 (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CE
MEANING
Alcatel Logo
Equipment Acronym
Competent Body Number
System Documentation Reference
European Community Logo
Fig. 232. Label affixed on 9600USY IDU assembly
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
439 / 458
ALCATEL
IN ALTERNATIVE
9618 USY 128 CE
12345
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
TR0 18470 : 18662

10.7.1.2 Label affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 1+0 compact configuration
CH 18470
299302337
01
3DB00249AAAA
01
CW001921014
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
STATION 01234567
SYMBOL OR WRITING
ALCATEL

CE
12345 (example)
!
MEANING
Alcatel Logo
Equipment Acronym
Not Harmonized Frequency Logo
ElectroStatic Device Logo
TR0 18470:18662 (example)

CH 18470 (example)
299302337 01 (example)
3DB00249AAAA 01 (example)
A
CW001921014 (example)
B
STATION 01234567 (example)
N.B.
Transceiver 0 Frequency Range

Transceiver 0 Frequency Channel
N.B.
Factory P/N + CS
ANV P/N + CS
ANV P/N + CS Bar Code 128
Factory S/N
Factory S/N Bar Code 128
Frequency Range (if wideband filter used) and Frequency Channel (if narrowband filter
used) in alternative
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 233. Label affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 1+0 compact configuration
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
440 / 458

10.7.1.3 Label affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 2+0 or 1+1 configuration
ALCATEL
9618 USY 128 CE
12345
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
TR0 18470 : 18662
CH 18470
IN ALTERNATIVE
299302337
01
3DB00249AAAA
01
TR1 18470 : 18662

CW001921014
CH 18470
STATION
01234567
SYMBOL OR WRITING
ALCATEL

CE
12345 (example)
!
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
MEANING
Alcatel Logo
Equipment Acronym
Not Harmonized Frequency Logo
ElectroStatic Device Logo
TR0 18470:18662 (example)

CH 18470 (example)
TR1 18470:18662 (example)
CH 18470 (example)
299302337 01 (example)
3DB00249AAAA 01 (example)
A
CW001921014 (example)
B
STATION 01234567 (example)
N.B.

N.B.
N.B.
Factory P/N + CS
ANV P/N + CS
ANV P/N + CS Bar Code 128
Factory S/N
Factory S/N Bar Code 128
Frequency Range (if wideband filter used) and Frequency Channel (if narrowband filter
used) in alternative
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 234. Item Identification label affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 2+0 or 1+1 configuration
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
441 / 458

Certificato Omologazione ITALIA

ALCATEL
ISCTI/2/1/01/044000
1VH
XPIC
SYMBOL OR WRITING
ALCATEL
VH0
MEANING
Alcatel Logo
Connector position channel 1
Transceiver identifier 1
Connector position channel 0
Transceiver identifier 0
Polarization type Vertical
Polarization type Horizontal
XPIC
ISCTI/2/1/01/044000 (example)
N.B.
N.B.
Frequency Reuse with XPIC option equipped
N.B.
Homologation certificate number (optional)
The following marks are written on the label during the final test in factory:
for each channel 0 and 1, the option V or H , in alternative
XPIC option (marked if XPIC equipped)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 235. Polarization Type label affixed on 9600USY ODU assembly, 2+0 or 1+1 configuration
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
442 / 458

10.7.2 General use labels

Fig. 236. thru Fig. 241. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and
subracks.
Fig. 242. thru Fig. 243. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the
labels.
The table below relates the ref. numbers stated on the figures to the labels used.
Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.
Tab. 78. Label references

Ref. No.
Name of Label
Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
Item identification label item on catalog
Label identifying the equipment
Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N.) + CE mark
Serial number of item specified on catalogue + Subrack ESD mark
Homologation certificate number (optional)
On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment.

Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
443 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ABCD
ED
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 78. on page 443
Fig. 236. Largesubrack labels
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
444 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
955.203.363 W
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 78. on page 443.
Fig. 237. Smallsubrack labels
01
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
445 / 458
xxxxxx
xxxxxxxxx
xxxxxx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ABC
Fig. 238. Labels on units with standard cover plate
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
446 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ABC
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 78. on page 443.
Fig. 239. Modules label
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
447 / 458


NB.1
ABC
NB.1 = The label is present on the p.c.s. component side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 240. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
448 / 458

NB.1
ABC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NB. 1 = The label is present on p.c.s. components side or rear side on the empty spaces.
Fig. 241. Back panels internal label
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
449 / 458

FACTORY P/N + CS
FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

(format 128; Module = 0,166; EN 799; Subset B/C)
Fig. 242. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + space + ICS

ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + ICS BAR CODE
(format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
ALCATEL FACTORY PART

NUMBER + SPACE + CS
ACRONYM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

(format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
Fig. 243. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
450 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SECTION CONTENT
ED
955.203.363 W
PAGE
Chapter 11 Hardware Setting Documentation

453
01
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
451 / 458

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
452 / 458
11 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION

11.1 Introduction
This section lists the annexed documents to refer to for unit/subunit hardware setting options.
The list of the enclosed documents is given in Tab. 81. on page 457.
11.2 Hardware setting documents explanation
UNIT IDENTIFICATION P/Ns AND CHANGE STATUS

Each unit or sub-unit is distinguished by:
a dual Part No.:
Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)
ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx) (NOTE)
NOTE
The last two ANV-P/N letters (in the following stated as suffix) stand for a feasible
alternative, they might differentiate two units even though still functionally
compatible. For this reason the indicated ANV P/N does not include the last two
letters.
For example : the units having P/Ns 3AL34065AAAA and 3AL34065AABA
are functionally compatible and, as regards to hardware settings, the MSxxx
document (described hereafter) 3AL34065AAAA-MSxxx is applicable for both.
and by a pair of design & production series (change status):
CS, associated to the Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)
ICS, associated to ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx)
The following table shows an example of correspondence between FACTORY P/N + CS and
ANV P/N + ICS
Tab. 79. Example of correspondence between CS and suffix + ICS
FACTORY CODE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ANV CODE
P/N
CS
P/N
ICS
487.156.612
01
3AL 34422 AA AA
01
487.156.612
02
3AL 34422 AA AB
01
487.156.612
03
3AL 34422 AA AC
01
The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
In this example you can see that the production series is identified only by the CS as far as the
Factory code is concerned, and by the suffix + ICS if the ANV code is referred to.
Some of the possible positions of the label indicating the units P/Ns and CSICS are illustrated
in para.10.7.2 on page 443.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
453 / 458
CROSSREFERENCE (Tab. 80. on page 456)

The HARDWARE SETTINGS can be executed after having checked all the subunits belonging to
a unit, by considering the above cited crossreference, and by using the presetting documents
indicated in Tab. 81. on page 457 and presented in the following point.
ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
For each type of unit or sub-unit having customizable setting options, the document
ANV P/NMSxxx
is annexed to this handbook.
The MSxxx documents are enclosed in the ANV P/N order. The Edition of the enclosed MSxxx
document is the highest available at the date on which the Technical Handbook is assembled, or the
CDROM containing it is burned.
Use of the document MSxxx:
MSxxx usually means document for hardware presetting options (the MSxxx documents
Part No. is as that of the unit or sub-unit and its MS acronym defines type).
The xxx part of MSxxx is relevant to ANV internal identification codes.
As the Customer may have to manage many units of the same type (same P/N) but with different
CSICS, the document MSxxx describes with possible different chapters the different setting
options, according to all the possible CSsICSs. For this purpose, a table at the beginning of
document (PREFACE) indicates the chapter to be used according to the CS or the
corresponding suffix + ICS, taking into account that:
a change of the production series does not necessarily imply a change in the setting
options;
a change of the ANV P/N suffix does not imply a new MSxxx document;
the CS, SUFFIX and ICS must be meant as:
from specified CS, SUFFIX or ICS (included)
to next CS, SUFFIX or ICS (excluded) if listed
the sequence of CSs is increasing from alphanumeric to numeric (e.g. CS=A0 is lower
than CS=01).
Each chapter contains:
one or more tables defining the relationship between the functions achievable and the
setting options to make;
the unit layout drawing which shows the exact location of all the setting options.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
IDENTIFIES PIN 1 OF COMPONENT

To make TC Hardware Settings (when necessary) remove the protective
cover plate present on the rear side of the board and replace it at the end of the
operation
The setting options described in the documents MSxxx must be used according to
3AL377470001 (962.000.022 F) MSxxx document, inserted in Tab. 81. on page 457, which
shows the ON (closed) position of microswitches.
Those setting options that on the table are indicated by the caption For factory use only must
never be modified.
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
454 / 458

EXAMPLE
The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!

N.B.
Taking into account the same unit of Tab. 79. on page 453:
FACTORY CODE
ANV CODE
P/N
CS
P/N
ICS
487.156.612
01
3AL 34422 AAAA
01
487.156.612
02
3AL 34422 AAAB
01
487.156.612
03
3AL 34422 AAAC
01
and supposing that the setting options valid for CS=01 are equal to those for CS=02, but change
for CS=03, the table at the beginning of the document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ will be:
CHAPTER
CAPITOLO
FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA
ANV P/N
CODICE ANV
FROM CS
DA CS
FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO
FROM ICS
DA ICS
01
AA
01
03
AC
01
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:

FACTORY CODE
ANV CODE
P/N
CS
P/N
ICS
487.156.612
01
3AL 34422 AAAA
01
487.156.612
02
3AL 34422 AAAB
01
you will use Chapter 1 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FACTORY CODE
ANV CODE
P/N
CS
P/N
ICS
487.156.612
03
3AL 34422 AAAC
01
487.156.612
04
3AL 34422 AAAD
01
you will use Chapter 2 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
455 / 458
11.3.1 Documentation for hardware settings
Tab. 80. on this page gives the association between a unit and the documents enclosed to be
used for the unit hardware setting.
Tab. 81. on page 457 lists the documents enclosed to the handbook, sorted according to ANV
P/N.
Information for the use of HW setting documents is given in para.11.2 on page 453.
Tab. 80. Hardware setting documentation cross references
WARNING ABOUT RRAMODEM
Different types of RRAMODEM units are listed in this table. Be sure to use the
correct document MSZZQ, according to the unit and subunit P/Ns.
UNIT NAME
UNIT ANV P/N

(Factory P/N)
Documents to use
(column REF in Tab. 81. on
page 457)
Units listed by ANV P/N

Portable Service Kit (PSK)
3DB 00511 AA
(411.200.483)
[d]+ [a]
RRAMODEM 16 QAM
3DB 00275 AA
(411.200.482 )
[g] + [a]
XPIC BOARD N.B.
3DB 01021 AA
(474.210.087)
[c] + [a]
RRA MOD 128 QAM STM1 N.B.
3DB 02289 AA
(411.200.541 )
[h] + [a]
RRA/MODEM 32 QAM (STM1)
3DB 02547 AA
(411.200.549 )
[e] + [a]
3+1 AUX. SERVICE &

MANAGEMENT
3DB 02781 AA
(411.200.552)
3+1 SWITCHING LOGIC
3DB 02783 AA
(411.200.553)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
[b]+ [f] + [a]

See also para.4.3.2.1.5
on page 121
[i]+ [a]
The XPIC BOARD is assembled on the RRAMOD 128 QAM STM1 (in case of XPIC
option); see Fig. 51. on page 126.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
456 / 458

11.3 List of enclosed documents
Tab. 81. List of enclosed documents

The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the
handbook is the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of
enclosed documents is not specified in this table.
UNIT ANV P/N

(Factory P/N)
Enclosed Document
HW setting documents listed and enclosed by P/N order
[a]
MICROSWITCHES ON
POSITIONS
3AL 37747 0001

MSZZQ
[b]
ESCONWTD
see also point a ) on page 121
3AL 79208 AB
(487.156.992)
3AL 79208 ABAA

MSZZQ
[c]
XPIC
3DB 01429 AA
(487.210.483)
3DB 01429 AAAA

MSZZQ
[d]
SERVICE KIT
3DB 01491 AA
(487.210.489 )
3DB 01491 AAAA

MSZZQ
[e]
RRA MODEM 32 QAM

N.B.
3DB 02545 AA
(487.210.627)
3DB 02545 AAAA

MSZZQ
[f]
SAM 3+1 COMPATIBLE

see also point b ) on page 121
3DB 02772 AA
(487.210.736)
3DB 02772 AAAA

MSZZQ
[g]
RRA MODEM 16 QAM

N.B.
3DB 03250 AA
(487.210.777 )
3DB 03250 AAAA

MSZZQ
[h]
RRA 128QAM COST REDUCTION

N.B.
3DB 03404 AA
(487.210.830)
3DB 03404 AAAA

MSZZQ
[i]
LOGIC UNIT 3+1
3DB 03471 AA
(487.230.555)
3DB 03471 AAAA

MSZZQ
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
UNIT NAME
REF
ED
for the meaning of the presetting led onair management refer to N.B.2,
Tab. 32. and Tab. 33. on page 127.
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
457 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
END OF DOCUMENT
ED
01
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DA AA
458
458 / 458
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

UNIT HW PRESETTING PREDISP.HW UNITA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 FROM - DA CS=? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
01
990126
ED
DATE
ED
CHANGE NOTE
E.Monzani ITAVE
E.Maisano ITAVE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
01
962.000.022 MSZZQ
3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ

4
1/ 4

HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI

The table present in the Table of contents indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nellindice (Table of contents) indica la prima e le due pi recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per lutilizzo di questo documento ed il significato
di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.
CHAPTER
CAPITOLO
FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
FROM CS
DA CS
ANV P/N
CODICE ANV
FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO
FROM ICS
DA ICS
01
01
962.000.022 MSZZQ
3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ

4
2/ 4

1 FROM - DA
CS=?
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N HDZZQ ED.02
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE
ED
01
962.000.022 MSZZQ
3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ

4
3/ 4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO
ED
01
962.000.022 MSZZQ
3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ
4/ 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
4
01
020404
SC02040401
E.Monzani ITAVE
A.Pirovano ITAVE
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
ESCONWTD
ED
01
487.156.992 MSZZQ
3AL 79208 ABAA MSZZQ

4
1/ 4


editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.
CHAPTER
CAPITOLO
FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ANV P/N
CODICE ANV
FROM CS
DA CS
FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO
FROM ICS
DA ICS
01
AA
01
01
487.156.992 MSZZQ

4
2/ 4

1 FROM - DA
CS=01

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.156.992 MSZZQ

4
3/ 4
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni


DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: vedere Manuale di Operatore della corretta SW Release
Refer to correct SW Release of the operators handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.156.992 MSZZQ

4
4/ 4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
4
01
010913
S401091301
E.CORRADINI
G.MAISTO
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
XPIC
ED
01
487.210.483 MSZZQ
3DB 01429 AAAA MSZZQ

4
1/ 4


editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.
CHAPTER
CAPITOLO
FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ANV P/N
CODICE ANV
FROM CS
DA CS
FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO
FROM ICS
DA ICS
01
AA
01
01
487.210.483 MSZZQ

4
2/ 4

1 FROM - DA
CS=01

TC : PONTICELLI A GOCCIA DI STAGNO ( OVE NON SPECIFICATO, DI SOLO USO INTERNO)

TC : Straps with solder drop ( where not stated, factory use only )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.483 MSZZQ

4
3/ 4


DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: P/N EJZZQ ED.03
*=
FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RITARDO NON INSERITO

Delay not inserted
I11
INSERISCE CELLA DI RITARDO

Delay inserted
I11
DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only
I12
DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only
I13
DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only
I14

ED
01
487.210.483 MSZZQ

4
4/ 4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
4
01
000619
S400061901
S.SOLIMENA ITACO
G.MAISTO ITACO
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
SERVICE KIT
ED
01
487.210.489 MSZZQ

4
1/ 4


editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.
CHAPTER
CAPITOLO
FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ANV P/N
CODICE ANV
FROM CS
DA CS
FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO
FROM ICS
DA ICS
01
AA
01
01
487.210.489 MSZZQ

4
2/ 4

1 FROM - DA
CS=01

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.489 MSZZQ

4
3/ 4


*=
COMMUTATORI PSK PSK commutators

COMM. ID
DESCRIZIONE DESCRIPTION
CM1
Prima cifra del numero di telefono per lEOW

First digit for EOW phone number
CM2
Seconda cifra del numero di telefono per lEOW, ove lo 0 deve essere
impostato come A
Second digit for EOW phone number, where 0 must be set as A
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.489 MSZZQ

4
4/ 4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
5
01
020520
S402051701
E.CORRADINI ITACO
G.MAISTO ITACO
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
RRAMODEM 32 QAM
ED
01
487.210.627 MSZZQ

5
1/ 5


editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.
CHAPTER
CAPITOLO
FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ANV P/N
CODICE ANV
FROM CS
DA CS
FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO
FROM ICS
DA ICS
01
AA
01
01
487.210.627 MSZZQ

5
2/ 5

1 FROM - DA
CS=01


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.627 MSZZQ

5
3/ 5

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

REAR VIEW SIDE - VISTA LATO RETRO
ED
01
487.210.627 MSZZQ

5
4/ 5


*=
GESTIONE LED ONAIR

Led onair manegement
ATTIVAZIONE LED ONAIR
Led onair on
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DISATTIVAZIONE LED ONAIR

Led onair off
TC7
TC7

ED
01
487.210.627 MSZZQ

5
5/ 5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
4
01
011220
S401122001
E.CORRADINI ITACO
G.MAISTO ITACO
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
S.A.M. COMPATIBLE 3+1
ED
01
487.210.736 MSZZQ

4
1/ 4


editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.
CHAPTER
CAPITOLO
FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ANV P/N
CODICE ANV
FROM CS
DA CS
FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO
FROM ICS
DA ICS
03
AA
03
01
487.210.736 MSZZQ

4
2/ 4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1 FROM - DA
CS=03

ED
01
487.210.736 MSZZQ

4
3/ 4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10


*=
ED
01
487.210.736 MSZZQ

4
4/ 4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
5
02
020520
S402051702
E.CORRADINI ITACO
G.MAISTO ITACO
01
020211
S402021801
E.CORRADINI ITACO
G.MAISTO ITACO
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
RRAMODEM 16 QAM
ED
02
487.210.777 MSZZQ

5
1/ 5


editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.
CHAPTER
CAPITOLO
FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ANV P/N
CODICE ANV
FROM CS
DA CS
FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO
FROM ICS
DA ICS
01
AA
01
02
487.210.777 MSZZQ

5
2/ 5

1 FROM - DA
CS=01


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
02
487.210.777 MSZZQ

5
3/ 5

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

REAR VIEW SIDE - VISTA LATO RETRO
ED
02
487.210.777 MSZZQ

5
4/ 5


*=
GESTIONE LED ONAIR

Led onair manegement
ATTIVAZIONE LED ONAIR
Led onair on
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DISATTIVAZIONE LED ONAIR

Led onair off
TC7
TC7

ED
02
487.210.777 MSZZQ

5
5/ 5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
4
01
020520
S402051701
E.CORRADINI ITACO
G.MAISTO ITACO
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
RRA 128 QAM

COST REDUCTION
ED
01
487.210.830 MSZZQ

4
1/ 4


editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.
CHAPTER
CAPITOLO
FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ANV P/N
CODICE ANV
FROM CS
DA CS
FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO
FROM ICS
DA ICS
02
AA
02
01
487.210.830 MSZZQ

4
2/ 4

1 FROM - DA
CS=02


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.830 MSZZQ

4
3/ 4


*=
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.830 MSZZQ

4
4/ 4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3
5
01
011220
S401122001
E.CORRADINI
G.MAISTO
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
LOGIC UNIT 3+1
ED
01
487.230.555 MSZZQ

6
1/ 6


editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.
CHAPTER
CAPITOLO
FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ANV P/N
CODICE ANV
FROM CS
DA CS
FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO
FROM ICS
DA ICS
01
AA
01
01
487.230.555 MSZZQ

6
2/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1 FROM - DA
CS=01

ED
01
487.230.555 MSZZQ

6
3/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
REAR SIDE VIEW VISTA LATO RETRO
ED
01
487.230.555 MSZZQ
4/ 6



*=
DI USO INTERNO (RESET MICROPROCESSORE ROUTER) * 1

Factory use only ( Router Microprocessor Reset)
DI USO INTERNO (RESET MICROPROCESSORE AGENT)
Factory use only (Agent Microprocessor Reset)
* 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DI USO INTERNO
Factory use only
ED
(SEGNALE DI TEST PER FPGA)

(Test Signal for FPGA)
* 3 1
(RESET MANUALE FPGA)

(FPGA Manual Reset)
* 3 2

* 3 3

* 3 4
01
487.230.555 MSZZQ

6
5/ 6

SEZIONAMENTO OSCILLATORE 8 MHZ ROUTER

8MHz ROUTER Oscillator sectioning
SEZIONAMENTO OSCILLATORE 8 MHZ AGENT
8MHz AGENT Oscillator sectioning
SEZIONAMENTO +5 V
+5 V Sectioning
SEZIONAMENTO +3,3 V
+3,3 V Sectioning
SEZIONAMENTO 1,8 V
1,8 V Sectioning
SEZIONAMENTO CLOCK 16 MHZ
16 MHz Clock Sectioning
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.230.555 MSZZQ

6
6/ 6
Technical Handbook
Alcatel 9600USY & MDR9000s

9600USY Rel.2.0
STM1/0 Urban Digital Radio Links
MDR9000s Rel.2.0
OC3 Urban Link
Regenerator 3+1/4+0 (UHRN) configuration
955.203.363 W Ed.01
3DB 04163 DAAA Ed.01
Documentation set for 9600USY/MDR9000s Rel.2.0 Regenerator 3+1/4+0 (UHRN) configuration

ANV P/N
Factory P/N
Handbook
ODU Technical Handbook
3DB 04163 AAAA

955.203.360 F
UHRN Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook
3DB 04163 DAAA

955.203.363 W
UHRN Rel.2.0
3DB 04164 CAAA

957.207.062 J
UHRN Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Installation Handbook
3DB 01532 BAAA

955.203.342 Z
UHRN Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Lineup Guide
3DB 01534 BAAA

955.203.352 T
3DB 04165 EAAA

955.203.374 Z
1320CT Version 1.3.x Basic Operators Handbook
3AL 79186 AAAA

957.130.542 E
1330AS Rel.5.0 Operators Handbook
3AL 71079 AAAA

957.130.442 A
ELM Rel.5.0 Operators Handbook
3AL 71081 AAAA

957.130.462 E
this
Handbook
When supplied on paper, this handbook and the annexed documents are divided by registers, for an easier
access to the information herein contained:
CONTENTS
REGISTER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HANDBOOK GUIDE
DESCRIPTIONS
MAINTENANCE
APPENDICES
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTS
HANDBOOK
ENCLOSED
DOCUMENTS
955.203.363 W Ed.01
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 955.203.363
W Ed.01 3DB 04163 DAAA Ed.01
9600USY & MDR9000s Rel.2.0

Regenerator 3+1/4+0 (UHRN)
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)
No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 460 + 6

DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du ks): 130.721 kbytes
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING
COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:

HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
SERVONO 6 SEPARATORI NUMERATI DA 1 A 6
6 REGISTERS NUMBERED FROM 1 TO 6 ARE NECESSARY
No pagine
(facciate)
No pages
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
fase
step
TARGHETTE - LABELS
FRONTESPIZIO - FRONT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSERIRE SEPARATORE 1 - INSERT REGISTER 1
HANDBOOK GUIDE
DESCRIPTIONS
MAINTENANCE
10
11
APPENDICES
numerate
numbered
da from
a to
1/458
14/458
15/458
40/458
41/458
366/458
367/458
406/458
407/458
450/458
CONTINUA CONTINUES
ED
01
RELEASED
955.203.363 TQZZA
3DB 04163 DAAA TQZZA

6
1/ 6


CONTINUA CONTINUES
No pagine
(facciate)
No pages
fase
step
12
13
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES
TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES:
460
TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS:
230
STAMPARE SOLO FRONTE
numerate
numbered
da from
a to
451/458
458/458
RECTO PRINTING
14
15
INSERIRE DOCUMENTO INSERT DOCUMENT
3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
fine istruzioni assemblaggio end of assembly instructions

WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format.

The documents MSZZ are archived in PDAS; get the highest edition
Source files in PD1: ALICE 6.10 ARCHIVED BY GAPI 3.9.1
PDF file retrieved from PD1 must be opened with ACROBAT Reader Version 4.0 at least.
01
RELEASED
955.203.363 TQZZA

6
2/ 6


Site
CONCOREZZO
WTD
Originators
E.CORRADINI
9600USY&MDR9000S REL.2.0
UHRN VERSION
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Domain
Division
Rubric
Type
Distribution Codes
:
:
:
:
9600USY/MDR9000s REL.2.0
UHRN VERSION
9600USY&MDR9000s REL.2.0 UHRN TECH.HDBK
Internal :
External
:
Approvals
Name
App.
G.CONSONNI
Name
App.
955.203.363 W
3DB 04163 DAAA
Ed.01
9600USY & MDR9000s Rel.2.0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM 1/0 Urban Digital Radio Links

OC3 Urban Link
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED
01
RELEASED
955.203.363 TQZZA

6
3/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
01
RELEASED
955.203.363 TQZZA
4/ 6
9600USY & MDR9000s Rel.2.0


OC3 Urban Link

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.203.363 W Ed.01
VOL.1/1
9600USY & MDR9000s Rel.2.0

OC3 Urban Link
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.203.363 W Ed.01
VOL.1/1
9600USY & MDR9000s Rel.2.0
OC3 Urban Link

955.203.363 W Ed.01
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
9600USY & MDR9000s Rel.2.0

STM 1/0 Urban Digital Radio Links OC3 Urban Link
955.203.363 W Ed.01 3DB 04163 DAAA Ed.01
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
9600USY & MDR9000s Rel.2.0

OC3 Urban Link
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
955.203.363 W Ed.01
ED
01
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
RELEASED
955.203.363 TQZZA

6
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
ED
01
RELEASED
955.203.363 TQZZA
6/ 6
NOTES ON NAVIGATION AND PRINTING
NAVIGATION
THIS HANDBOOK IS COMPOSED BY SEVERAL DOCUMENTS.
PAGE NUMBERING RESTARTS FROM 1 AT THE BEGINNING OF EACH DOCUMENT.
CROSS REFERENCES (ex. see Figure 3 on page 45) ARE ALWAYS INSIDE THE DOCUMENT
WHERE YOU ARE, AND ARE REFERRED TO THE DOCUMENT PAGES (NOT TO THE PDF FILE
PAGE NUMBERING).
PRINTING
BESIDES TAKING INTO ACCOUNT THE STATEMENTS GIVEN IN WARNING ON NAVIGATION,
TAKE INTO ACCOUNT THAT:
PDF FILE PAGES 1 TO 458 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO/VERSO PRINTING.
PDF FILE PAGES 459 TO 498 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO PRINTING
PDF FILE PAGES 499 TO 508 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO/VERSO PRINTING (PAGE
507/508 IS THIS PAGE).
IN ORDER TO PRINT A SELECTED PART OF THE HANDBOOK:
GO ON THE FIRST PAGE TO PRINT AND TAKE NOTICE OF THE PDF FILE PAGE
NUMBER
GO ON THE LAST PAGE TO PRINT AND TAKE NOTICE OF THE PDF FILE PAGE
NUMBER
THESE TWO NUMBERS ARE THE RANGE TO BE SPECIFIED FOR PRINTING.
END OF FILE

Manual Técnico UHRN

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Técnico UHRN

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

9600USY&MDR9000S REL.2.0 UHRN TECH.HDBK

SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 INTRODUCTION TO THE 9600USY RADIO SYSTEM FAMILY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

3.2.7 UHRNODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

4.5.2 ODU 1+0 compact equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

6.4.2 Power Supply Unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

8.4.2 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SAM 3+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

10 SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

11 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

10.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Fig. 50. RRA/MODEM unit front view (without XPIC option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Fig. 156. Equipment management function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Fig. 210. L.O. block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Tab. 19. 9600USY/UHRN IDU/REG Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Tab. 71. Technical Handbooks related to the specific configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

Chapter 1 Document Guide

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Access to the Equipment

Service Personnel skill

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Tab. 1. Quick guide

read chapter 9 on page 409 of this handbook

have a very short description of the

read para.3.2 on pages 48 thru 59 of this handbook

logically configure a station (or

read chapter 5 on page 171 of this handbook

IDU/REG (without EPS option), read para.4.2.1 on page

IDUs additional items for EPS option, read para.4.2.3 on

ODU and ANTENNAS and OUTDOOR HYBRIDS, get

getting item P/Ns

TOPICS FOR ODU ASSEMBLY

read para.4.5 on page 140 of this handbook